SM XR220

Front cover
GE Healthcare
Optima XR200amx/XR220amx
Advanced System Manual
ADVANCED SERVICE DOCUMENTATION.

COPYRIGHT GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY.
GE CONFIDENTIAL.
UNLICENSED USE BY NON-GE PARTIES IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.
Direction 5336124-1EN, Rev 21

GE HEALTHCARE
Warning OPTIMA XR200AMX/XR220AMX ADVANCED SYSTEM MANUAL
REVISION 21 GE CONFIDENTIAL DIRECTION 5336124-1EN
ATTENTION
LES APPAREILS A RAYONS X SONT DANGEREUX A LA FOIS POUR LE PATIENT ET POUR LE MANIPULATEUR
SI LES MESURES DE PROTECTION NE SONT PAS STRICTEMENT APPLIQUEES
Bien que cet appareil soit construit selon les normes de sécurité les plus severes, la source de rayonnement X
représente un danger lorsque le manipulateur est non qualifié ou non averti. Une exposition excessive au rayonnement
X entraîne des dommages a l’organisme. Par conséquent, toutes les précautions doivent être prises pour éviter que les
personnes non autorisées ou non qualifées utilisent cet appareil créant ainsi un danger pour les autres et pour elles-
mêmes. Avant chaque manipulation, les personnes qualifiées et autorisées à se servir de cet appareil doivent se
renseigner sur les mesures de protection etablies par la Commission Internationale sur la Protection Radiologique,
Annales 26: Recommandations de la Commission Internationale sure la Protection Radiologique et les normes
nationales en vigueur.
WARNING
X-RAY EQUIPMENT IS DANGEROUS TO BOTH PATIENT AND OPERATOR UNLESS MEASURES OF
PROTECTION ARE STRICTLY OBSERVED.
Though this equipment is built to the highest standards of electrical and mechanical safety, the useful x-ray beam
becomes a source of danger in the hands of the unauthorized or unqualified operator. Excessive exposure to x-radiation
causes damage to human tissue.
Therefore, adequate precautions must be taken to prevent unauthorized or unqualified persons from operating this
equipment or exposing themselves or others to its radiation.
Before operation, persons qualified and authorized to operate this equipment should be familiar with the
Recommendations of the International Commission on Radiological Protection (ICRP), contained in Annals Number 26
of the ICRP, and with applicable national standards.
ATENCION
LOS APARATOS DE RAYOS X SON PELIGROSOS PARA EL PACIENTE Y EL MANIPULADOR CUANDO LAS
NORMAS DE PROTECCION NO ESTAN OBSERVADAS
Aunque este aparato está construido según las normas de seguridad más estrictas, la radiacion X constituye un peligro
al ser manipulado por personas no autorizadas o incompetentes. Una explosicion excesiva a la radiación X puede
causar daños al organismo.
Por consiguiente, se deberán tomar todas las precauciones necesarias para evitar que las personas incompetentes o
no autorizadas utilicen este aparato, lo que seria un peligro para los demás y para si mismas.
Antes de efectuar las manipulaciones, las personas habilitadas y competentes en el uso de este aparato, deberán
informarse sobre las normas de protección fijadas por la Comisión Internacional de la Protección Radiológica, Anales
No 26: Recomendaciones de la Comisión Internacional sobre la Protección Radiológica y normas nacionales.
ACHTUNG
RÖNTGENAPPARATE SIND EINE GEFAHR FUR PATIENTEN SOWIE BEDIENUNGSPERSONAL, WENN DIE
GELTENDEN SICHERHEITSVORKEHRUNGEN NICHT GENAU BEACHTET WERDEN
Dieser Apparat entspricht in seiner Bauweise strengsten elektrischen und mechanischen Sichereitsnormen, doch in den
Händen unbefugter oder unqualifizierter Personen wird er zu einer Gefahrenquelle.
Übermäßige Röntgenbestrahlung ist für den menschlichen Organismus schädlish.
Deswegen sind hinreichende Vorsichtsmaßnahmen erforderlich, um zu verhindern, daßunbefugte oder unqualifizierte
Personen solche Geräte bedienen oder sich selbst und andere Personen deren Bestrahlung aussetzen können.
Vor Inbetriebnahme dieses Apparats solite sich das qualifizierte und befugte Bedienungspersonal mit den geltenden
Kriterien für den gefahrlosen Strahleneinsatz durch sorgfältiges Studium des Hefts Nr. 26 der Internationalen
Kommission für Strahlenschutz (ICRP) vertraut machen: Empfehlungen der Internationalen Kommission für
Strahlenschutz und anderer nationaler Normenbehörden.
Page 2
GE HEALTHCARE OPTIMA XR200AMX/XR220AMX ADVANCED SYSTEM MANUAL
Important information
WARNING This service manual is available in English only.

(EN) • If a customer's service provider requires a language other than English, it is the customer's
responsibility to provide translation services.
• Do not attempt to service the equipment unless this service manual has been consulted and is
understood.
• Failure to heed this warning may result in injury to the service provider, operator or patient from
electric shock, mechanical or other hazards.
ПРЕДУПРЕЖДЕНИЕ Tова упътване за работа е налично само на английски език.
(BG) • Ако доставчикът на услугата на клиента изиска друг език, задължение на клиента е да
осигури превод.
• Не използвайте оборудването, преди да сте се консултирали и разбрали упътването за
работа.
• неспазването на това предупреждение може да доведе до нараняване на доставчика на
услугата, оператора или пациентa в резултат на токов удар, механична или друга опасност.
警告本维修手册仅提供英文版本。
(ZH-CN) • 如果客户的维修服务人员需要非英文版本，则客户需自行提供翻译服务。
• 未详细阅读和完全理解本维修手册之前，不得进行维修。
• 忽略本警告可能对维修服务人员、操作人员或患者造成电击、机械伤害或其他形式的伤
害。
警告本服務手冊僅提供英文版本。
(ZH-HK) • 倘若客戶的服務供應商需要英文以外之服務手冊，客戶有責任提供翻譯服務。
• 除非已參閱本服務手冊及明白其內容，否則切勿嘗試維修設備。
• 不遵從本警告或會令服務供應商、網絡供應商或病人受到觸電、機械性或其他的危險。
警告本維修手冊僅有英文版。
(ZH-TW) • 若客戶的維修廠商需要英文版以外的語言，應由客戶自行提供翻譯服務。
• 請勿試圖維修本設備，除非您已查閱並瞭解本維修手冊。
• 若未留意本警告，可能導致維修廠商、操作員或病患因觸電、機械或其他危險而受傷。
UPOZORENJE Ovaj servisni priručnik dostupan je na engleskom jeziku.
(HR) • Ako davatelj usluge klijenta treba neki drugi jezik, klijent je dužan osigurati prijevod.
• Ne pokušavajte servisirati opremu ako niste u potpunosti pročitali i razumjeli ovaj servisni
priručnik.
• zanemarite li ovo upozorenje, može doći do ozljede davatelja usluge, operatera ili pacijenta uslijed
strujnog udara, mehaničkih ili drugih rizika.
VÝSTRAHA Tento provozní návod existuje pouze v anglickém jazyce.

(CS) • V případě, že externí služba zákazníkům potřebuje návod v jiném jazyce, je zajištění překladu do
odpovídajícího jazyka úkolem zákazníka.
• Nesnažte se o údržbu tohoto zařízení, aniž byste si přečetli tento provozní návod a pochopili jeho
obsah.
• V případě nedodržování této výstrahy může dojít k poranění pracovníka prodejního servisu,
obslužného personálu nebo pacientů vlivem elektrického proudu, respektive vlivem mechanických
či jiných rizik.
ADVARSEL Denne servicemanual findes kun på engelsk.
(DA) • Hvis en kundes tekniker har brug for et andet sprog end engelsk, er det kundens ansvar at sørge
for oversættelse.
• Forsøg ikke at servicere udstyret uden at læse og forstå denne servicemanual.
• Manglende overholdelse af denne advarsel kan medføre skade på grund af elektrisk stød,
mekanisk eller anden fare for teknikeren, operatøren eller patienten.
Page 3
WAARSCHUWING Deze onderhoudshandleiding is enkel in het Engels verkrijgbaar.

(NL) • Als het onderhoudspersoneel een andere taal vereist, dan is de klant verantwoordelijk voor de
vertaling ervan.
• Probeer de apparatuur niet te onderhouden alvorens deze onderhoudshandleiding werd
geraadpleegd en begrepen is.
• Indien deze waarschuwing niet wordt opgevolgd, zou het onderhoudspersoneel, de operator of
een patiënt gewond kunnen raken als gevolg van een elektrische schok, mechanische of andere
gevaren.
HOIATUS See teenindusjuhend on saadaval ainult inglise keeles
(ET) • Kui klienditeeninduse osutaja nõuab juhendit inglise keelest erinevas keeles, vastutab klient
tõlketeenuse osutamise eest.
• Ärge üritage seadmeid teenindada enne eelnevalt käesoleva teenindusjuhendiga tutvumist ja
sellest aru saamist.
• Käesoleva hoiatuse eiramine võib põhjustada teenuseosutaja, operaatori või patsiendi vigastamist
elektrilöögi, mehaanilise või muu ohu tagajärjel.
VAROITUS Tämä huolto-ohje on saatavilla vain englanniksi.
(FI) • Jos asiakkaan huoltohenkilöstö vaatii muuta kuin englanninkielistä materiaalia, tarvittavan
käännöksen hankkiminen on asiakkaan vastuulla.
• Älä yritä korjata laitteistoa ennen kuin olet varmasti lukenut ja ymmärtänyt tämän huolto-ohjeen.
• Mikäli tätä varoitusta ei noudateta, seurauksena voi olla huoltohenkilöstön, laitteiston käyttäjän tai
potilaan vahingoittuminen sähköiskun, mekaanisen vian tai muun vaaratilanteen vuoksi.
ATTENTION Ce manuel d’installation et de maintenance est disponible uniquement en anglais.
(FR) • Si le technicien d'un client a besoin de ce manuel dans une langue autre que l'anglais, il incombe
au client de le faire traduire.
• Ne pas tenter d'intervenir sur les équipements tant que ce manuel d’installation et de maintenance
n'a pas été consulté et compris.
• Le non-respect de cet avertissement peut entraîner chez le technicien, l'opérateur ou le patient
des blessures dues à des dangers électriques, mécaniques ou autres.
WARNUNG Diese Serviceanleitung existiert nur in englischer Sprache.
(DE) • Falls ein fremder Kundendienst eine andere Sprache benötigt, ist es Aufgabe des Kunden für eine
entsprechende Übersetzung zu sorgen.
• Versuchen Sie nicht diese Anlage zu warten, ohne diese Serviceanleitung gelesen und
verstanden zu haben.
• Wird diese Warnung nicht beachtet, so kann es zu Verletzungen des Kundendiensttechnikers, des
Bedieners oder des Patienten durch Stromschläge, mechanische oder sonstige Gefahren
kommen.
ΠΡΟΕΙΔΟΠΟΙΗΣΗ Το παρόν εγχειρίδιο σέρβις διατίθεται μόνο στα αγγλικά.
(EL) • Εάν ο τεχνικός σέρβις ενός πελάτη απαιτεί το παρόν εγχειρίδιο σε γλώσσα εκτός των αγγλικών,
αποτελεί ευθύνη του πελάτη να παρέχει τις υπηρεσίες μετάφρασης.
• Μην επιχειρήσετε την εκτέλεση εργασιών σέρβις στον εξοπλισμό αν δεν έχετε συμβουλευτεί και
κατανοήσει το παρόν εγχειρίδιο σέρβις.
• Αν δεν προσέξετε την προειδοποίηση αυτή, ενδέχεται να προκληθεί τραυματισμός στον τεχνικό
σέρβις, στο χειριστή ή στον ασθενή από ηλεκτροπληξία, μηχανικούς ή άλλους κινδύνους.
FIGYELMEZTETÉS Ezen karbantartási kézikönyv kizárólag angol nyelven érhető el.
(HU) • Ha a vevő szolgáltatója angoltól eltérő nyelvre tart igényt, akkor a vevő felelőssége a fordítás
elkészíttetése.
• Ne próbálja elkezdeni használni a berendezést, amíg a karbantartási kézikönyvben leírtakat nem
értelmezték.
• Ezen figyelmeztetés figyelmen kívül hagyása a szolgáltató, működtető vagy a beteg áramütés,
mechanikai vagy egyéb veszélyhelyzet miatti sérülését eredményezheti.
AÐVÖRUN Þessi þjónustuhandbók er aðeins fáanleg á ensku.
(IS) • Ef að þjónustuveitandi viðskiptamanns þarfnast annas tungumáls en ensku, er það skylda
viðskiptamanns að skaffa tungumálaþjónustu.
• Reynið ekki að afgreiða tækið nema að þessi þjónustuhandbók hefur verið skoðuð og skilin.
• Brot á sinna þessari aðvörun getur leitt til meiðsla á þjónustuveitanda, stjórnanda eða sjúklings frá
raflosti, vélrænu eða öðrum áhættum.
Page 4
AVVERTENZA Il presente manuale di manutenzione è disponibile soltanto in lingua inglese.

(IT) • Se un addetto alla manutenzione richiede il manuale in una lingua diversa, il cliente è tenuto a
provvedere direttamente alla traduzione.
• Procedere alla manutenzione dell'apparecchiatura solo dopo aver consultato il presente manuale
ed averne compreso il contenuto.
• Il mancato rispetto della presente avvertenza potrebbe causare lesioni all'addetto alla
manutenzione, all'operatore o ai pazienti provocate da scosse elettriche, urti meccanici o altri
rischi.
このサービスマニュアルには英語版しかありません。
(JA)  サービスを担当される業者が英語以外の言語を要求される場合、翻訳作業はその業者の責任で行
うものとさせていただきます。
 このサービスマニュアルを熟読し理解せずに、装置のサービスを行わないでください。
この警告に従わない場合、サービスを担当される方、操作員あるいは患者さんが、感電や機械
的又はその他の危険により負傷する可能性があります。
경고 본 서비스 매뉴얼은 영어로만 이용하실 수 있습니다 .
(KO) • 고객의 서비스 제공자가 영어 이외의 언어를 요구할 경우 , 번역 서비스를 제공하는 것은 고객
의 책임입니다 .
• 본 서비스 매뉴얼을 참조하여 숙지하지 않은 이상 해당 장비를 수리하려고 시도하지 마십시오 .
• 본 경고 사항에 유의하지 않으면 전기 쇼크 , 기계적 위험 , 또는 기타 위험으로 인해 서비스 제공자
, 사용자 또는 환자에게 부상을 입힐 수 있습니다 .
BRÎDINÂJUMS Šī apkopes rokasgrāmata ir pieejama tikai angļu valodā.
(LV) • Ja klienta apkopes sniedzējam nepieciešama informācija citā valodā, klienta pienākums ir
nodrošināt tulkojumu.
• Neveiciet aprīkojuma apkopi bez apkopes rokasgrāmatas izlasīšanas un saprašanas.
• Šī brīdinājuma neievērošanas rezultātā var rasties elektriskās strāvas trieciena, mehānisku vai
citu faktoru izraisītu traumu risks apkopes sniedzējam, operatoram vai pacientam.
ĮSPĖJIMAS Šis eksploatavimo vadovas yra tik anglų kalba.
(LT) • Jei kliento paslaugų tiekėjas reikalauja vadovo kita kalba – ne anglų, suteikti vertimo paslaugas
privalo klientas.
• Nemėginkite atlikti įrangos techninės priežiūros, jei neperskaitėte ar nesupratote šio
eksploatavimo vadovo.
• Jei nepaisysite šio įspėjimo, galimi paslaugų tiekėjo, operatoriaus ar paciento sužalojimai dėl
elektros šoko, mechaninių ar kitų pavojų.
ADVARSEL Denne servicehåndboken finnes bare på engelsk.
(NO) • Hvis kundens serviceleverandør har bruk for et annet språk, er det kundens ansvar å sørge for
oversettelse.
• Ikke forsøk å reparere utstyret uten at denne servicehåndboken er lest og forstått.
• Manglende hensyn til denne advarselen kan føre til at serviceleverandøren, operatøren eller
pasienten skades på grunn av elektrisk støt, mekaniske eller andre farer.
OSTRZEŻENIE Niniejszy podręcznik serwisowy dostępny jest jedynie w języku angielskim.
(PL) • Jeśli serwisant klienta wymaga języka innego niż angielski, zapewnienie usługi tłumaczenia jest
obowiązkiem klienta.
• Nie próbować serwisować urządzenia bez zapoznania się z niniejszym podręcznikiem
serwisowym i zrozumienia go.
• Niezastosowanie się do tego ostrzeżenia może doprowadzić do obrażeń serwisanta, operatora
lub pacjenta w wyniku porażenia prądem elektrycznym, zagrożenia mechanicznego bądź innego.
AVISO Este manual de assistência técnica encontra-se disponível unicamente em inglês.
(PT-BR) • Se outro serviço de assistência técnica solicitar a tradução deste manual, caberá ao cliente
fornecer os serviços de tradução.
• Não tente reparar o equipamento sem ter consultado e compreendido este manual de assistência
técnica.
• A não observância deste aviso pode ocasionar ferimentos no técnico, operador ou paciente
decorrentes de choques elétricos, mecânicos ou outros.
ATENÇÃO Este manual de assistência técnica só se encontra disponível em inglês.
(PT-PT) • Se qualquer outro serviço de assistência técnica solicitar este manual noutro idioma, é da
responsabilidade do cliente fornecer os serviços de tradução.
• Não tente reparar o equipamento sem ter consultado e compreendido este manual de assistência
técnica.
• O não cumprimento deste aviso pode colocar em perigo a segurança do técnico, do operador ou
do paciente devido a choques eléctricos, mecânicos ou outros.
Page 5
ATENŢIE Acest manual de service este disponibil doar în limba engleză.

(RO) • Dacă un furnizor de servicii pentru clienţi necesită o altă limbă decât cea engleză, este de datoria
clientului să furnizeze o traducere.
• Nu încercaţi să reparaţi echipamentul decât ulterior consultării şi înţelegerii acestui manual de
service.
• Ignorarea acestui avertisment ar putea duce la rănirea depanatorului, operatorului sau pacientului
în urma pericolelor de electrocutare, mecanice sau de altă natură.
ОСТОРОЖНО! Данное руководство по техническому обслуживанию представлено только на английском языке.
(RU) • Если сервисному персоналу клиента необходимо руководство не на английском, а на
каком-то другом языке, клиенту следует самостоятельно обеспечить перевод.
• Перед техническим обслуживанием оборудования обязательно обратитесь к данному
руководству и поймите изложенные в нем сведения.
• Несоблюдение требований данного предупреждения может привести к тому, что
специалист по техобслуживанию, оператор или пациент получит удар электрическим током,
механическую травму или другое повреждение
UPOZORENJE Ovo servisno uputstvo je dostupno samo na engleskom jeziku.
(SR) • Ako klijentov serviser zahteva neki drugi jezik, klijent je dužan da obezbedi prevodilačke usluge.
• Ne pokušavajte da opravite uređaj ako niste pročitali i razumeli ovo servisno uputstvo.
• Zanemarivanje ovog upozorenja može dovesti do povređivanja servisera, rukovaoca ili pacijenta
usled strujnog udara ili mehaničkih i drugih opasnosti.
UPOZORNENIE Tento návod na obsluhu je k dispozícii len v angličtine.
(SK) • Ak zákazníkov poskytovateľ služieb vyžaduje iný jazyk ako angličtinu, poskytnutie
prekladateľských služieb je zodpovednosťou zákazníka.
• Nepokúšajte sa o obsluhu zariadenia, kým si neprečítate návod na obluhu a neporozumiete mu.
• Zanedbanie tohto upozornenia môže spôsobiť zranenie poskytovateľa služieb, obsluhujúcej
osoby alebo pacienta elektrickým prúdom, mechanické alebo iné ohrozenie.
ATENCION Este manual de servicio sólo existe en inglés.
(ES) • Si el encargado de mantenimiento de un cliente necesita un idioma que no sea el inglés, el cliente
deberá encargarse de la traducción del manual.
• No se deberá dar servicio técnico al equipo, sin haber consultado y comprendido este manual de
servicio.
• La no observancia del presente aviso puede dar lugar a que el proveedor de servicios, el
operador o el paciente sufran lesiones provocadas por causas eléctricas, mecánicas o de otra
naturaleza.
VARNING Den här servicehandboken finns bara tillgänglig på engelska. .
(SV) • Om en kunds servicetekniker har behov av ett annat språk än engelska, ansvarar kunden för att
tillhandahålla översättningstjänster.
• Försök inte utföra service på utrustningen om du inte har läst och förstår den här
servicehandboken.
• Om du inte tar hänsyn till den här varningen kan det resultera i skador på serviceteknikern,
operatören eller patienten till följd av elektriska stötar, mekaniska faror eller andra faror.
OPOZORILO Ta servisni priročnik je na voljo samo v angleškem jeziku.
(SL) • Če ponudnik storitve stranke potrebuje priročnik v drugem jeziku, mora stranka zagotoviti prevod.
• Ne poskušajte servisirati opreme, če tega priročnika niste v celoti prebrali in razumeli.
• Če tega opozorila ne upoštevate, se lahko zaradi električnega udara, mehanskih ali drugih
nevarnosti poškoduje ponudnik storitev, operater ali bolnik.
DİKKAT Bu servis kılavuzunun sadece ingilizcesi mevcuttur.
(TR) • Eğer müşteri teknisyeni bu kılavuzu ingilizce dışında bir başka lisandan talep ederse, bunu
tercüme ettirmek müşteriye düşer.
• Servis kılavuzunu okuyup anlamadan ekipmanlara müdahale etmeyiniz.
• Bu uyarıya uyulmaması, elektrik, mekanik veya diğer tehlikelerden dolayı teknisyen, operatör
veya hastanın yaralanmasına yol açabilir.
Page 6
Legal notes
TRADEMARKS
Optima XR200amxTM and Optima XR220amxTM are trademarks of GE Healthcare. WPA and WPA2
are trademarks of the Wi-Fi Alliance. All other products and their name brands are trademarks of
their respective holders.
COPYRIGHTS
All material copyright © 2011-2020 by General Electric Company, Inc. All rights reserved. The
material presented and contained herein may not be reproduced in any form or manner, without the
written permission of General Electric Company, Inc.
Page 7
Important precautions
DAMAGE IN TRANSPORTATION
All packages should be closely examined at time of delivery. If damage is apparent, have notation
“damage in shipment” written on all copies of the freight or express bill before delivery is accepted
or “signed for” by a General Electric representative or a hospital receiving agent. Whether noted or
concealed, damage MUST be reported to the carrier immediately upon discovery, or in any event,
within 14 days after receipt, and the contents and containers held for inspection by the carrier. A
transportation company will not pay a claim for damage if an inspection is not requested within this
14 day period.
To file a report, call 1-800-548-3366. Select the option for “Install Support Services for FOA and
MIS.” Contact your local service coordinator for more information on this process.
CERTIFIED ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR STATEMENT

All electrical installations that are preliminary to positioning of the equipment at the site prepared for
the equipment shall be performed by licensed electrical contractors. In addition, electrical feeds into
the Power Distribution Unit shall be performed by licensed electrical contractors. Other connections
between pieces of electrical equipment, calibrations and testing shall be performed by qualified GE
Healthcare personnel. The products involved (and the accompanying electrical installations) are
highly sophisticated, and special engineering competence is required. In performing all electrical
work on these products, GE will use its own specially trained field engineers. All of GE’s electrical
work on these products will comply with the requirements of the applicable electrical codes.
The purchaser of GE equipment shall only utilize qualified personnel (i.e., GE field engineers,
personnel of third-party service companies with equivalent training, or licensed electricians) to
perform electrical servicing on the equipment.
IMPORTANT...X-RAY PROTECTION
X-ray equipment if not properly used may cause injury. Accordingly, the instructions herein
contained should be thoroughly read and understood by everyone who will use the equipment
before you attempt to place this equipment in operation. GE Healthcare will be glad to assist and
cooperate in placing this equipment in use.
Although this apparatus incorporates a high degree of protection against x-radiation other than the
useful beam, no practical design of equipment can provide complete protection. Nor can any
practical design compel the operator to take adequate precautions to prevent the possibility of any
persons carelessly exposing themselves or others to radiation.
It is important that anyone having anything to do with x-radiation be properly trained and fully
acquainted with the recommendations of the National Council on Radiation Protection and
Measurements (NCRP) as published in NCRP Reports available from NCRP Publications, 7910
Woodmont Avenue, Room 1016, Bethesda, Maryland 20814, and of the International Commission
on Radiation Protection, and take adequate steps to protect against injury.
The equipment is sold with the understanding that GE Healthcare, its agents, and representatives
have no responsibility for injury or damage which may result from improper use of the equipment.
Various protective materials and devices are available. It is urged that such materials or devices be
used.
Page 8
LITHIUM BATTERY CAUTIONARY STATEMENT
DANGER - Risk of Explosion

Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly replaced.
Replace only with the same or equivalent type recommended by the
manufacturer. Discard used batteries according to the manufacturer’s
instructions.
ATTENTION - Danger d’Explosion

Il y a danger d’explosion s’il y a replacement incorrect de la batterie.
Remplacer uniquement avec une batterie du même type ou d’un type
recommandé par le constructeur. Mettre au rébut les batteries
usagées conformément aux instructions du fabricant.
TECHNICAL MANUAL UPDATES

When operating or servicing GE Healthcare products, please contact your GE representative for
the latest revision of product documentation. Product documentation may also be available on-line
at the GE Healthcare support documentation library.
OMISSIONS AND ERRORS

Customers, please contact your GE Healthcare sales or service representatives.
GE personnel, please use the GE Healthcare complaint handling process to report all omissions,
errors, and defects in this publication.
Page 9
Revision history
Revision Date Reason for change

1 30SEP2011 Initial release of document.
Updated Regulatory Testing chapter. Refer to SPR
HCSDM00103500.
Validation updates Refer to SPRs: HCSDM00103500,
HCSDM00104175, HCSDM00104185, HCSDM00104239,
2 28OCT2011 HCSDM00105014, HCSDM00105016, HCSDM00105017,
HCSDM00105479, HCSDM00105537
3 09NOV2011 Updated Load From Cold sections. Refer to SPR HCSDM0010749.
Validation updates. Refer to SPRs: HCSDM00108056,
4 14NOV2011
HCSDM00108096, HCSDM00108097, HCSDM00108098
Validation updates. Refer to SPRs: HCSDM00109056,
5 17NOV2011
HCSDM00109082
6 05DEC2011 Validation updates. Refer to SPR HCSDM00111281.
Added Chapter 4, Section 4.13 - IP Address Change Procedure.
Added Note to Chapter 3, Sections 3.2.1.2.1 (after step 14) and
3.2.1.2.2 (after step 15) on changing the Internal IP Address.
7 03FEB2012
Updated Chapter 9, Section 9.5.16.3 (step 15) to correct wiring
connection from NO to NC.
Refer to SPR HCSDM00120703.
Added "Perform QAP" step to Finalization Sections 9.6.2.4, 9.6.3.4,
9.6.5.4, 9.6.6.4, 9.6.7.4, 9.6.8.4, 9.6.9.4, 9.6.15.4. Refer to SPR
HCSDM00140842.
8 26JUL2012
Updated Chapter 9, Sections 9.4.1 - Drive Wheel and 9.4.4 - Front
Caster to show proper lifting/supporting of unit. Refer to TrackWise
8111422.
Page 10

Updated Chapter 9, Section 9.6.5 - Tube mount - detent side (cathode
side) and Section 9.6.6 - Tube mount - friction side (anode side) to
show new version of tube mounts. Refer to ECO 2122380.
Added text to front material on how to obtain most recent revisions of
technical manuals. Satisfies FDA recommendation.
Updated PM Checklist and PM Procedures to add hand switch visual
inspection, functional checks, cleaning and 3-year replacement. Refer
9 29SEP2012
to CAPA 5970812.
Added ’Detector firmware download’ procedure to the System Data &
Software chapter. Refer to SPR HCSDM00157822.
Updated Chapter 7, Section 7.1.6.1 Step 4 to "Verify that the selected
kVp and mAs are displayed in the protocol modification frames and the
left side of the status bar. Both displays should match." Refer to
TrackWise 8987140.
Chapter 9, added new Section 9.4.6 - Column replacement. Refer to
ECO 2147940.
Chapter 7, Section 7.2.2, added Note about potential test equipment
damage. Refer to HCSDM00188252.
Chapter 4, Section 4.13, updated text in Steps 3 and 6. Refer to
HCSDM00185329.
Chapter 2, Section 2.4, deleted Section 2.4.3 - PM Checklist. Refer to
HCSDM00188249.
Chapter 9, added new Section 9.2.4 - Spyder to Board Data Module
Cable Replacement. Refer to ECR 2144543.
Chapter 9, Section 9.5.11, updated procedure to support new BDM
cable. Refer to ECR 2144543.
Chapter 4, Sections 4.10.3.1 and 4.10.3.2, added Notes about need
to reset system after DAP reconnection. Refer to HCSDM00188256.
Chapter 9, Section 9.6.10.3, added Note about need to reset system
10 19SEP2013
after DAP reconnection. Refer to HCSDM00188256.
Chapter 9, added new Section 9.4.2.3.1 - Battery Pack Integration.
Refer to HCSDM00188260.
Chapter 9, Section 9.4.1.2.2, added Loctite 242. Refer to
HCSDM00191982.
Chapter 9, Section 9.4.1.3, updated text in Step 9 to add thread locker
to screws. Refer to HCSDM00191982.
Chapter 9, Section 9.6.2.3, updated text in Steps 2 and 4 to save
existing hardware for reuse. Refer to HCSDM00202552.
Chapter 7, added new Section 7.3 - Tube Radiation Leakage Test.
Chapter 9, Section 9.6.2.3, added note before Step 1 regarding
carriage safety lock. Refer to HCSDM00202552.
Chapter 3, Section 3.4, updated steps 3-5 with correct navigation
links. Refer to HCSDM00188263.
Chapter 5, added new Section 5.6.3 - DAP Calibration.
Chapter 2, Table 2-4, added DAP Calibration reference.
11 13NOV2013
Chapter 9, Section 9.6.10.4, added step for DAP Calibration. Refer to
HCSDM00159583.
Page 11

Chapter 4, Section 4.10.3, changed Figures 4-9 and 4-10 to show
DAP meter in lower set of collimator rails. Refer to HCSDM00264083.
Chapter 4, Section 4.10.3.2, added steps to remove cable cover and
then put back on at end of procedure. Refer to ECO 2160317.
Chapter 4, Section 4.10.4, added Wireless Handswitch Installation
section. Refer to ECO 2162103.
Chapter 3, Section 3.2.1.2.1, step 4, added to check and record
existing system IP address prior to SW download. Refer to
HCSDM00264080.
Chapter 3, Section 3.2.1.2.1 and Section 3.2.1.2.2, added step 16
instruction to load operator manual. Reference link to Section 4.8
12 01MAY2014
Installing the operator manual. Refer to HCSDM00264101.
Chapter 7, Section 7.2.1, changed bin measurement point in Table 7-
20 to "Screw used for mounting strain relief of wired handswitch
cable". Changed Fig 7-16 to show new measurement point. Refer to
ECO 2148874.
Chapter 8, Section 8.3, updated Djinn troubleshooting section. Refer
to HCSDM00184528.
Chapter 9, Section 9.3, added cable cover installation procedure.
Refer to ECO 2160317.
Chapter 8, Section 8.5, added wireless troubleshooting section. Refer
to ECOs 2151611, 2158312.
Chapter 4, Section 4.2.6, added “FIPS ON” column in table 4-7 and
table 4-8 for wireless Authentication requirement.
Chapter 4, Section 4.8, Section 4.9, Section 4.13, added notes
regarding consulting your administrator for Account and Password
information.
Chapter 4, Section 4.10.4, added tablet holder assembly installation
13 03DEC2014 procedure.
Chapter 8, Section 8.7.16, added tablet support arm assembly
replacement procedure.
Chapter 8, Section 8.7.16, added Tablet clamp assembly replacement
procedure.
Chapter 8, Added torque requirement in some parts replacement
procedure. Refer to DOC1633766.
Chapter 4, Section 4.10.4 revised tablet holder assembly installation
procedure refer
to ECR/O 2186522
14 06FEB2015
Chapter 9 Section 9.7.16 revised tablet holder assembly replacement
procedure refer
to ECR/O 2186522
Page 12

Chapter 1, Changed Figure 1-1 to Correct LOTO kit. Refer to
HCSDM00361379.
Chapter 4, revised step 12 in section 4.8. Refer to HCSDM00339362.
Chapter 9 and 3, revised section 9.6.1 for Spyder system controller
replacement and added a warning on FW compatibility with Spyder
15 31OCT2015 system controller in section 3.3. Refer to HCSDM00342629.
Chapter 9 and 3, revised section 9.6.10 for loading the LUT of top
cover 5555005-10. Added a note in section 3.2.1.3. Refer to
HCSDM00315496.
Chapter 9, added section 9.7.17 for collimator handle switch FRU kit.
Chapter 7, added a section to add Medical device list for UDI
compliance.
16 22MAR2016 Chapter 9, revised section Front bin and inner front bin for Front bin as
FRU is no longer supported.
Above revise is per MDCP DOC1789887.
Manual is impacted and updated due to ECR2224353:
Chapter 3, added new Section 3.2.1.3 FCC Configuration.
17 26JUL2017 Chapter 9, revised Section 9.6.11 System PC.
Chapter 9, added a point in Section 9.6.11.4 about FCC configuration
SW patch.
Manual updated with the following:
• Chapter 2,
- Updated Section 2.1 Before You Begin.
• Chapter 3,
- Added Section 3.6 FCC Configuration.
• Chapter 8,
- Added Section 8.3.1.7.1 URP detector battery desktop
charger.
• Chapter 9,
- Added Section 9.1.6 Detector Bin Side Rails FRU
Replacement procedure.
18 12MAR2018 - Updated Step 5 and 6 in Section 9.6.10.4 Finalization.
- Added Section 9.6.28 Flexible hand switch holder
replacement procedure.
- Updated Section 9.6.26 Mantis power supply.
- Added Section 9.7.11 DAP meters side rail bracket
replacement.
- Added Section 9.7.18 Collimator handle switch FRU kit
introduction.
- Added Section 9.7.19 Collimator front cover replacement
procedure.
- Added Section 9.8.20 UWB Channel Change Procedure.
• Manual impacted with Toshiba to Canon label change across the
manual.
Page 13

Manual impacted and updated due to ECR2252536:
• Chapter 2,
- Modified Ground Resistance and Leakage Test in Table2-2.
• Chapter 7,
- Added Fluke ESA612 in Section 7.1.1
- Updated Section 7.2 Testing electrical safety with Fluke
ESA612.
- Added references to Fluke ESA612 in Section 7.2.1
19 10APR2019 - Updated the header of Section 7.2.1.1 from “Gathering test
equipment” to “Ground Resistance test with Hioki 3157".
- Updated Section 7.2.2 from 0.1 Ohm to 0.3 Ohm
- Added Fluke ESA612 in point #3.
- Modified Section reference for Condition 1 in table 7-21.
- Updated the header of Section 7.2.2.1 from “Condition 1:
Power off, normal outlet, X-ray off” to “Leakage Current Test
with Dale 601/601E”.
• Added new Appendix C and added content of Ground and
Leakage Current Testing for Fluke ESA612.
• Chapter 2, modified and sequenced PM procedures as
appropriate.
20 14OCT2019
• Chapter 7, added contents of FLUKE ESA612 (Removed
Appendix C and moved contents to Chapter 7).
Chapter 2,
• Updated Table 2-2 Suspended Mass with cross-references
images of Suspended Mass.
21 10MAR2020 • Added Section 2.3.5.1 Suspended Mass Checks.
Chapter 7,
• Corrected typo 300 Ohm to 300m Ohm in Section 7.2.1 Perform
Ground Resistance Testing.
Page 14
Preface publication conventions
Preface Publication Conventions

Standardized conventions for representing information is a uniform way of communicating
information to a reader in a consistent manner. Conventions are used so that the reader can easily
recognize the actions or decisions that must be made. There are a number of character and
paragraph styles used in this publication to accomplish this task. Please become familiar with them
before proceeding forward.
It is important that you read and understand hazard statements, and not just ignore them.
Safety & Hazard Information

Proper product safety labeling allows a person to safely use or service a product. The format and
style for safety communications reflected in this publication represents the harmonization of IEC/
ISO 3864 and ANSI Z535 standards.
Within this publication, different paragraph and character styles are used to indicated potential
hazards. Paragraph prefixes, such as hazard, caution, danger and warning, are used to identify
important safety information. Text (Hazard) styles are applied to the paragraph contents that are
applicable to each specific safety statement.
Hazard Messages
Any action that will, could or potentially cause personal injury will be preceded by the safety alert
symbol and an appropriate signal word. The safety alert symbol is the triangle with an exclamation
mark within it. It Is always used next to the signal word to indicate the severity of the hazard.
Together, they are used to indicate a hazard exists.
Signal words describe the severity of possible human injures that may be encountered. The alert
symbol and signal word are placed immediately before any paragraph they affect. Safety
information includes:
1.) Signal Word - The seriousness level of the hazard.
2.) Symbol or Pictorial - The consequence of interaction with the hazard.
3.) Word Message:
a.) The nature of the hazard (i.e. the type of hazard)
b.) How to avoid the hazard.
The safety alert symbol is not used when an action can only cause equipment damage.
Text Format of Signal Words

DANGER - INDICATES AN IMMINENTLY HAZARDOUS SITUATION WHICH, IF
NOT AVOIDED, WILL RESULT IN DEATH OR SERIOUS INJURY. THIS SIGNAL
WORD IS LIMITED TO THE MOST EXTREME SITUATIONS.
WARNING - INDICATES A POTENTIALLY HAZARDOUS SITUATION WHICH, IF NOT
AVOIDED, COULD RESULT IN DEATH OR SERIOUS INJURY.
Caution - Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, may result in
minor or moderate injury. It may also be used to alert against unsafe practices.
NOTICE - Indicates information or a company policy that relates directly or indirectly to the
safety of personnel or protection of property. This signal word is associated directly with a
hazard or hazardous situation and is used in place of 'DANGER,' 'WARNING,' or 'CAUTION.'
It can include:
Page 15
• Destruction of a disk drive

• Potential for internal mechanical damage, such as to a X-ray tube
Symbols and Pictorials Used

The following Symbols and Pictorials are be used in this publication. These graphical icons
(symbols) may be used to make you aware of specific types of hazards that could possibly cause
harm.
keep_up magnetic biohazard compressgas ppe-hearing
fragile impact corrosive heavyobject ppe-2people
static_elec heat general laser ppe-respitory
keep_dry pinch radiation poisongas ppe-loto
general explosive electrical flammable ppe-eye
torque crush/mechanical tipping Read Manual ppe-gloves
ce instuction poisonmatl entanglement instuction
Page 16
Publication Conventions
General Paragraph and Character Styles
Prefixes are used to highlight important non-safety related information. Paragraph prefixes (such
as Purpose, Example, Comment or Note) are used to identify important but non-safety related
information. Text styles are also applied to text within each paragraph modified by the specific
prefix.
EXAMPLES OF PREFIXES USED FOR GENERAL INFORMATION:

Purpose: Introduces and provides meaning as to the information contained within the chapter,
section or subsection (such as used at the beginning this chapter, for example).
Note: Conveys information that should be considered important to the reader.
Example: Used to make the reader aware that the paragraph(s) that follow are examples of information
possibly stated previously.
Comment: Represents “additional” information that may or may not be relevant to your situation.
Page Layout
Publication Part Number & Revision Number Publication Title
The current section and its title The current chapter and its title
are always shown in the footer of are always shown in the footer of
the left (even) page. the right (odd) page.
An exclamation point in a triangle is used Paragraphs preceeded by a symbol
to indicate important information to the user. (e.g. bullets) contain information that
Paragraphs preceeded by Alphanumeric has no specific order.
characters (e.g. numbers) contain infor-
mation that must be followed in a specific order.
Headers and footers in this publication are designed to allow you to quickly identify your location.
The document part number and revision number appears in every header on every page. Odd
numbered page footers indicate the current chapter, its title and current page number. Even page
footers show the current section and its title, as well as the current page number.
Page 17
Computer Screen Output/Input Text Character Styles

Within this publication, mono-spaced character styles (fonts) are used to indicate computer text
that’s either screen input and output. Mono-spaced fonts, such courier, are used to indicated text
direction. When you type at your keyboard, you are generating computer input. Occasionally you
will see the math operator “greater-than” and “less-than” symbols used to indicate the start and
finish of variable output. When reading text generated by the computer, you are reading it as
computer generated output. In addition to direction, characters are italicized (e.g. italics) to indicate
information specific to your system or site.
Example: Fixed This paragraph’s font represents computer generated screen “fixed” output.
Output Its output is fixed from the sense that it does not vary from application
to application. It is the most commonly used style used to indicate
filenames, paths and text that do not change from system to system. The
character style used is a fixed width such as courier.
Example: This paragraph’s font represents computer screen output that is
Variable Output “variable”. It is used to represent output that varies from application
to application or system to system. Variable output is sometimes found
placed between greater-than and less-than operators for clarification. For
example: <variable_ouput> or <3.45.120.3>. In both cases, the < and >
operators are not part of the actual input.
Example: Fixed This paragraph’s font represents fixed input. It is computer input that
Input is typed-in via the keyboard. Typed input that does not vary from
application to application or system to system. Fixed text the user is
required to supply as input. For example: cd /usr/3p
Example: This paragraph’s font represents computer input that can vary from
Variable Input application to application or system to system. With variable text, the
user is required to supply system dependent input or information. Variable
input sometimes is placed between greater-than and less-than operators.
For example: <variable_input>. In these cases, the (<>) operators would
be dropped prior to input. For example: ypcat hosts | grep <3.45.120.3>
would be typed into the computer as:
ypcat hosts | grep 3.45.120.3
without the greater-than and less-than operators.
Buttons, Switches and Keyboard Inputs (Hard & Soft Keys)

Different character styles are used to indicate actions requiring the reader to press either a hard or
soft button, switch or key. Physical hardware, such as buttons and switches, are called hard keys
because they are hard wired or mechanical in nature. A keyboard or on/off switch would be a hard
key. Software or computer generated buttons are called soft keys because they are software
generated. Software driven menu buttons are an example of such keys. Soft and hard keys are
represented differently in this publication.
Example: Hard A power switch ON/OFF or a keyboard key like ENTER is indicated by applying a character style
Keys that uses both over and under-lined bold text that is bold. This is a hard key.
Example: Soft Whereas the computer MENU button that you would click with your mouse or touch with your hand
Keys uses over and under-lined regular text. This is a soft key.
Page 18
Table of contents
Chapter 1 Safety / Before You Begin ............................................................ 25
Section 1.1 Energy sources........................................................................... 25
Section 1.2 Lock Out/Tag Out (LOTO) procedure for electrical power...... 26
1.2.1 Preparing for LOTO...................................................................................................... 26
1.2.2 Performing LOTO......................................................................................................... 28
1.2.3 Returning system to service......................................................................................... 31
Section 1.3 Electrostatic discharge (ESD) ................................................... 32
1.3.1 Important ESD considerations when working on a mobile system .............................. 32
1.3.2 Generating static .......................................................................................................... 32
1.3.3 Personal grounding methods and equipment .............................................................. 33
1.3.4 Grounding the work area.............................................................................................. 33
1.3.5 Recommended materials and equipment .................................................................... 34
Chapter 2 Planned Maintenance.................................................................... 35

Section 2.1 Before you begin ........................................................................ 35
Section 2.2 Planned maintenance schedule ................................................ 35
Section 2.3 Planned maintenance procedures ............................................ 35
2.3.1 Before you begin - safety precautions.......................................................................... 35
2.3.2 Tools required .............................................................................................................. 36
2.3.3 Consumables ............................................................................................................... 36
2.3.4 PM Procedures ............................................................................................................ 36
2.3.5 PM Procedure Details .................................................................................................. 44
Chapter 3 System data and software ............................................................ 49

Section 3.1 Backing up system data ............................................................ 49
3.1.1 What is included in a system backup? ......................................................................... 49
3.1.2 Performing a system backup........................................................................................ 49
Section 3.2 Performing Load From Cold (LFC)............................................ 50
3.2.1 Loading or upgrading system software ........................................................................ 50
Section 3.3 Performing a FW Load From Cold (LFC) .................................. 53
Section 3.4 Restoring generator firmware only ........................................... 53
Section 3.5 Detector firmware download ..................................................... 54
Section 3.6 FCC Configuration...................................................................... 54
3.6.1 UNINSTALL WIRELESS SUIF CONFIGURATION SOFTWARE DISK....................... 54
3.6.2 INSTALL WIRELESS SUIF CONFIGURATION SOFTWARE DISK............................ 55
Section 3.7 Restoring system data ............................................................... 55
3.7.1 Before you begin .......................................................................................................... 55
3.7.2 Restoring system data ................................................................................................. 56
Page 19
Chapter 4 Configuration.................................................................................. 57
Section 4.1 When should I configure the system? ...................................... 57
Section 4.2 Using the System Configuration Tool (SUIF) ........................... 58
4.2.1 Site configuration ......................................................................................................... 58
4.2.2 Networking configuration ............................................................................................. 59
4.2.3 General configuration .................................................................................................. 60
4.2.4 Hardware configuration................................................................................................ 61
4.2.5 Generator configuration ............................................................................................... 61
4.2.6 Wireless configuration ................................................................................................. 61
4.2.7 Options configuration................................................................................................... 64
4.2.8 InSite configuration ...................................................................................................... 65
4.2.9 PNF configuration ........................................................................................................ 65
4.2.10 Time Server configuration.......................................................................................... 67
4.2.11 Secure Login configuration ........................................................................................ 67
Section 4.3 Changing Auto Protocol Assist settings .................................. 68
Section 4.4 DICOM connectivity configuration ............................................ 68
4.4.1 Network host configuration .......................................................................................... 68
4.4.2 Printer configuration..................................................................................................... 71
Section 4.5 Image management..................................................................... 73
Section 4.6 Image processing........................................................................ 73
4.6.1 Enabling EMI reduction................................................................................................ 73
Section 4.7 Loading demo images ................................................................ 74
4.7.1 Loading images from CD ............................................................................................. 74
Section 4.8 Installing the Operator Manual .................................................. 74
Section 4.9 Login and user management ..................................................... 75
Section 4.10 Installing hardware options ....................................................... 75
4.10.1 Installing the barcode reader ..................................................................................... 75
4.10.2 Configuring the barcode reader ................................................................................. 79
4.10.3 Installing the Dose Area Product (DAP) meter .......................................................... 81
4.10.4 Installing the tablet holder assembly.......................................................................... 86
4.10.5 Installing the wireless exposure Handswitch ............................................................. 90
Section 4.11 Importing custom IP looks from Definium AMX 700................ 91
Section 4.12 Enabling Advanced Service mode ............................................ 92
Section 4.13 IP Address Change Procedure .................................................. 93
4.13.1 Snapshot Tool Configuration ..................................................................................... 94
Section 4.14 .................................................................................................... 102
4.14.1 Required conditions ................................................................................................. 102
4.14.2 Procedure ................................................................................................................ 103
Chapter 5 Calibration .................................................................................... 111

Section 5.1 Preparing for calibrations ........................................................ 111
5.1.1 Saving changes ......................................................................................................... 111
Page 20
Section 5.2 Touchscreen calibration .......................................................... 111

5.2.1 Calibrating the touchscreen ....................................................................................... 111
Section 5.3 Generator calibration ............................................................... 112
5.3.1 Setting filament drive level ......................................................................................... 112
5.3.2 Viewing and resetting tube and generator usage data............................................... 112
Section 5.4 Detector calibration .................................................................. 113
5.4.1 Executing bad pixel and gain calibrations .................................................................. 113
Section 5.5 Image quality calibration ......................................................... 115
5.5.1 Calibrating the printer................................................................................................. 115
Section 5.6 Hardware calibration ................................................................ 116
5.6.1 Drive handle calibration.............................................................................................. 116
5.6.2 Touch screen calibration ............................................................................................ 116
5.6.3 DAP calibration .......................................................................................................... 116
Section 5.7 PACS image tests ..................................................................... 118
5.7.1 Comparing PACS test images ................................................................................... 119
5.7.2 Determining PACS burn/no-burn configuration.......................................................... 119
5.7.3 Optional PACS tests .................................................................................................. 122
5.7.4 PACS image comparison results ............................................................................... 125
Chapter 6 Mechanical adjustment procedures .......................................... 127

Section 6.1 Column related assemblies ..................................................... 127
6.1.1 Column balance procedure ........................................................................................ 127
6.1.2 Tube latch to arm pin adjustment procedure.............................................................. 130
6.1.3 Column rotational detent procedure........................................................................... 133
Chapter 7 Regulatory testing....................................................................... 137

Section 7.1 U.S. federally required tests .................................................... 137
7.1.1 Required test ............................................................................................ equipment 137
7.1.2 Preparing for testing................................................................................................... 137
7.1.3 Collimator testing ....................................................................................................... 138
7.1.4 Generator tests .......................................................................................................... 144
7.1.5 Beam Quality Test...................................................................................................... 151
7.1.6 Testing generator operator indicators ........................................................................ 152
Section 7.2 Testing electrical safety ........................................................... 152
7.2.1 Perform Ground Resistance Testing.......................................................................... 153
7.2.2 Performing Leakage Current Testing ......................................................................... 164
7.2.3 Test Point Locations for XR200/XR220 ..................................................................... 172
7.2.4 Test Equipment .......................................................................................................... 174
7.2.5 AC Power plug troubleshooting.................................................................................. 175
Section 7.3 Tube Radiation Leakage Test - Optional ................................ 175
7.3.1 Personnel Requirements............................................................................................ 175
7.3.2 Preliminary requirements ........................................................................................... 175
7.3.3 Purpose...................................................................................................................... 176
7.3.4 Common Errors:......................................................................................................... 176
7.3.5 X-Ray Tube Leakage Radiation Requirement: .......................................................... 176
Page 21
Section 7.4 Medical Device List ................................................................... 179
Chapter 8 Troubleshooting........................................................................... 181

Section 8.1 Performing diagnostics ............................................................ 181
8.1.1 Running diagnostics on the system ........................................................................... 181
8.1.2 Tips and Tricks Tips................................................................................................... 187
Section 8.2 Djinn Generator Troubleshooting Guide ................................ 188
8.2.1 Introduction ................................................................................................................ 188
8.2.2 Description of Djinn Beetle Errors.............................................................................. 189
8.2.3 In-Depth Djinn Beetle generator description.............................................................. 199
8.2.4 Specific Error Code Handling and Actions................................................................. 204
Section 8.3 FlashPad Detector Troubleshooting ....................................... 209
8.3.1 Detector Overview ..................................................................................................... 211
8.3.2 Failure Modes ............................................................................................................ 228
Section 8.4 Wireless Connectivity Troubleshooting ................................. 232
8.4.1 Band Selection........................................................................................................... 232
8.4.2 Roaming .................................................................................................................... 234
8.4.3 Advanced................................................................................................................... 236
Chapter 9 Replacement procedures ............................................................ 237

Section 9.1 Cover management................................................................... 237
9.1.1 Personnel requirements............................................................................................. 237
9.1.2 Preliminary requirements........................................................................................... 237
9.1.3 Side cover removal .................................................................................................... 238
9.1.4 Top cover removal ..................................................................................................... 238
9.1.5 Front cover removal................................................................................................... 240
9.1.6 Column skirt cover removal ....................................................................................... 244
9.1.7 Tube head cover removal .......................................................................................... 245
9.1.8 Top cover or display & inverter collector.................................................................... 246
9.1.9 Power switch assembly ............................................................................................. 251
Section 9.2 Cable replacement .................................................................... 254
9.2.1 General cable replacement........................................................................................ 254
9.2.2 High voltage cable replacement ................................................................................ 259
9.2.3 “Super cable” 5557068 cable replacement................................................................ 268
Section 9.3 Cable cover installation............................................................ 271
Section 9.4 Software Load From Cold ........................................................ 272
Section 9.5 Base assembly .......................................................................... 273
9.5.1 Drive wheel ................................................................................................................ 273
9.5.2 Battery packs ............................................................................................................. 277
9.5.3 Front bumper assembly or bumper switch................................................................. 282
9.5.4 Front caster................................................................................................................ 285
9.5.5 Spring applied brake (column rotational brake) ......................................................... 290
9.5.6 Column support assembly ......................................................................................... 293
9.5.7 Motor brake and motor reducer assembly ................................................................. 304
9.5.8 Caterpillar base transition board................................................................................ 308
Page 22
Section 9.6 Bins and Drive Handle ............................................................ 310

9.6.1 Front bin removal ....................................................................................................... 310
9.6.2 Rear bin removal........................................................................................................ 311
9.6.3 Front bin and Inner front bin....................................................................................... 314
9.6.4 Detector Bin Side Rails FRU Replacement................................................................ 316
9.6.5 Detector bin park switch............................................................................................. 328
9.6.6 Detector charge cable assembly................................................................................ 330
9.6.7 Detector bin shock absorber ...................................................................................... 332
9.6.8 Rear bin kickplate....................................................................................................... 334
9.6.9 Rear bin mounting bracket - Optima XR200amx only................................................ 336
9.6.10 Drive handle assembly............................................................................................. 338
9.6.11 Flexible hand switch holder replacement ................................................................. 341
Section 9.7 Thorax assembly ...................................................................... 343
9.7.1 Spyder system controller............................................................................................ 343
9.7.2 Locust drive board...................................................................................................... 345
9.7.3 Locust drive board fuses ............................................................................................ 346
9.7.4 Firefly charger board .................................................................................................. 349
9.7.5 Firefly board fuses...................................................................................................... 351
9.7.6 Cricket battery board.................................................................................................. 353
9.7.7 Cricket board fuses .................................................................................................... 355
9.7.8 Hornet UIF board ....................................................................................................... 357
9.7.9 Drive login active board collector ............................................................................... 359
9.7.10 Overlay board assembly .......................................................................................... 362
9.7.11 System PC (5331287) Replacement Procedure ..................................................... 364
9.7.12 Hard drive removal procedure.................................................................................. 366
9.7.13 Wireless USB host radio board ................................................................................ 369
9.7.14 Whip antenna ........................................................................................................... 370
9.7.15 Beetle Djinn set of cables......................................................................................... 372
9.7.16 Djinn 15kW Auxiliary module ................................................................................... 374
9.7.17 Djinn power module ................................................................................................. 377
9.7.18 Djinn HV tank ........................................................................................................... 379
9.7.19 Djinn 30kW auxiliary module.................................................................................... 382
9.7.20 Mantis power supply ................................................................................................ 384
9.7.21 EMI filter ................................................................................................................... 390
9.7.22 LVLE2 ...................................................................................................................... 393
9.7.23 Power cord reel ........................................................................................................ 396
9.7.24 AC power plug.......................................................................................................... 398
9.7.25 AC fuse holder ......................................................................................................... 401
9.7.26 AC fuses................................................................................................................... 403
9.7.27 Tube park latch assembly, switch or solenoid.......................................................... 406
9.7.28 Detector power supply assembly ............................................................................. 412
9.7.29 Collimator lamp power supply .................................................................................. 414
9.7.30 Main circuit breaker and cable assembly ................................................................. 415
Section 9.8 Column, horizontal arm, X-ray tube, collimator..................... 420
9.8.1 Engaging vertical lock ................................................................................................ 420
9.8.2 Column....................................................................................................................... 423
9.8.3 Horizontal arm assembly............................................................................................ 432
9.8.4 Horizontal arm brake cable assembly with track........................................................ 436
9.8.5 Tube mount - detent side (cathode side) ................................................................... 443
9.8.6 Tube mount - friction side (anode side)...................................................................... 447
Page 23
9.8.7 Tube yoke assembly.................................................................................................. 452

9.8.8 Canon X-ray tube....................................................................................................... 457
9.8.9 Collimator................................................................................................................... 461
9.8.10 Dose Area Product (DAP) meter ............................................................................. 469
9.8.11 DAP meters side rail bracket replacement .............................................................. 471
9.8.12 SID tape measure.................................................................................................... 473
9.8.13 Collimator adjustment knob ..................................................................................... 475
9.8.14 Collimator pointer..................................................................................................... 476
9.8.15 Collimator lamp........................................................................................................ 479
9.8.16 Collimator rotation lock finger .................................................................................. 483
9.8.17 Collimator handle switch.......................................................................................... 485
9.8.18 Collimator front cover replacement.......................................................................... 489
9.8.19 Tablet holder assembly............................................................................................ 495
9.8.20 Flashpad Detector – Power Button Replacement.................................................... 496
9.8.21 UWB Channel Change Procedure........................................................................... 500
Section 9.9 Disk Management Tool ............................................................. 505
9.9.1 Preliminary requirements........................................................................................... 506
9.9.2 Procedure .................................................................................................................. 507
Appendix A Printer Configuration Information .............................................. 509

Agfa Drystar 3000 printer parameters ..........................................................509
Agfa Drystar 5500 printer parameters ..........................................................512
Codonics Horizon printer parameters ..........................................................514
Fuji FM DPL printer parameters ....................................................................516
Fuji DryPix 1000 printer parameters .............................................................517
Kodak 8200 printer parameters .....................................................................522
Konica Dry Pro 793 printer parameters ........................................................527
Glossary ................................................................................................................ 529
Page 24
Chapter 1 Safety / Before You Begin
Section 1.1 Energy sources
Table 1-1
Energy source Yes/No Location of energy Magnitude of energy

isolating means
Electrical Yes AC power plug 120 VAC/60Hz
220 VAC/50Hz
Electrical Yes Circuit breaker 156VDC
Electrical (batteries) Yes Battery board 156VDC
connector J1
Pneumatic No n/a n/a
Hydraulic No n/a n/a
Gas/water/steam No n/a n/a
Chemical No n/a n/a
Mechanical motion No n/a n/a
Gravity No n/a n/a
Rear suspension spring No n/a n/a
Column spring Yes Scroll lock at 610 N-m (5400 in-lbs)
top of column
Thermal No n/a n/a
Stored energy (generator Yes Time discharge and 15kW generator: 2200J
capacitors) DVM verification 30kW generator: 8800J
Air under pressure No n/a n/a
Oil under pressure No n/a n/a
Water under pressure No n/a n/a
Gas under pressure No n/a n/a
Steam No n/a n/a
Other No n/a n/a
Type of equipment and/or method selected to dissipate or isolate stored energy:

- Allow three minutes for stored energy to dissipate. Stored energy is indicated by safety
lamps on the generator Aux boxes.
- After waiting period, verify dissipation with volt meter.
Type of equipment and/or method used to ensure disconnections:

- One lock and tag for each electrical power source
- Multiple locking device
Chapter 1 Safety / Before You Begin Page 25

Section 1.2 Lock Out/Tag Out (LOTO) procedure for electrical

power
Name of equipment: Optima XR200amx/Optima XR220amx
Number of locks: 3
Title of employees authorized to perform LOTO: Those trained in LOTO
Title of affected employees and how to notify: Hospital personnel, notified by verbal communication
1.2.1 Preparing for LOTO

1. Have this equipment on hand:
- Safety glasses
- Voltage meter
- LOTO kit 5421892, contains (see Figure 1-1):
* 3 brass padlocks and identification labels
* 3 LOTO tag packages (25 tags per package)
* 1 electrical plug lockout device 110V - for AC power plug
* 2 electrical plug lockout devices 160VDC - for battery connectors
* 1 nylon carry bag
Figure 1-1 LOTO kit contents
Page 26 Section 1.2 Lock Out/Tag Out (LOTO) procedure for electrical power
2. Locate the AC power plug (E1), system circuit breaker (E2), and battery connectors (E3). See
Figure 1-2.
E2
E1
E3
Figure 1-2 Electrical energy lockout locations

1.2.2 Performing LOTO

1. Notify all affected personnel working in the area that LOTO is being performed.
2. Exit all system software.
3. Turn off the Optima XR200amx/Optima XR220amx system by pressing the power button and
holding it for several seconds until the power button light ring turns blue, indicating that the
system is shutting down.
4. When the power light ring begins to blink blue, indicating that the system is in standby, switch
the circuit breaker (E2) to the OFF position. See Figure 1-3.
Figure 1-3 Circuit breaker (E2) in OFF position
5. Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet.

6. Apply an approved AC power plug locking device to the AC power plug (E1), then apply your
personal red lock and tag. See Figure 1-4.
Figure 1-4 AC power plug with locking device applied
7. Wait three minutes for discharge of stored energy.
8. Disconnect the two green battery power connectors J3 and J4 and the two sense connectors
J13 and J14 from the Cricket board. Apply a locking device, then apply your personal red lock
and tag. See Figure 1-5.
1
2
Item Description
1 Battery power connectors (J3, J4)
2 Battery sense connectors (J13, J14)
Figure 1-5 Battery connectors J3/J4/J13/J14 and locking device

9. Disconnect the two green battery power connectors J1 and J2 and the two sense connectors
J11 and J12 from the Cricket board. Apply a locking device, then apply your personal red lock
and tag. See Figure 1-6.
Item Description
2 Battery sense connectors (J11, J12)
Figure 1-6 Battery connectors J1/J2/J11/J12 and locking device
10. Press the power button and verify that the system does not turn on.
11. Verify that the voltage meter is working properly by testing it on a known live voltage source
(such as a wall outlet).
12. See Figure 1-7. Verify that electrical power has been removed from the system by applying
the DC voltmeter (+) lead to connector J5 pin 1 (Item 1, left-side screw terminal) on the Cricket
board and the meter (-) lead to chassis ground (Item 2).
Item Description
1 Connect DC voltmeter (+) to J5 pin 1 (left-side screw terminal)
2 Connect DC voltmeter (-) to chassis ground
Figure 1-7 Cricket board test points
ELECTRICAL SHOCK HAZARD

IF THE SYSTEM CANNOT BE LOCKED OUT, OR IF THE SYSTEM FAILS
VERIFICATION, CONTACT YOUR SUPERVISOR.
13. Perform the necessary service or repair.
1.2.3 Returning system to service

1. Notify affected personnel that LOTO devices are being removed and equipment is being re-
energized.
2. Verify that the area is safe to re-energize the equipment.
3. Verify that any safety guards or devices have been reinstalled, and replace all guards and
covers as necessary.
4. Remove tools and all non-essential equipment.
5. Verify that all personnel are clear and in a safe position.
6. Verify that all controls and switches are in the off or neutral position.

7. Remove locks and tags as appropriate.

8. Re-energize equipment and follow safe startup procedures.
9. Notify affected persons that energy has been restored.
Section 1.3 Electrostatic discharge (ESD)

A sudden discharge of static electricity from your finger or other conductor can destroy static
sensitive devices or microcircuitry. Often the spark is neither felt nor heard, but damage occurs. An
electronic device exposed to electrostatic discharge (ESD) might not appear to be affected at all
and can work perfectly throughout a normal cycle. The device can function normally for a while, but
it has been degraded in the internal layers, reducing its life expectancy.
Networks built into many integrated circuits provide some protection, but in many cases, the
discharge contains enough power to alter device parameters or melt silicon junctions.
1.3.1 Important ESD considerations when working on a mobile system
Static Discharge Risk to Components

If you are using a static mat or wrist strap, be sure to connect the mat and strap to machine ground,
not earth ground. This is necessary to isolate yourself from earth ground and equalize your potential
with the machine.
ESD damage prevention includes these steps:

1. Perform LOTO.
2. Verify that the AC plug is not connected to an energy source/outlet.
3. Connect ground mat and wrist strap assembly to frame connection point of the mobile unit.
1.3.2 Generating static

The following table shows that different activities generate different amounts of static electricity, and
that static electricity increases as humidity decreases.
Table 1-2
Relative humidity
Event
55% 40% 10%
Walking across carpet 7,500 V 15,000 V 35,000 V
Walking across vinyl floor 3,000 V 5,000 V 12,000 V
Motions of bench worker 400 V 800 V 6,000 V
Removing bubble pack from PCB 7,000 V 20,000 V 26,500 V
Packing PCBs in foam-lined box 5,000 V 11,000 V 21,000 V
Many electronic components are sensitive to ESD. Circuitry design and structure determine the
degree of sensitivity. The following packaging and grounding precautions are necessary to prevent
damage to electric components and accessories.
• Transport products in static-safe containers to avoid hand contact.
Page 32 Section 1.3 Electrostatic discharge (ESD)

• Protect all electrostatic parts and assemblies with conductive or approved containers or
packaging.
• Keep electrostatic sensitive parts in their containers until they arrive at static-free stations.
• Place items on a grounded surface before removing them from their container.
• When handling or touching a sensitive component or assembly, ground yourself by touching
the chassis.
• Avoid contact with pins, leads, or circuitry.
• Place reusable electrostatic-sensitive parts from assemblies in protective packaging or
conductive foam.
1.3.3 Personal grounding methods and equipment

This section defines a workzone that is not connected to the system under service. The mobile
system is a battery powered unit that can deliver lethal current. Ensure you are not providing an
earth ground path when practicing ESD procedures.
Use the following equipment to prevent static electricity damage to equipment:

• Wrist straps are flexible straps with a maximum of one-megohm +/- 10% resistance in the
ground cords. To provide a proper ground, wear the strap against bare skin. The ground cord
must connect snugly into the banana plug connector on the grounding mat or workstation.
• Heel, toe, and boot straps can be used at standing workstations and are compatible with most
types of shoes or boots. On conductive floors or dissipative floor mats, use them on both feet
with a maximum of one-megohm +/- 10% resistance between the operator and ground.
1.3.3.1 Static shielding protection levels
Table 1-3
Method Voltage
Antistatic plastic 1,500
Carbon-loaded plastic 7,500
Metalized laminate 15,000
1.3.4 Grounding the work area

To prevent static damage of components and parts in the work area:

• Cover the work surface with approved static-dissipative material. Provide a wrist strap
connected to the work surface and properly grounded tools and equipment.
• Use static-dissipative mats, foot straps, or air ionizers to give added protection.
• Handle electrostatic sensitive components, parts, and assemblies by case or PCB laminate.
• Handle components only at static-free work areas.
• Turn off power and input signals before inserting and removing connectors or test equipment.
• Use static-safe fixtures when fixtures must directly contact dissipative surfaces.
• Keep work area free of non-conductive materials, like plastic assembly aids and Styrofoam.
1.3.5 Recommended materials and equipment

Materials and equipment that are recommended for use in preventing static electricity include:
• Anti-static tape, smocks, aprons, or sleeve protectors
• Conductive bins, foam, tabletop workstations with ground cord of one-megohm +/-10%
resistance, and other assembly or soldering aids
• Static-dissipative table or floor mats with hard tie to ground
• ESD field service kits
• Static awareness labels
• Wrist straps and footwear straps providing one-megohm +/-10% resistance
• Material handling packages:
- Conductive plastic bags, plastic tubes and tote boxes
- Opaque shielding bags
- Transparent metalized shielding bags and shielding tubes
Page 34 Section 1.3 Electrostatic discharge (ESD)

Chapter 2 Planned Maintenance
Section 2.1 Before you begin

Your GE Healthcare equipment is designed and manufactured to be of the highest quality. Likewise,
the maintenance requirements in this Customer Operations Manual/User Guide are designed to
help you maintain safe, high quality performance of your equipment for its expected life.
GE Healthcare Customer Operations Manual/User Guides are designed with the intent that
customers or service providers can utilize them to perform standard maintenance on the equipment
(such as planned maintenance, which is typically time-based) without proprietary service tools or
methods. Please note, alternative original equipment manufacturer planned maintenance
schedules may be utilized, and other routine maintenance efficiencies may be attained, based on
GE Healthcare’s (or its approved partners’) use of proprietary service tools and methods, including
data analytics and back office capacity. These GE Healthcare proprietary service tools and
methods accomplish the prescribed and necessary routine maintenance activities identified in the
Customer Operations Manual/User Guides.
Safe equipment performance and operation requires that personnel servicing the equipment be
fully trained on servicing medical X-ray apparatus. General Electric Company, GE Healthcare, and
its associates, maintain a world-wide organization that provides skilled X-ray service. If desired,
arrangements can usually be made to furnish periodic and/or emergency service on a contract
basis. A General Electric representative will be glad to discuss this plan.
Section 2.2 Planned maintenance schedule

The system does not require any planned maintenance (PM) to be performed for a 13 month period
following installation. PM schedules should begin in the 13th month that follows the system’s
installation anniversary date.
Following the 13th month, PM should be performed every 12 months.
Section 2.3 Planned maintenance procedures

2.3.1 Before you begin - safety precautions
• Never use solvents or flammable solutions to clean components.
• Never immerse any parts in water or cleaning solutions; apply any liquids to a clean cloth and
then use the cloth on the component.
• Always unplug the computer when cleaning with liquids or damp cloths.
• Always unplug the computer before cleaning the air vents.
Chapter 2 Planned Maintenance Page 35

2.3.2 Tools required

• Standard tool kit
• Torque Wrench
• Low Profile Hex Sockets
• Dose meter
• kVp meter
• Fluke ESA612 (or equivalent) for Electrical Safety Testing
2.3.3 Consumables
• Loctite 242 (GE part# 46-170686P2)
• Loctite 271 (GE part# 46-170684P1)
2.3.4 PM Procedures
Preventative Maintenance tasks are to be performed every 12 months, beginning on the 13th month
after install.
1. Wear Parts: The hand switch must be replaced at least once every 3 years.
2. System Performance: Review the system log files and discuss the system performance with
the customer to determine if there are any existing issues. Based on customer feedback,
address issues and concerns brought up and include in notes for closure of PM. Perform
calibrations and cleaning when determined as necessary.
PM procedures are divided into the following groups:
1. Visual Inspection and Cleaning - See Table 2-1 Visual Inspection and Cleaning on page 36.
2. Suspended Mass - See Table 2-2 Suspended Mass on page 38.
3. Functional Checks - See Table 2-3 Functional Checks on page 41.
4. Electrical Safety Testing - See Table 2-4 Electrical Safety Testing on page 43.
5. Calibration - See Table 2-5 Calibration on page 44.
6. Radiation Tests - See Table 2-6 Radiation Tests on page 44.
Table 2-1 Visual Inspection and Cleaning
Component Procedure Time Est.

Top Cover and • Switch and display markings are clearly legible. < 1 min.
Touch Screen • Inspect covers for wear and damage; ensure covers are
properly secured.
• Inspect touch screen and top cover surface for wear or
damage. Replace as necessary.
Collimator • Field light switch and field size knobs are not loose or 2 min.
damaged.
• Guard arms are perpendicular to collimator bottom.
• SID indicating tape is attached to left side of collimator.
• Rotation Lock is secure and undamaged.
• Must be no movement between collimator and tube unit.
• Inspect collimator rail stop and plate spring release hardware.
Page 36 Section 2.3 Planned maintenance procedures

Table 2-1 Visual Inspection and Cleaning

Body • Drive handle is free from sharp edges. 5 min.
• Tube support column is tight and solid in its mounting.
• Inspect wheels for damage.
• Verify external covers are properly secured.
• Inspect and tighten any loose fasteners.
External • Inspect cables for damage.
Cables • Ensure the DAP cable is properly secured so that it does not
obstruct the Tube Lock mechanism.
System Rating • Verify all rating plates are present and legible. 5 min.
Plates - X-ray control, Generator, X-ray tube (on the outside of
the unit, next to the main breaker switch).
- Beam limiting device (on the side of the collimator).
- Tube Focal Spot label is present (remove top Tube
cover)
Power Cord • Verify good condition of power cord reel, cord, and plug. 15 min.
Hand Switch • Inspect the cord for nicks, cuts or severe pinching of the cord 2 min.
sheath and exposed wires at the RJ 11 connector (for original
style hand switch with separate cord) due to sheath damage.
If any of these conditions are observed, replace with newer
style hand switch with attached cord.
• Inspect the hand switch for accumulation of dirt, contrast
material, damage to the plastic housing or loosening in the
plastic housing.
• Inspect the hand switch holder for wear or damage.
Note: The hand switch is on a mandatory replacement
interval of once every 3 years.
Detector and • Visually inspect tether and grid for damage, wear, labeling, 10 min.
Detector etc.
Charging Bin • Remove debris from Detector bin.
• Inspect detector charging connector for damage or
misalignment.
• Inspect detector docking switch for damage or mis-alignment.
• Inspect bin shock absorbers for proper operation and
adjustment.
PC • Power off the system. 20 min.
• Remove the top cover. See the System manual for
Replacement Procedures and Top Cover removal.
• Clean the cooling vents of the PC assembly.

Table 2-2 Suspended Mass
Component Procedure Expected Action Time

Outcome Est.
Suspended Mass (Essential to Safety)
Attention: The fasteners specified below are safety items. Ensure that the correct fastener
characteristics, part number and specified torque are used.
Safety Latch Visually inspect 2 x 1000- Inspect for missing bolt. If 30 min.
Activation Plate the bolt head for M4C008-07 missing, attempt to locate and
Hardware the torque bolts in the remove as to not interfere with
(Bolt 1000- stripe. Assess Safety Latch any mechanical motion. If
M4C008-07 whether or not Activation Plate replacing with a new bolt, verify
Hexagon the torque are torqued to that it is 1000-M4C008-07
Socket Head stripe on the 2.2 N-m (19.5 lb- Hexagon Socket Head Cap
Cap Screw, M4- body and the in) Screw, M4-0.7, X8mm Long,
0.7, X8mm bolt has moved. Grade 12.9 Steel, Black Oxide,
Long, Grade Manually RoHS Fastener. Apply Loctite
12.9 Steel, inspect the bolt/ 242 over the bolt threads and
Black Oxide, nut for torque the bolt to the specified
RoHS looseness (by torque. Apply a new torque stripe
Fastener.) hand or torque with a different color than the
wrench). previous and note the difference.
(Assembly
Torque the bolt If reusing the same bolt, verify
5505000)
to 2.2 N-m (19.5 that it is 1000-M4C008-07
lb-in). Hexagon Socket Head Cap
See Figure 2-1 Screw, M4-0.7, X8mm Long,
on page 45. Grade 12.9 Steel, Black Oxide,
RoHS Fastener. Clean the
existing Loctite from the bolt
threads. Reapply Loctite 242 over
the bolt threads and torque the
bolt to the specified torque. Apply
a new torque stripe with a
different color than the previous
and note the difference.


Outcome Est.
Spring Visually inspect 2 x 1000- Inspect for missing bolt. If 30 min.
Mounting Bolt the bolt head for M4C016-07 missing, attempt to locate and
Hardware the torque bolts in the remove as to not interfere with
(1000-M4C016- stripe. Assess Spring Mounting any mechanical motion. If
07 - Hexagon whether or not are torqued to replacing with a new bolt, verify
Socket Head the torque 2.3 N-m (20.4 lb- that it is 1000-M4C016-07 -
Cap Screw, M4- stripe on the in). Hexagon Socket Head Cap
07, X16mm body and the Screw, M4-07, X16mm Long,
Long, Grade bolt has moved. Grade 12.9 Steel, Black Oxide,
12.9 Steel, Manually RoHS Fastener. Apply Loctite
Black Oxide, inspect the bolt 242 over the bolt threads and
RoHS for looseness torque the bolt to the specified
Fastener) (by hand or torque. Apply a new torque stripe
torque wrench). with a different color than the
(Assembly
Torque the bolt previous and note the difference.
5555001)
to 2.3 N-m (20.4 If reusing the same bolt, verify
lb-in). See that the bolt is 1000-M4C016-07 -
Figure 2-2 on Hexagon Socket Head Cap
page 46. Screw, M4-07, X16mm Long,
Grade 12.9 Steel, Black Oxide,
bolt/nut to the specified torque.
Apply a new torque stripe with a


Outcome Est.
Tube Arm to Visually inspect 8 x 1000- Inspect for missing bolt. If 30 min.
Tube Yolk the bolt head for M6C020-07 missing, attempt to locate and
Mount the torque bolts in the Tube remove as to not interfere with
Assembly stripe. Assess Arm to Tube any mechanical motion. If
Hardware whether or not Yolk Mount replacing with a new bolt, verify
(1000-M6C020- the torque Assembly are that it is 1000-M6C020-07 -
07 - Hexagon stripe on the torqued to 13.2 Hexagon Socket Head Cap
Socket Head body and the N-m (116.8 lb- Screw, M6-1, X20mm Long,
Cap Screw, M6- bolt has moved. in). Grade 12.9 Steel, Black Oxide,
1, X20mm Manually RoHS Fastener. Apply Loctite
Long, Grade inspect the bolt 242 over the bolt threads and
12.9 Steel, for looseness torque the bolt/nut to the
Black Oxide, (by hand or specified torque. Apply a new
RoHS torque wrench). torque stripe with a different
Fastener) Torque the bolt color than the previous and note
to 13.2 N-m the difference.
(Assembly
(116.8 lb-in). If reusing the same bolt, verify
5507700)
See Figure 2-3 that it is 1000-M6C020-07 -
on page 47. Hexagon Socket Head Cap
Screw, M6-1, X20mm Long,
Grade 12.9 Steel, Black Oxide,
bolt/nut to the specified torque.
Apply a new torque stripe with a


Outcome Est.
X-ray Tube to Remove 4 x M6 JIS Inspect for missing bolt/nut. If 30 min.
Collimator collimator (see B0205 bolts in missing, attempt to locate and
Mating Flange 9.8.9 Collimator the X-ray Tube remove as to not interfere with
(Bolt M6 X 20, on page 461). to Collimator any mechanical motion.
Black Oxide M6 Visually inspect Mating Flange Reinstall collimator.
JIS B0205) the bolt head for are torqued to 8
the torque N-m (70.8 lb-in).
(Assembly
stripe. Assess
5508800-2)
whether or not
the torque
stripe on the
body and the
bolt has moved.
Manually
inspect the bolt
for looseness
(by hand or
torque wrench).
Torque the bolt
to 8 N-m
(70.8 lb-in). See
Figure 2-4 on
page 47.
Table 2-3 Functional Checks

Hand Switch • Repeatedly press the hand switch buttons (exposure/prepare 2 min
button and collimator button) to check that the switch moves
smoothly from inactive to active positions.
• Replace the hand switch if the buttons motion is not smooth or
if buttons are sticking.
Note: The hand switch MUST be replaced at least once in every
3 years.
Charging • Plug unit into power outlet. 1 min.
• Power Button is undamaged and illuminates correctly.
• Confirm that battery level indicator on top cover is flashing.
• Unplug unit from power outlet.


Top Cover and • Login: Press drive login keys and ensure they illuminate when 5 min.
Touch Screen pressed. Login to drive and ensure the keys are functional.
• User Interface: Turn on the UI/touch screen and ensure it
responds to touch.
• LEDs and Illumination: Reboot the system to inspect the top
cover battery meter LED, power button LED, and screen
illumination.
• Light Sensor: Cover the ambient light sensor (can use finger)
and observe the screen becomes dim. Remove cover and
observe the screen brightens.
Drive • Drives forward, reverse, left, and right. 20 min.
• Drive speed is easily controlled.
• Inspect bumpers, remove any trapped items.
• Drives only in reverse when bumper is pushed in.
• Drive forward is inhibited when bumper is pushed in. Test
bumper activation from four directions: left-front, right-front, left-
side, right-side
• Drive speed reduced when tube arm is removed from latch.
• Drive speed reduced when a tethered detector is not in the bin
and full speed when the detector is parked in the bin.
• Drive brakes release when emergency brake release switch is
depressed.
Tube Column • Horizontal tube arm latch operates smoothly and holds arm 5 min.
and Arm securely.
• Vertical tube column rotates 270° from latch position to latch
position.
• Tube arm moves smoothly from bottom to top of vertical
column.
• Tube arm extends and retracts smoothly.
• Tube unit rotates 90° to horizontal in both directions.
• Tube unit rotates back 10° and forward 110°.
• Latch holds column in drive position.
• Lock prevents vertical travel.
• Lock prevents tube extension.
• Lock prevents column rotation.


Collimator • Collimator interface plate is securely fastened to the X-ray tube. 15 min.
If not, DO NOT USE. Service is required.
• Verify that three brass tabs hold collimator securely to the
collimator interface plate. If not, DO NOT USE. Service is
required.
• SID tape extends to 6 ft (1830 mm).
• SID tape retracts automatically.
• Pressing field light buttons on handswitch or on collimator turns
field light on.
• Rotational detent knob (right side of collimator) must be
unscrewed counter-clockwise to rotate collimator.
• Tightening rotational detent knob clockwise will secure
collimator in any position.
• Collimator rotates 90° from center to either side.
• Rotational detent knob engages at center and at 90° either side
from center. Replace rotational detent knob assembly if
excessive rotational movement is present.
• Moving transverse (lateral) and longitudinal field sizing knobs
moves the respective collimator blades.
X-ray Caution: Radiation Hazard 3 min.
Unit must be in a location where X-rays can be made safely.
• Close collimator blades and move tube arm to its lowest
position.
• Select lowest kVp and mAs settings.
• Pressing the X-ray hand switch button to the first position
causes the tube anode to rotate.
• Pressing the X-ray hand switch button to the second position
makes an exposure. The X-ray tone sounds and X-ray On
indicator lights.
• Dose report: After exposure, observe that the dose is reported
on the technique screen (if DAP is present).
Generator • Test the thermal overload interlock. See 2.3.5 PM Procedure 20 min.
Details on page 44.
Table 2-4 Electrical Safety Testing

Ground • See 7.2.1 Perform Ground Resistance Testing on page 153. 20 min.
Resistance
Leakage Test • See 7.2.2 Performing Leakage Current Testing on 20 min.
page 164.

Table 2-5 Calibration

Touchscreen • See Section 5.2 Touchscreen calibration on page 111. 5 min.
DAP caliberation • See 5.6.3 DAP calibration on page 116. 30 min.
Detector Checks Perform QAP test. See the Optima XR200amx/XR220amx 10 min.
and QAP Installation Manual, Chapter 6 Detector checks and QAP.
System State • Create a new system state backup. See Section 30 min.
Backup 3.1 Backing up system data on page 49.
2.3.4.1 Radiation Tests (US-only or as required by local regulations)

Requirements are pass or fail. Service must be performed if any requirement failed.
Table 2-6 Radiation Tests

Generator operator Check for proper operation of tones and 10 min.
indicators buzzers as required by regulations. See
7.1.6 Testing generator operator indicators
on page 152.7.1.6 Testing generator
operator indicators on page 152.
Technique accuracy kVp See 7.1.4.2 Testing kVp accuracy on 10 min.
page 144.
Technique accuracy mAs See 7.1.4.3 Testing mAs accuracy on 25 min.
page 146.
Linearity See 7.1.4.4 Testing reproducibility and 20 min.
linearity of exposure on page 149.
Reproducibility of See 7.1.4.4 Testing reproducibility and 20 min.
exposures linearity of exposure on page 149.
Collimator alignment See See 7.1.3.2 Testing light field to X-ray 15 min.
field alignment on page 139.
Collimator light field See 7.1.3.1 Testing light intensity on 10 min.
intensity page 138.
Collimator field size See 7.1.3.3 Testing field size indicator 10 min.
indicator accuracy accuracy (Optima XR200amx) on page 142
or 7.1.3.4 Testing field size indicator
accuracy (Optima XR220amx or Optima
XR200amx with digital upgrade) on
page 143.
Beam quality half See 7.1.5.1 Measuring half value layer 15 min.
value layer (HVL) on page 151.
2.3.5 PM Procedure Details

The following contains detailed procedural information for some of the PM Schedule items above.

2.3.5.1 Suspended Mass Checks
Attention: This bolt is a safety bolt. Ensure applied torque is 2.2 N-m (19.5 lb-in). If
replacement is needed, ensure the correct part no.1000-M4C008-07 is used. Verify that it is
a Hexagon Socket Head CAP Screw, M4-07, X8mm Long, Grade 12.9 Steel, Black Oxide,
RoHS Fastener.
Item Description
1 Bolt 1000-M4C008-07, Hexagon Socket Head Cap Screw, M4-
0.7, X8mm Long, Grade 12.9 Steel, Black Oxide, RoHS Fastener.
QTY: 2 Torque 2.2 N-m (19.5 lb-in)
(Assembly 5505000)
Figure 2-1 Safety Latch Activation Plate Hardware
replacement is needed, ensure the correct part no. 1000-M4C016-07 is used. Verify that it is
a Hexagon Socket Head Cap Screw, M4-07, X16mm Long, Grade 12.9 Steel, Black Oxide,
RoHS Fastener.

Item Description
1 Bolt 1000-M4C016-07, Hexagon Socket Head Cap Screw, M4-07,
X16mm Long, Grade 12.9 Steel, Black Oxide, RoHS Fastener.
QTY: 2 Torque 2.3 N-m (20.4 lb-in).
(Assembly 5555001)
Figure 2-2 Spring Mounting Bolt Hardware
replacement is needed, ensure the correct part no. 1000-M6C020-07 is used. Verify that it is
a Hexagon Socket Head Cap Screw, M6-1, X20mm Long, Grade 12.9 Steel, Black Oxide,
RoHS Fastener.

Item Description
1 Bolt 1000-M6C020-07, Hexagon Socket Head Cap Screw, M6-1,
X20mm Long, Grade 12.9 Steel, Black Oxide, RoHS Fastener,
QTY: 8 Torque 13.2 N-m (116.8 lb-in).
(Assembly 5507700)
Note: A low profile hexagon bit will be needed to properly torque these bolts.
Figure 2-3 Tube Arm to Tube Yolk Mount Assembly Hardware
Attention: This bolt is a safety bolt. Ensure applied torque is 8 N-m (70.8 lb-in). Verify that it
is a Bolt M6X20, Black Oxide M6 JIS B0205.
Item Description
1 Bolt M6X20, Black Oxide M6 JIS B0205, QTY: 4
Torque 8 N-m (70.8 lb-in)
(Assembly 5508800-2)
Figure 2-4 X-ray Tube to Collimator Mating Flange

2.3.5.2 Test the thermal overload interlock

1. Power off the system.
2. Remove the left side cover and let front cover. See the System manual, Replacement
Procedures, Front cover removal.
3. At the front of the unit, to the left of the main circuit breaker, locate the thermal overload cable
connector. The thermal overload cable is connected to a short pigtail cable that is plugged into
the generator 15 kW auxiliary module. See Figure 2-5.
4. Disconnect the thermal overload cable from the 15 kW auxiliary module.
Item Description
1 Disconnect thermal overload cable at the pigtail connector
2 OR - - - -disconnect thermal overload cable pigtail from the 15 kW auxiliary module
Figure 2-5 Thermal overload cable connection
5. Turn on system power and wait until it boots to Applications level.

6. Attempt to make an exposure. Verify that the generator aborts the exposure with a tube
thermal overload error.
7. Reconnect the thermal overload cable.

Chapter 3 System data and software
Section 3.1 Backing up system data

This section describes the process to save system files, so that there is a valid backup available if
the system software ever needs to be reloaded or upgraded.
You will need the external CD/DVD drive and a blank media disk (CD-R or DVD-R format), or a USB
drive (i.e. memory stick: It is recommended that you obtain a Sandisk Cruzer 4Gb (GE Part Number
5423551, labeled Daily Use).
The backup takes about ten minutes to complete, but depends upon the amount of data that must
be saved. For example, if multiple detectors are registered to the system (Optima XR220amx and
Optima XR200amx with digital upgrade only), there are more calibration files that must be saved,
resulting in longer backup times.
3.1.1 What is included in a system backup?

During a system back up, the following data is saved:
• Calibration files
• Configuration files
However, the following data is not saved by system backup:
• Image data: Use a separate process for archiving image data. See the Optima XR200amx
Operator Manual or Optima XR220amx Operator Manual for instructions.
• Procedure protocols: Save the protocol database only if you have made changes to the default
values. Default values are always loaded during a software installation. The default protocol
database is included with each shipped system. See the Optima XR200amx Operator Manual
or Optima XR220amx Operator Manual for instructions on saving the protocol database.
• RRA report, DEI report, and Dose report data.
3.1.2 Performing a system backup
1. On the Applications desktop, press the UTILITIES button.

2. On the Utilities desktop, press LAUNCH.
3. On the SUIF Service Home tab, select the UTILITIES tab.
4. In the left navigation frame, expand the SYSTEM folder.
5. Press the BACKUP link.
6. Select the backup media by selecting CD/DVD or USB.
7. Connect the external CD/DVD drive to the USB ports (2 USB port connections required) and
insert supported media (CD-R or DVD -R), or connect a USB drive.
8. Press START.
The status bar displays a series of messages: “Starting BACKUP,” “BACKUP successful,” and
“Backup has completed successfully.” The backup takes about one minute, after which the
right frame displays “SYSTEM BACKUP SUCCESS.”
Chapter 3 System data and software Page 49

9. Close the SUIF by pressing EXIT.
Section 3.2 Performing Load From Cold (LFC)
POTENTIAL FOR DATA LOSS

Before installing, upgrading, or restoring system software, be sure to archive all protocols and
patient files, and back up calibration and configuration data if possible. Installing software can
destroy existing files, including patient, calibration, and configuration files. Avoid reconfiguring and
recalibrating the system, and ensure data protection, by periodically performing a system backup.
Always perform a system backup before performing a system software load or upgrade.
3.2.1 Loading or upgrading system software
3.2.1.1 Before you begin
Use POTENTIAL FOR DATA LOSS

these Pay particular attention to the instruction for system reboot in the following procedure. It is important
procedures to to cycle power according to the specified procedure. Cycling power at the wrong time or by the
re-install or wrong method can corrupt the system’s operating system.
upgrade the
complete
system
software. The
following
procedures
install both the
operating
system and
application
software on the
Host PC. To re-
install the
software takes
approximately
15 minutes.
3.2.1.2 Installing the operating system

To upgrade the PC with new operating system, see Section 3.2.1.2.1.
To load the operating system on a PC for the first time, see Section 3.2.1.2.2.
3.2.1.2.1 Upgrading PC with new software:

1. Verify that the system power is on.
2. Connect the service keyboard and external CD/DVD drive to the USB ports on the left side.
3. Save the needed files from the system, such as:
Page 50 Section 3.2 Performing Load From Cold (LFC)

- Patient images
- Calibration and configuration data
- System protocol database as outlined in the Optima XR200amx or Optima XR220amx
Operator Manual
- RRA Report
- DI Report
- Dose Report
4. Check the existing system internal IP Address range (see Steps 7 & 8 in Section 4.13 IP
Address Change Procedure on page 93). If the IP Address range is not the default value
(192.168.x.x), record the existing value so it can be restored after software is loaded.
5. Place the Optima Software DVD into the external drive.
6. Select SUIF - Calibration - Hardware Calibration page.
7. Select PC Boot Script View and Enable View PC Now and Persistent PC View.
Note: In step 9 below, you will need to enter PC BIOS Mode using the F11 key. The system is very
sensitive to timing in this step. To begin, turn the system on, wait 2 seconds, then start pressing
the F11 key once per second until the boot device selection screen is presented. If the system
continues booting (or approximately 30 seconds go by) and you do not see the boot device
selection screen, you will have to repeat this procedure. In some cases, if the F11 key is hit
too many times, it can lock the PC such that the keyboard is not recognized. If this occurs, shut
the system down using the POWER RESET button and try again.
8. Shut down the system and restart.

9. Press the F11 key (see note above) on the service keyboard to display the "Select Boot
Device" menu on the screen.
10. Select the TEAC drive from the menu and press the ENTER key on the service keyboard.
11. On the next popup, select the option "1) Install system from this image on this
DVD" and press the ENTER key on the service keyboard.
12. The software installation begins.
Note: Do not walk away during this process, you need to be present. If, during the installation
process, the system presents you with a screen to choose either to enter “Degraded Mode” or
“Shutdown”, click DEGRADED MODE immediately. Then enable View PC Now using PC Boot
Script View. If this step is missed, you will not see the PC reboot.
13. Wait for the installation to complete, indicated by an automatic reboot of the PC. It will take
approximately 10 minutes to complete. If you missed the note on step 12, the reboot will not
be apparent. In this case you will need to start over from step 8 (above).
14. Remove the Optima Software DVD from the external DVD/CD-ROM drive. Disconnect the
external drive from the system. The Load From Cold procedure is now complete.
Note: If your customer uses 192.168.x.x for the hospital network connectivity, then you must modify the
systems internal IP address scheme. See Section 4.13 IP Address Change Procedure on page 93.
This must be done after a Software load and before performing a system Backup/Restore. Failure
to follow these instructions will result in boot failures and the system in degraded mode.
15. Restore the configuration and calibration files.

16. Load operator manual onto the system (Optima XR220amx and Optima XR200amx with
Digital Upgrade only). See Section 4.8 Installing the Operator Manual on page 74.
17. Enter PC Boot Script View and set View PC Now = DISABLED, and Persistent PC View = OFF.
18. Reset and reboot the system.

3.2.1.2.2 Loading software on a PC for the first time:
Note: During this procedure, enter the “Degraded” mode if prompted. Select Service - Calibration - PC
Boot Script View and enable View PC Now and Persistent PC View to continue viewing the PC
inputs on the system monitor.
1. Verify that the system power is on.

2. Connect the service keyboard and external CD/DVD drive to the USB ports on the left side.
3. Place the Optima Software DVD into the external drive.
4. Select SUIF - Calibration - Hardware Calibration page.
Select PC Boot Script View and Enable View PC Now and Persistent PC View.In step 6 below,
you will need to enter PC BIOS Mode using the F11 key. The system is very sensitive to timing
in this step. To begin, turn the system on, wait 2 seconds, then start pressing the F11 key once
per second until the boot device selection screen is presented. If the system continues booting
(or approximately 30 seconds go by) and you do not see the boot device selection screen, you
will have to repeat this procedure. In some cases, if the F11 key is hit too many times, it can
lock the PC such that the keyboard is not recognized. If this occurs, shut the system down
using the POWER RESET button and try again.
5. Shut down the system and restart.

6. Press the F11 key (see note above) on the service keyboard to display the "Please Select
Boot Device" menu on the screen.
7. Select the TEAC drive from the menu and press the ENTER key on the service keyboard.
8. On the next popup, select the option "1) Install system from this image on this
DVD" and press the ENTER key on the Service Keyboard.
9. The software installation begins.
Note: Do not walk away during this process, you need to be present. If, during the installation
process, the system presents you with a screen to choose either to enter “Degraded Mode” or
“Shutdown”, click DEGRADED MODE immediately. Then enable View PC Now using PC Boot
Script View. If this step is missed, you will not see the PC reboot.
10. Wait for the installation to complete, indicated by an automatic reboot of the PC. It will take
approximately 10 minutes to complete. If you missed the note on step 9, the reboot will not be
apparent. In this case you will need to start over from step 5 (above).
11. Remove the Optima Software DVD from the external DVD/CD-ROM drive. Disconnect the
external drive from the system. The Load From Cold procedure is now complete.
12. Enter PC Boot Script View and set View PC Now = DISABLED, and Persistent PC View = OFF.
13. Reset and reboot the system.
Note: If your customer uses 192.168.x.x for the hospital network connectivity, then you must modify the
systems internal IP address scheme. See Section 4.13 IP Address Change Procedure on page 93.
This must be done after a Software load and before performing a system Backup/Restore. Failure
to follow these instructions will result in boot failures and the system in degraded mode.
14. Restore the configuration and calibration files.

Load operator manual onto the system (Optima XR220amx and Optima XR200amx with Digital
Upgrade only). See Section 4.8 Installing the Operator Manual on page 74.
15. Perform the functional checks under X-ray in Table 2-3 Functional Checks on page 41.
16. For Optima XR220amx or Optima XR200amx with digital upgrade, verify that images can be
created and transferred via networking (as applicable).
Page 52 Section 3.2 Performing Load From Cold (LFC)

Section 3.3 Performing a FW Load From Cold (LFC)
Before you perform FW Load From Cold (LFC), you need to pay attention to the below compatibility
between Spyder system controller and Firmware, and then choose the right firmware to perform FW
LFC.
5451000-14 is only compatibility with spyder system controller 7350002.
5451000-15 is only compatibility with spyder system controller 5350002-4.
5451000-18 are compatibility with spyder system controller 7350002 and 5350002-4.
1. Shut down the system and turn the main circuit breaker off.
2. Wait one minute, then restore power and boot the system.

5. On the Service Home tab, press the UTILITIES tab button.
6. Press the SUBSYSTEM SOFTWARE button.
7. Press the HW FIRMWARE INSTALL button.
8. Press the DOWNLOADS link.
9. Select HW FIRMWARE INSTALL.
10. Connect the USB firmware dongle to the single USB port on the right.
11. Follow the on-screen instructions.
12. After the firmware load is completed, remove the USB firmware dongle.
13. Reboot the system for the operating system install to complete.
Restore generator TNT data. See Section 3.7 Restoring system data on page 55.
Section 3.4 Restoring generator firmware only

4. Press the SUBSYSTEM SOFTWARE button.
5. Press the HW FIRMWARE INSTALL link.
6. Select DOWNLOADS, then GENERATOR SW INSTALL.
8. Reboot the system for the restore to take effect.
9. Restore generator TNT data. See Section 3.7 Restoring system data on page 55.

Section 3.5 Detector firmware download

This section applies to Optima XR200amx with digital upgrade and Optima XR220amx systems
only.
Note: The first time a new detector is used with an Optima XR220amx or Optima XR200amx with digital
upgrade system, detector firmware must downloaded because the existing firmware present on the
detector may not be compatible with the system. If you attempt to use a detector that does not have
the correct firmware, an error message will be displayed stating The detector is not
compatible with this system. or Digital cassette firmware is incorrect.
1. Ensure the system has booted to applications without error.

2. Connect the detector to the system using the tether and ensure the detector is on, Detector
Status Led illuminated.
3. Power on the detector.
7. In the left navigation frame, expand the SUBSYSTEM SOFTWARE folder.
8. Select DET DATA DOWNLOAD folder.
9. Select DET DATA DOWNLOAD link.
10. Select the appropriate detector.
Section 3.6 FCC Configuration

Per the updated FCC regulation 47 CFR Part 15, GEHC’s portable X-ray systems shall not be
allowed to change the wireless country code for Wi-Fi adapters. This software update has been
made to remove the ability to set the wireless country code in the Service User Interface (SUIF) for
USCAN installed products to remain compliant with the new FCC regulations.
To install or uninstall the software disk a USB Keyboard and USB DVD/CD drive will need to be
installed on the left USB ports.
3.6.1 UNINSTALL WIRELESS SUIF CONFIGURATION SOFTWARE DISK
THIS MUST BE DONE UPON INSTALLATION OR AFTER LOAD FROM COLD IF SYSTEM IS
OUTSIDE THE UNITED STATES.
Please follow the below steps to uninstall the software disk:

1. Insert the Wireless SUIF Configuration software CD (5754823) into the CD/DVD drive.
2. Open the engineering GUI by pressing on the keyboard CTRL+SHIFT+F5 at the same time.
3. Open a terminal window in the engineering GUI.
Page 54 Section 3.5 Detector firmware download

4. In the terminal window type: xxxxxx <Enter>.

5. In the terminal window type: mount /dev/cdrom /media/cdrecorder <Enter>.
6. In the terminal window type: /media/cdrecorder/Uninstall_Update <Enter>.
7. If successful the terminal will give a notification stating: “Wireless Configuration Update
REMOVED.”
8. Reboot the system and select the country the system is installed in SUIF Configuration.
9. FOR SITES INSTALLED IN CANADA ONLY: Install the FCC Configuration Software Disk
again by following steps 1 through 8 in Section 3 below.
3.6.2 INSTALL WIRELESS SUIF CONFIGURATION SOFTWARE DISK

Note: • This is only for systems installed in the United States and Canada.
• The FCC Configuration Software Disk comes already installed on the system. This section is
only if you do a Load From Cold on the system and need to reinstall the disc after service.
Make sure all options are enabled from the SUIF>Options page prior to installing the patch. If
any options are changed during future service events, make sure to reinstall the patch.
Please follow the below steps to install the software disk:

1. If the system in installed in Canada, set the Country Code to Canada in the SUIF under
General Configuration.
2. Insert the Wireless SUIF Configuration software CD (5754823) into the CD/DVD drive.
3. Open the engineering GUI by pressing on the keyboard CTRL+SHIFT+F5 at the same time.
4. Open a terminal window in the engineering GUI.
5. In the terminal window type: xxxxxx <Enter>.
6. In the terminal window type: mount /dev/cdrom /media/cdrecorder <Enter>.
7. In the terminal window type: /media/cdrecorder/Install_Update <Enter>.
8. If successful the terminal will give a notification stating: “Wireless Configuration Updates
APPLIED.”
9. Reboot the system and continue with configuration. The country code selection will not be
present and will be set automatically for United States or Canada.
Section 3.7 Restoring system data

3.7.1 Before you begin
The following procedure enables you to restore only one selection at a time, so you must repeat the
procedure for each item to be restored. To completely restore all of the system files (calibration and
configuration), execute this procedure for each of the system items below:
• Digital
• Generator TNT Data
• IUI
• System Control
• IP Looks Optima XR220amx and Optima XR200amx with digital upgrade only
• Digital Cassette Optima XR220amx and Optima XR200amx with digital upgrade only
• OS Configuration

3.7.2 Restoring system data

Note: Do not insert the backup media until the restore utility screen is displayed (step 7).

5. Press the RESTORE link.
6. Select media type: CD/DVD or USB.
7. Follow the on-screen instructions. Remember that each item must be restored individually
(there is no ’Restore All’).
8. When the status bar indicates that the restore was successful and all items have been
restored, exit the SUIF.
9. Reboot the system for the restore to take effect.
Page 56 Section 3.7 Restoring system data

Chapter 4 Configuration
Potential for Data Loss

• Always create an up-to-date backup of system data after changing the configuration.
• For configuration changes to take effect, restart the system after exiting the Service User
Interface (SUIF). You must restart the system before using it for patient acquisitions.
Section 4.1 When should I configure the system?

• During system installation. The system is delivered with pre-configured information from the
manufacturing process. However, many parameters are specific to the customer and location.
These parameters need to be configured. Other parameters should be confirmed and/or
modified per the customers preference.
Table 4-1
Configuration Comments
SUIF (Site parameters, Generator See Section 4.2 Using the System Configuration Tool (SUIF)
parameters, etc.) on page 58.
DICOM See Section 4.4 DICOM connectivity configuration on
page 68.
Demo images See Section 4.7 Loading demo images on page 74.
Operator manual See Section 4.8 Installing the Operator Manual on page 74.
Hardware options such as the See Section 4.10 Installing hardware options on page 75.
barcode reader
System login See Section 4.9 Login and user management on page 75.
• If system backups are lost or missing. If the software is re-installed but system configuration
files are not restored, configure the system again. GE service may need to be contacted to
enable purchased options. A software install resets all configuration data. If the system
configuration files are restored, you do not need to re-configure the system.
• After adding purchased options. Installation of purchased options can only be performed by
an authorized GE Healthcare service representative. If you add purchased options to the
system, update the system configuration files immediately and create and save a new backup.
Chapter 4 Configuration Page 57

Section 4.2 Using the System Configuration Tool (SUIF)

1. Turn on the system.
2. Log on to the system with administrator privileges.
4. On the Utilities desktop, next to Service, press SERVICE.
The Service Home tab is displayed. The Home tab contains summary information including
site identification, connectivity parameters, and enabled options.
5. Press the CONFIGURATION tab button.
6. On the Configuration page, in the left folder tree, select the parameter group to change.
7. Configure the system according to site preferences.
An overview of the configurable system attributes is given in the tables below.
Contact a GE service representative for items marked “Editable by GE Healthcare personnel
only.”
8. On each page, after making changes, press COMMIT to put the changes into effect.
4.2.1 Site configuration

The following information can be viewed regardless of service mode. However, some fields are
editable only by sites with Advanced Service mode enabled (Section 4.12 Enabling Advanced
Service mode on page 92), and some are editable only by GE Healthcare personnel.
Table 4-2 Site tab parameters
Parameter Definition
Site Name Name of specific site where system is installed.
Street Address 1 Street address of site where system in installed.
Street Address 2 Street address, continued, of site where system is installed.
City City where system is installed.
State/Province State or province where system is installed.
Postal Code Postal or ZIP code where system is installed.
Department Name Department name (for example, Radiology) responsible for system
maintenance.
Telephone Phone number of department responsible for system.
Site Name Name of specific site where system is installed.
Street Address 1 Street address of site where system is installed.
Street Address 2 Street address, continued, of site where system is installed.
City City where system is installed.
State/Province State or province where system is installed.
Postal Code Postal or ZIP code where system is installed.
Department Name Department name (for example, Radiology) responsible for system
maintenance.
Page 58 Section 4.2 Using the System Configuration Tool (SUIF)

Table 4-2 Site tab parameters
Telephone Phone number of department responsible for system.
Fax Fax number of department responsible for system.
Contact Person Name Person responsible for system maintenance.
Contact Person Phone Phone number of person responsible for system maintenance.
System ID Editable by GE Healthcare personnel only.
System identifier assigned by GE Healthcare following system
installation and prior to customer turnover.
This field is a GE proprietary field and cannot be used for any
purpose other than the System ID. Violation of this mandate will
result in Insite and/or other features not working. Customer IT
personnel need to use other means for DICOM filtering on their
DICOM machines.
Installation Date Editable by GE Healthcare personnel only.
Date system installation is completed, created by GE Healthcare.
Service Contract Number Editable by GE Healthcare personnel only.
Customer’s Service Contract number, created by GE Healthcare.
Contract Expiration Editable by GE Healthcare personnel only.
Customer’s Service Contract expiration date, created by GE
Healthcare.
4.2.2 Networking configuration

The following information can be viewed regardless of service mode.
Table 4-3 Networking tab parameters
Options: DHCP or Static.
DHCP Configuration Determines whether the IP address is assigned, or acquired
dynamically. If Static is selected, enter associated information in IP
Address, Subnet Mask, and DNS fields.
System IP address.
IP Address Fixed Only
Enabled only if Wired IP Settings is set to Static.
System subnet mask.
Subnet Mask Fixed Only
Default gateway.
Default Gateway Fixed Only
Site domain name server.
Static DNS Server 1
Site domain name server.
Static DNS Server 2

Table 4-3 Networking tab parameters
Application Entity Title for DICOM.
AE Title Fixed Only
Fixed value.
Software port used for network communications.
Port Number Fixed Only
Fixed value.
4.2.3 General configuration

If the site is using a master time server (see 4.2.10 Time Server configuration on page 67), some
settings in this section are superceded by the master clock server data.
Table 4-4 General tab parameters
Timezone Time zone of site where system is installed.
System Clock System time in YYYYMMDD HH:MM:SS format.
Date Display Format MM-DD-YYYY or DD-MM-YYYY.
Time Display Format Military (24-hour) or AM/PM (12-hour).
Country Code Country where system is installed.
A list of selectable countries. The system auto configures to the
correct regulatory approved formats and frequencies for all wireless
Wireless Regulatory Code communications. If a country does not allow a specific wireless
communication technology then the feature is disabled, Flashpad
wireless for example.
Measurement System English or Metric.
Application Language Language used for application screens.
QAP Timeout (Optima
Interval between QAP tests, in days. When time-out is reached,
XR220amx or Optima
system users see a warning flag indicating that a QAP test should be
XR200amx with digital
performed.
upgrade)
Editable by GE Healthcare personnel only.
VA Site Applies to USA Veterans Affairs facilities.
Yes or No.
Period of inactivity (no user input or processing activity) after which
Screen Blank Timeout
the screen will go blank, in minutes.
Image Mask Adjustment
(Optima XR220amx or Adjust the mask that is applied to the acquired image from the
Optima XR200amx with detector. Options: 3mm, 2mm, 1mm, 0, -1mm, -2mm, -3mm.
digital upgrade)

4.2.4 Hardware configuration
Table 4-5 Hardware tab parameters
Collimator Light Maximum
Time, in seconds, that the collimator light will remain on.
On Time
Collimator Lamp Install
Date the collimator lamp was installed. YYYY-MM-DD format.
Date
4.2.5 Generator configuration
Table 4-6 Generator tab parameters
Percentage of the tube thermal capacity limit, from 0 to 100. When
Tube HUR Alarm
this limit is reached, X-ray exposure is inhibited and an alarm sounds.
Tube ID Tube ID. Not editable.
Serial number of the tube. Confirm the serial number matches that of
Tube Serial
the attached tube.
Date and time the tube was installed. YYYYMMDD HH:MM:SS
Tube Install Date and Time
format.
4.2.6 Wireless configuration
Before configuring the wireless settings, verify that the Wireless Hospital Network option is
enabled on the Options screen (see 4.2.7 Options configuration on page 64). If the site doesn’t
require for authentication certificates and keys, go directly to 4.2.6.2 Configuring broadcast SSID
networks on page 62 or 4.2.6.3 Configuring non-broadcast SSID networks on page 63 to configure
the wireless network.
4.2.6.1 Adding certificates

If your customer uses site-specific network security certificates, contact the IT administrator to
obtain a copy of the certificate(s) on a USB flash drive.
1. Ensure that the restoration of all configuration parameters has been completed and the system
has been reset.
2. Launch the SUIF and navigate to CONFIGURATION > WIRELESS.
3. Launch the wireless configuration utility as instructed on the screen.
4. Connect the USB flash drive containing the site-specific certificates to a left-side USB port.
5. Click on the Certificates tab.
a. Observe the USB flash drive-resident certificates in the pull-down list next to the ADD

button.
b. If there is more than one certificate, you will need to select each certificate individually.
c. Click ADD to install the displayed certificate from the drop-down list.
6. Continue with the site-specific configurations as defined by the IT administrator.
7. Exit the Configuration utility.
8. Remove the USB flash drive.
9. Reset the system.
4.2.6.2 Configuring broadcast SSID networks

1. On the Wireless configuration screen, confirm that the “adapter” is ON or ENABLED.
2. Select the Current Status tab.
3. Click SCAN to find the network.
Note: Some customers may have their network access in a non-broadcast mode. This may
result in strange naming conventions for the scan results. Confirm with your IT contact.
4. In the Scan Results window, double-click the network to which you want to connect.
5. In the Network Config window, some fields are auto-populated. Depending on the type of
authentication used by the network, complete the other required information, as described in
the table below:
Table 4-7
Authentication type Required fields No FIPS FIPS ON

Static WEP (Shared Key Y N
• WEP keys
authentication)
• Encryption (if different than TKIP) Y N
WPATM-Personal (PSK)
• PSK
• Encryption (if different than TKIP) Y N
• Identity
• Password
• Client certificate
WPA -Enterprise (EAP) •
TM
Inner Auth
• Private key file
• Private key password
• PEAP version (only if EAP method is set to
PEAP)
• Encryption (if different than TKIP) Y Y
WPA2TM-Personal (PSK)
• PSK

Table 4-7

• Encryption (if different than CCMP) Y N
• Identity
• Password
WPA2TM-Enterprise
(EAP) • Inner Auth
• PEAP version (only if EAP method is set to
PEAP)
WPA2TM-Enterprise N Y
• EAP-TLS
(EAP)
6. Click ADD.
7. Select the Current Status tab, and click CONNECT. Verify successful connection message.
8. To verify connectivity:
a. Select FILE menu > TOOLS.
b. Enter the IP of the machine you want to ping.
c. Press START PING and check for messages verifying connectivity.
d. Press STOP PING.
4.2.6.3 Configuring non-broadcast SSID networks

1. On the Wireless configuration screen, select NETWORK menu > ADD.
2. Select IP settings:
- If the system will be identified on the network by a static IP address, select STATIC IP,
and enter the IP address, netmask, and gateway. If no gateway is used, you must enter
0.0.0.0.
- If the system will be identified on the network using DHCP, select DHCP.
3. Enter the network SSID.
4. Choose the authentication type.
Some fields are auto-populated. Depending on the type of authentication, complete the other
required information, as described in the table below:
Table 4-8

Static WEP (Shared Key • WEP keys Y N
authentication)
WPATM-Personal (PSK) • Encryption (if different than TKIP) Y N
• PSK

Table 4-8

WPATM-Enterprise (EAP) • Encryption (if different than TKIP) Y N
• Identity
• Password
• Inner Auth
• PEAP version (only if EAP method is set
to PEAP)
WPA2TM-Personal (PSK) • Encryption (if different than TKIP) Y Y
• PSK
• Encryption (if different than CCMP) Y N
• Identity
• Password
WPA2TM-Enterprise (EAP) • Inner Auth
• PEAP version (only if EAP method is set
to PEAP)
WPA2TM-Enterprise (EAP) • EAP-TLS N Y
5. Click ADD.
6. Select the Networks tab, and verify that the network is listed.
7. Select the Current Status tab, and click CONNECT. Verify successful connection message.
8. To verify connectivity:
a. Select FILE > TOOLS.
b. Enter the IP of the machine you want to ping.
c. Press START PING and check for messages verifying connectivity.
d. Press STOP PING.
4.2.6.4 Troubleshooting connections

If you try to connect in an enterprise situation, it will continue to try to connect until you tell it to stop
by selecting DISCONNECT.
4.2.7 Options configuration

The Optima XR200amx/XR220amx systems are delivered with a base set of operating software
that is configured for immediate operation.
Optional software and hardware purchased by the site must be enabled by GE Healthcare service
personnel, such as:
• Wireless network connectivity
• DAP (Dose Area Product) meter (standard with Optima XR220amx, optional for Optima
XR200amx)

• Repeat Reject Analysis (RRA) (Optima XR220amx or Optima XR200amx with digital upgrade
only)
• Auto Protocol Assist (APA) (Optima XR220amx or Optima XR200amx with digital upgrade
only)
• Generator Power - 30kW
4.2.8 InSite configuration

Contact a GE service representative to configure InSite ExC settings.
4.2.9 PNF configuration

The Firewall option at the top of the PNF area must be set to On. If it is set to Off, select TURN
FIREWALL ON.
• When the firewall is off, all network traffic in both directions is allowed. This setting is used
primarily for troubleshooting.
• When the firewall is on, it allows only the network communications that are specified by its
configuration and rejects all the rest.
After modifying any PNF options, select RESTART FIREWALL to apply the changes.
4.2.9.1 PNF GUI Control area

The PNF GUI Control area, near the top of the screen, contains these options:
Table 4-9 PNF GUI Control options
Option Action
Configure filter settings that allow access through the firewall by
Filter Settings
adding allowed services and IP addresses, and removing filters.
Options:
BACKUP CURRENT FILTERS: Create a backup of the current filters.
RESTORE FROM BACKUP FILTERS: Restore the filters to a
Backup/Restore previously backed up set.
RESTORE TO FACTORY DEFAULTS: Reset all filter settings to
those originally installed.
REMOVE BACKUP FILTERS:
Show the firewall rules that are currently in effect on this system.
Network Tools
Select REFRESH to refresh the list of rules.
Select which red interfaces the filter settings should be applied to.
Configure PNF
Select UPDATE RED INTERFACES to apply the changes.

4.2.9.2 PNF tabs and parameters
Table 4-10 PNF parameters
Option Description
Named Services tab
Used to set up filters to allow traffic to common network services (such as telnet or ftp) by
name, without needing to know the port and protocol.
Services/Allowed IPs Lists current filters by name and IP.
Select the Delete box check box next to the filter to delete, then
Remove Existing Filters
select DELETE EXISTING FILTERS.
From the Service Name drop-down list, select the service to be
allowed (such as telnet, ssh, ftp).
Add New Filter In the Allowed IPs field, specify a particular IP address, a range
of IP addresses, or a masked subnet.
Select ADD FILTER to apply your changes.
Allowed Nodes tab
Used to set up filters to allow all traffic from specified nodes. You can specify a particular IP
address, a range of IP addresses, or a masked subnet.
Allowed IPs Lists current filters by IP.
In the Allowed IPs field, specify a particular IP address, a range
Add New Filter of IP addresses, or a masked subnet.
DICOM tab
Used to add DICOM port numbers (all IP addresses are allowed DICOM access; the DICOM
application may limit access by IP). You can add multiple DICOM ports.
Allowed DICOM Ports Lists current DICOM ports by number.
Select the Delete box check box next to the port to delete, then
In the Allowed Port field, specify a particular DICOM port.
Add New Filter
Expert tab
Used to set up detailed filters by port, protocol, and node-lock (source).
Used only by advanced IT users.
Name/Port/Protocol Lists current filters by name, port number, protocol, and IP.

Table 4-10 PNF parameters
Option Description
In the Name field, specify the filter name.
In the Allowed IPs field, specify a particular IP address, a range
of IP addresses, or a masked subnet.
Add New Filter In the Allowed Port field, specify a particular port.
From the Protocol drop-down list, select the protocol to be
allowed (TCP, UDP, Any).
NAT tab
Used to define NAT (Network Address Translation) rules.
Lists current filters by name, source IP, destination IP,
Name/Source IP/Dest. IP
destination port, and protocol.
In the Name field, specify the filter name.
In the Source IP field, specify the source IP.
In the Destination IP field, specify the destination IP.
Add New Filter In the Destination Port field, specify the destination port.
From the Protocol drop-down list, select the protocol to be
allowed (TCP, UDP, Any).
GE Service tab
Used to set IIP node-lock IP address and DICOM port. This page is limited to GE service
personnel.
4.2.10 Time Server configuration

Contact a GE service representative to configure Time Server settings.
4.2.11 Secure Login configuration

Select SAVE to apply your changes, or CANCEL to cancel them.
Use the arrow buttons to move through the pages.
Table 4-11 Secure Login options
Option Description
Audit Message Settings tab
Audit Source ID IP address of audit message source.
Patient Name
On or Off.
Anonymized
Enterprise Repository tab
Enterprise Repository 1 On or Off.
Host Name/IP Primary audit server name or IP.

Table 4-11 Secure Login options
Option Description
Port Number Port number used to communicate with primary audit server.
Protocol used to communicate with primary audit server (TCP,
Protocol
UDP).
Send Test Message Test connection with primary audit server.
Enterprise Repository 2 On or Off.
Host Name/IP Secondary audit server name or IP.
Port Number Port number used to communicate with secondary audit server.
Protocol Protocol used to communicate with secondary audit server.
Send Test Message Test connection with secondary audit server.
Local Repository tab
On/Off Radio buttons.
Refresh Button to refresh the list.
Event ID / Time / Event
Headers for list of messages.
Outcome
Display Raw XML Display the raw data file to the user.
Section 4.3 Changing Auto Protocol Assist settings

Contact a GE service representative to change Auto Protocol Assist settings.
Section 4.4 DICOM connectivity configuration

Follow the procedures in this section to configure DICOM connectivity to network hosts and printers.
After successful configuration, use the tables below to capture the system’s DICOM connectivity
configuration for future reference. Store the worksheets in a secure location at the site.
4.4.1 Network host configuration
4.4.1.1 Adding network hosts

This section provides instructions for setting the system preferences for network host connections.

3. On the Utilities desktop, next to Network Connections, press EDIT.
4. On the Network Connections window, in the Network Hosts section, press ADD.
The Add Network Host screen appears.
Page 68 Section 4.3 Changing Auto Protocol Assist settings

5. On the Add Network Host window, on the Host tab, enter the appropriate values in the fields
listed below. Some fields are available only on the Optima XR220amx or Optima XR200amx
with digital upgrade system.
Table 4-12 Add Network Host – Hosts tab description
Function Description
Name of the host that appears in the Network Hosts lists and
Host Label on the Image Management screen. Host labels cannot
contain spaces; use underscores ( _ ) to separate words.
Application Entry Title DICOM application title.
IP/Network Address IP address of the network host.
Port Number Port number for the network host.
Available only on the Optima XR220amx or Optima
XR200amx with digital upgrade system.
Query Retrieve
Type of information the host will provide upon query from
another host. Options are No provider, Study, and Patient.
Storage Commitment XR200amx with digital upgrade system.
Designates whether the host will store image data.
Storage Commitment - Available only on the Optima XR220amx or Optima
Application Entry Title (if XR200amx with digital upgrade system.
Storage Commitment is
Yes) DICOM application title.
Storage Commitment - Available only on the Optima XR220amx or Optima

Network Address (if Storage XR200amx with digital upgrade system.
Commitment is Yes) IP address of the storage database.
Storage Commitment - Port Available only on the Optima XR220amx or Optima
Number (if Storage XR200amx with digital upgrade system.
Commitment is Yes) Port number for the storage database.
Comments Area for notes about the network host or configuration.
6. Press SAVE.
7. Select the PREFERENCES tab.
8. On the Add Network Host window, on the Preferences tab, select the appropriate options as
described below. All options except “Make this network host the HIS/RIS source” are available
only on the Optima XR220amx or Optima XR200amx with digital upgrade system.
Table 4-13 Add Network Host – Preferences tab description
Allow this network host to query the XR200amx with digital upgrade system.
(system name)
Allows this host to search and filter the system.
Allow this network host to retrieve from XR200amx with digital upgrade system.
the (system name) Allows this host to open and display exams from the
system.

Table 4-13 Add Network Host – Preferences tab description
Allow this network host to send images XR200amx with digital upgrade system.
to the (system name)
Allows the host to send images to the system.
This network host accepts multiple XR200amx with digital upgrade system.
frame image. Allows multiple frame images to be sent to this
network host.
Perform de-identification (anonymous XR200amx with digital upgrade system.
patient images) when sending to this
network host. Automatically de-identifies (anonymizes) any
images that the system sends to this host.
Burns the VOI LUT (Look-Up Tables) into the
Apply “Burn-On-Send” to images when DICOM header to be displayed by PACS. Leaving
sending to this network host. this option unselected sends all available VOI LUTs
to the DICOM header for PACS to query and apply.
Note: PACS should be configured to read the first
VOI LUT for proper display of images on the
Acquisition workstation.
This node acts as the Destination for receiving the
Send MPPS N-Create and N-Set MPPS NCreate & N-Set Notification. When
notification to this network host. configured for MPPS, the System sends information
like which exam is in progress, when a Study is
completed, how many images were acquired, and
what was the radiation dose to which the patient
was exposed during that session, etc.
Designates the host as the DICOM Worklist
provider. Defining the Radiology Information
System (RIS) and Hospital Information System
Make this network host the HIS/RIS (HIS) host allows patient worklists to be downloaded
source. (Only one host can be from those networks to the system.
designated as the HIS/RIS source.)
Note: Only one HIS/RIS source may be designated
on the system. Selecting this option will de-select
any other hosts as the HIS/RIS source.
DR Images sent as CR Modality XR200amx with digital upgrade system.
Options are Yes or No.
9. Press SAVE.
10. Repeat this process for each network host device the site wants to add.
4.4.1.2 Performing a C-Echo test

Use this function to determine if the system is communicating with a particular network host.
Page 70 Section 4.4 DICOM connectivity configuration


3. On the Network Connections window, in the Network Hosts section, select the network host
connection to test, and press C-ECHO TEST.
A message appears saying whether the test passed or failed.
- A “passed” message means that the network host is working and that exams can be
retrieved from or transferred to it.
- A “failed” message means that the system could not contact the network host. Perform
the following tasks to resolve the problem:
* Re-try the test at a later time. The host may be temporarily unavailable.
* Confirm the host configuration on the Edit screen. (On the Network Connections
window, in the Network Hosts section, select the network host connection to verify,
and press EDIT.
If the problem persists, contact the technical support group or system administrator.
4.4.1.3 Removing network hosts

Follow these instructions to remove a network host.

3. On the Network Connections window, in the Network Hosts section, select the network host
connection to delete, and press REMOVE.
A message appears saying “Are you sure you want to remove (host name)?”
4. Press YES to remove the network host connection.
4.4.2 Printer configuration

Printer connections are available only on the Optima XR220amx or Optima XR200amx with digital
upgrade system.
4.4.2.1 Adding printers

This section provides instructions for setting the system preferences for printer connections.

4. On the Network Connections window, in the DICOM Printers section, press ADD.
The Add Printer screen appears.
5. On the Add Printer window, on the Printer tab, enter the appropriate values in the fields listed
below.

For suggested parameter values for specific printer brands and models, refer to the System
Manual, Appendix A Printer configuration.
Table 4-14 Add Printer screen parameter descriptions
Attribute Value
Printer tab
Name of the printer that appears in the DICOM Printers list
and on the print setup screens. DICOM printer labels
DICOM Printer Label
cannot contain spaces in the name. Use underscores ( _ )
to separate words.
DICOM application title, provided by the site’s network
Application Entry Title
administrator.
IP address of the printer, provided by the site’s network
Network Address
administrator.
Port number of the printer. May be site-specific; check with
Port Number
site.
Pixel Depth Resolution of the printer. Options are 10 or 12.
Designates the pixel size the printer uses. This is specified
Printer Pixel Size (micron)
by the printer manufacturer.
Configuration Information Area for notes about the printer or configuration.
Density Min Minimum density range.
Density Max Maximum density range.
Magnification Type Options are Replicate, Bilinear, Cubic, None.
Smooth Factor Image smoothing factor.
Trim Designates whether there is to be trim. Yes or No.
Polarity Options are Normal, Reverse.
Border Density Color of the image border. Options are Black, White.
Color of areas that have no image printed. Options are
Empty Image Density
Black, White.
Designates the memory size of the printer, in Mbytes. This
Printer Memory Size
is specified by the printer manufacturer.
Layouts tab
Number and layout of images that may be printed on a
single sheet of film or paper.
Select the desired layouts
allowed for this printer Some selections control the orientation of the images on
the page. For example, two images per page may be side
by side, or one above the other.
Slide formats available for the printer, if any. Options are 35
Slide formats
or 40 mm.
Film Sizes tab
Select the sizes of film available for this printer, and enter the pixel width (W) and pixel height
(H). Pixel width and height values are provided by the printer manufacturer based on what
the printer supports.
Printer Settings tab
# Of Copies
Page 72 Section 4.4 DICOM connectivity configuration

Table 4-14 Add Printer screen parameter descriptions
Attribute Value
Print Mode
Magnification
Format
Orientation
Media Type
Destination
Media Size
6. Press SAVE.
7. Repeat this process for each printer the site wants to add.
4.4.2.2 Removing printers

Follow these instructions to remove a printer.

3. On the Network Connections window, in the DICOM Printers section, select the printer
connection to delete, and press REMOVE.
A message appears: “Are you sure you want to remove (printer name)?”
4. Press YES to remove the printer connection.
Section 4.5 Image management

Image management parameters let the site control how images will be handled after acquisition,
including printing, archiving, and deleting. For more information about image management
parameters, including Auto Print, Auto Send (sometimes called Auto Push), and Auto Delete, refer
to the Optima XR220amx or Optima XR200amx with digital upgrade Operator Manual.
Section 4.6 Image processing

4.6.1 Enabling EMI reduction
The EMI Reduction algorithm is designed to reduce artifacts resulting from electromagnetic
interference from other equipment in the area during image acquisition.
Administrative users can enable or disable EMI reduction using the UTILITIES > PREFERENCES
> IMAGE PROCESSING screen.
Contact a GE service representative to configure EMI reduction factors.
5.
Note: Contact system administrator for user name and password.

Section 4.7 Loading demo images

Load demo images from the CD-ROM provided with the system into the image database. This is
applicable only to Optima XR220amx or Optima XR200amx with digital upgrade systems.
Refer to the Optima XR220amx Operator Manual’s chapter on Image Management for more details.
4.7.1 Loading images from CD

Follow this process to access images stored on a CD.
1. Attach the external CD/DVD drive, and insert the disk with images into the CD/DVD drive.
2. On the Image Management screen, press Source CD1.
The exam list is updated to show the images stored on the CD.
3. Select the exams to copy.
4. Copy the exams to the Local database.
5. Press the LOCAL Destination button.
A message appears: “Selected images will be copied to (destination name).
Select OK to confirm.“
6. Press OK.
7. Open the exams from the Local database.
If the exams are being viewed on a computer that has the DICOM viewer installed, images may
be viewed directly from the disk.
Section 4.8 Installing the Operator Manual

Optima XR220amx and Optima XR200amx with digital upgrade systems only.
Note: To install the Operator Manual (OM), you need the Account and Password information, contact your
administrator.
To install the Operator Manual (OM), follow these steps:

1. Attach the external CD/DVD drive.
2. Exit all service applications, and close the SUIF.
3. Connect the service keyboard to a USB port.
4. Press these keys simultaneously:
CTRL+ALT+F2
Note: At the login prompt, type the Account:
Contact your administrator for the Account.
Press ENTER.
Note: Enter the password:
Contact your administrator for the Password.
Page 74 Section 4.7 Loading demo images

Press ENTER.
5. Insert the Operator Manual CD into the external CD/DVD drive.
6. To run the interactive script, at the prompt, type:
./xrdinstall.om
Press ENTER.
7. At the prompt, type Y.
8. Type the number of the language to install, then press ENTER.
9. When the installation is complete, at the prompt, type:
exit
Press ENTER.
10. To return to the applications screen, at the login prompt, press these keys simultaneously:
CTRL+ALT+F1 (for the products 5555000-13/ 5692780 / 5692781 with HeliOS)
CTRL+ALT+F7 (for other products with SuseOS)
Section 4.9 Login and user management

GE service engineers must create a specified Account and Password for system administrator.
System administrators can perform a number of tasks that affect what users can do or will see. The
administrative options are described in the Optima XR200amx or Optima XR220amx Operator
Manual, Appendix A Login Administration.
Note: If you meet any question about the Account and Password information, contact your administrator.
Note: Except the login and user management account and password created specially to the system
administrator, GE field engineers also need to provide the related account and password
information to system administrator for the below configuration:
• Installing the Operator Manual IP Address Change Procedure

• IP Address Change Procedure
Section 4.10 Installing hardware options

4.10.1 Installing the barcode reader
Applies to Optima XR220amx or Optima XR200 with digital upgrade systems only
Unpack the OPI-4002 barcode reader and associated components.

Note:
The USB cable is packaged and shipped in a separate box than the barcode reader assembly.

4.10.1.1 Installing the barcode reader receiver

1. Plug the USB cable into the barcode reader receiver. See Figure 4-1.
Note: If the position of the label makes the barcode unreadable, move the label so the barcode
can be read. A sample label similar to the one on the USB receiver is shown in Figure 4-1
below.
Figure 4-1 Sample barcode label
2. Remove the system side covers and the top cover. See the System manual, Replacement
Procedures, Top cover removal.
3. Remove the two screws from the inside of the left drive handle support, then remove the cover.
See Figure 4-2.
Figure 4-2 Left drive handle screws and cover
4. Route the USB cable through the opening in the bottom of the left drive handle support. See
Figure 4-3.
Note: You may need to loosen the detector bin mounting screws to provide clearance for
routing the cable.
Page 76 Section 4.10 Installing hardware options

Cable
access
hole
Figure 4-3 Cable access hole and receiver placement on system
5. Attach the USB receiver to the plastic clip with the barcode facing out as shown in Figure 4-3.
6. Plug the USB cable into a USB port on the PC. See Figure 4-4.

Item Description
1 Host PC
2 Detector power supply (Optima XR220amx and Optima XR200amx with digital
upgrade only)
Figure 4-4 Connect USB cable to PC
The Windows standard device driver will be installed automatically when you connect the
barcode reader receiver to the USB port and the system is powered up.
During initialization, the LED is orange. When the receiver LED turns green, the initialization
is complete and a connection has been made.
4.10.1.2 Connecting the barcode reader

1. Turn on system power.
2. Verify that the USB receiver is connected and that the green LED is blinking.
3. On the barcode reader, press the trigger key to start scanning.
4. Scan the barcode label on the USB receiver (Figure 4-1) to register the barcode reader.
The connection is complete and the barcode reader is ready for use.
Do not replace the covers at this point. You will need to scan the barcode receiver label
during configuration.
5. Each time the system is rebooted, a message saying, “Do you want to connect to a
bluetooth SPP?" appears. The user needs to select YES or the barcode reader functionality
will not be enabled.
4.10.1.3 Barcode reader LED indicators

By default, the OPI-4002 scanner is in power saving mode. To turn it on, press the trigger key for a
few seconds. If the scanner is not in use for a while, it will go into sleep mode and the trigger key
must be pressed for a few seconds to reactivate the unit before scanning.
The table below lists the state of the scanner based on the scanner LEDs.
Table 4-15 LED indicator state
Color Description
Green Barcode was successfully read.
Red Blinking Data transmission error. The battery may need to be charged.
Red Solid Charging on the cradle. The LED changes from red to green when the battery
is fully charged.
4.10.1.4 Charging the barcode reader

The barcode reader will not start up if the battery is empty. Use the charging cradle to charge the
battery. It takes about three hours to fully charge a battery. Adapters are provided to connect the
AC/DC converter to various power outlet configurations.

Figure 4-5 OPI-4002 barcode reader charging cradle and power adapters
4.10.2 Configuring the barcode reader

Applies to Optima XR220amx or Optima XR200 with digital upgrade systems only
The following section provides instructions for the default configuration and two optional settings.
Have a printed copy of these pages on hand so you can scan the necessary barcodes. Refer to the
OPI-4002 User’s Guide for additional configuration options.
4.10.2.1 Setting to default configuration

1. Turn on the system. Wait until the green LED on the barcode reader receiver starts flashing.
2. Press the barcode reader trigger to start the scan.
3. Scan the Reset To Default barcode.
Figure 4-6 Reset to Default barcode
You will hear three quick sets of high-low-high beeps.

Whenever you scan the Reset To Default barcode, rescan the barcode label (on the barcode
reader receiver) and re-program any optional configuration.
4. Scan the barcode label (Figure 4-1) on the barcode reader receiver to register the barcode
reader.
You will hear one set of high-low beeps, a short pause, and then one long high beep.
The connection is complete and the barcode reader is ready for verification.

4.10.2.2 Verifying the default configuration

1. Turn on the system. Wait until the login screen appears.
2. Verify that a green LED is blinking on the barcode reader receiver.
3. Scan any barcode.
You will hear one set of high-low beeps. The scanned barcode characters appear in the Login
ID field on the login screen, and the cursor remains at the end of the scanned barcode.
The configuration is successful and the barcode reader is ready for use.
4. Replace the system covers.
4.10.2.3 Optional configuration 1

Optional configuration 1 is to add a Tab at the end instead of Return.
This configuration sets the barcode reader to add a Tab at the end of the scan instead of a Return.
Have a printed copy of these pages on hand so you can scan the necessary barcodes. If you make
a mistake during this configuration, start over at step 1.
1. Power up the system. Wait until the green LED on the receiver starts flashing.
2. Perform 4.10.2.1 Setting to default configuration on page 79.
3. Scan the barcodes shown in Figure 4-7, top to bottom.
After scanning each barcode you will hear one set of high-low-high beeps. The scanner will
beep at a one-second interval, and the LED will alternate green and red.
After scanning the last barcode, the scanner beam will turn off.
SET
RZ
TAB
END
Figure 4-7 Set Tab at the end instead of Return
4.10.2.4 Verifying optional configuration 1

ID field on the login screen, and the cursor moves to the Password field.

4.10.2.5 Optional configuration 2

Optional configuration 2 is to strip first two and last four characters, and add a Tab suffix.
This configuration sets the barcode reader to strip the first two and last four characters, and add a
Tab at the end of the scan. Have a printed copy of these pages on hand so you can scan the
necessary barcodes. If you make a mistake during this configuration, start over at step 1.
1. Power up the system. Wait until the green LED on the receiver starts flashing.
2. Perform 4.10.2.2 Verifying the default configuration on page 80.
3. Scan the barcode shown in Figure 4-8.
After scanning the barcode you will hear three sets of high-low-high beeps.
Figure 4-8 Strip first two and last four characters, and add a Tab suffix
4.10.2.6 Verifying optional configuration 2

ID field on the login screen, with the first two and last four characters stripped. The cursor
moves to the Password field.
4.10.3 Installing the Dose Area Product (DAP) meter
4.10.3.1 DAP installation for Optima XR220amx system

1. Shut down the system and turn off the main circuit breaker.
2. Unpack the DAP meter.
3. Slide the meter into the lower set of collimator rails (the set further from the collimator). The
meter must be installed with the cable exiting toward the rear.
4. Connect the DAP cable to the existing connector in the cable drape. See Figure 4-9.
Note: Ensure the DAP cable is properly secured so that it does not obstruct the Tube Lock mechanism.

Figure 4-9 DAP meter cable attached
5. For Optima XR220amx systems, the DAP meter option is a standard option and has already
been enabled. It can be turned on/off at the Applications level.
a. On the Applications desktop, click the UTILITIES button.

b. On the Utilities desktop, select PREFERENCES > OPTIONS.
c. Turn the DAP function ON.
d. Refer to the system Operator Manual for instructions on DAP usage.
The system must be reset using the power button each time the DAP meter is disconnected and
then reconnected with system power on. The DAP meter does not support “Hot Swapping”. Failure
to reset the system in this occurrence can result in an inaccurate dose value reported by the DAP
meter.
6. Perform DAP calibration. See the System Manual, Calibration Chapter, Hardware Calibration/
DAP Calibration section, for calibration procedure.
4.10.3.2 DAP installation for Optima XR200amx system

2. Remove the side covers, top cover and front bin. See the System manual, Replacement
Procedures chapter, Front Bin Removal section.
3. Remove the cable cover from the vertical column cable bundle:
a. Cut the cable ties at the ends of the cable cover.
b. Unzip and remove the cable cover.
4. Unpack the DAP meter and cable.
5. Slide the meter into the lower set of collimator rails (the set further from the collimator).The
meter must be installed with the cable exiting toward the rear.
6. Install the DAP cable:

a. Connect the round cable connector to the DAP meter. See Figure 4-10.
Figure 4-10 DAP meter cable attached
b. Route the long DAP cable through the cable drape along the horizontal arm and vertical
column.
Loosely attach cable ties to hold the cable in position, but do not tighten them until range
of motion is confirmed.
Leave enough extra cable length at the DAP meter so that the tube/collimator assembly
can be moved through the normal range of motion without unplugging the cable. Ensure
the DAP cable is properly secured so that it does not obstruct the Tube Lock mechanism.
c. Route the DAP cable through the cable access opening in the right-front cover. See
Figure 4-11.
d. Remove the HV cable clamp mounting screws. See Figure 4-11.
Item Description
1 HV cable clamp mounting screws (2)
Figure 4-11 HV cable clamp mounting screws
e. Remove the clamp from the HV cable bundle. See Figure 4-12.

Figure 4-12 HV cable clamp
f. Plug the other end of the DAP cable into the J6 bulkhead connector. See Figure 4-13.
Install cable ties as necessary to secure cable within the bulkhead area.
J6
Figure 4-13 DAP meter cable attached to J6 on bulkhead
7. Confirm that there is sufficient slack in the DAP cable at the tube/collimator assembly:
a. Move the tube/collimator assembly through the full range of motion and verify that the
DAP cable remains connected to the DAP meter.
b. Once sufficient cable slack is confirmed, tighten down the cable ties to secure the DAP
cable to the existing cable drape.
8. Arrange the cable bundle as shown in Figure 4-14, use a cable tie to maintain cable positions.
9. Install the clamp onto the cable bundle. DO NOT TIGHTEN THE CLAMP YET.

10. Mount the clamp to the Thorax chassis. Slide the clamp to the rear of the mounting screw slots.
11. Tighten the clamp around the cable bundle, ensuring that the cables are not pinched by the
clamp.
C
1 2
4 3
Item Description
1 DAP cable (optional for Optima XR200amx systems)
2 Wireless cable (only valid for Optima XR220amx systems)
3 Vertical brake cable
4 Horizontal arm lock cable
Figure 4-14 Correct cable bundle arrangement
12. Install the front bin, top cover and side covers.
13. Re-install the cable cover on the vertical column cable bundle. See the System manual,
Replacement Procedures chapter, Cable Cover Installation section.
14. Configure the system to enable the DAP meter option. See 4.2.7 Options configuration on
page 64.
15. Once the DAP meter option has been enabled, it must be ’switched on’ at the Applications
level:
a. On the Applications desktop, click the UTILITIES button.

b. On the Utilities desktop, select PREFERENCES > OPTIONS.
c. Turn the DAP function ON.
d. Refer to the system Operator Manual for instructions on DAP usage.

The system must be reset using the power button each time the DAP meter is disconnected and
then reconnected with system power on. The DAP meter does not support "Hot Swapping". Failure
to reset the system in this occurrence can result in an inaccurate dose value reported by the DAP
meter.
16. Perform DAP calibration. See the System Manual, Calibration Chapter, Hardware Calibration/
DAP Calibration section, for calibration procedure.
4.10.4 Installing the tablet holder assembly
When the tablet holder is on hand, contact a GE service representative to install the tablet holder
assembly.
2. Unpack the tablet holder assembly.
3. Remove the 4 screws on the lead apron hanger, and then remove the lead apron hanger from
the column.
4. Hang on the whole tablet holder assembly (item 2) on the column. Put the lead apron hanger
(item 3) on the tablet holder assembly in order to install the lead apron hanger and the tablet
holder assembly on the column. Apply thread locker (i.e. Loctite 243) to the 4 tablet holder
assembly mounting screws (item 1) and tighten the screws. Torque to 3.2 N-m (2.36 lbft).

Table 4-16 Installing the tablet holder assembly
Item Description
1 Tablet holder assembly mounting screws (4)
2 Tablet holder assembly
3 Lead apron hanger
5. Unlock the tablet clamp assembly with the key.
6. Lift up the top cover of the tablet holder clamp.

7. 7. Put the tablet on the tablet holder and make sure the tablet is clamped well.
After you turn the key to lock the clamp, please check the back of the tablet clamp assembly to make
sure the tablet is well fixed by the clamp without any possibility to fall down from the holder. (See
below figures)
8. Lock the tablet clamp assembly with the key and remove the key.
9. Tablet holder assembly functional check.

a. Tilt the tablet holder from 10° to -10°.

b. Rotate the tablet holder from 0° to 90°.
c. Pull the handle on the tablet holder assembly to relax it from the column.
d. Rotate the tablet holder arm around the column from 0° to 180°.

10. Hand over the keys to site administrator.
4.10.5 Installing the wireless exposure Handswitch
Contact a GE service representative to install the wireless handswitch.

Leave the wired handswitch on the system as a backup.
1. Remove both side covers and the top cover. See System manual 5336122-1EN, Chapter 8,
Section 8.1.2 - Top cover removal.
2. Identify the components of the kit shown below (Table 4-16, Figure 4-16, Figure 4-17):
Table 4-17 Wireless handswitch kit 5503600
Part Number Description

5503600: Wireless Handswitch kit, contains the following items:
Wireless Handswitch Collector (see Figure 4-16):
PCB Module (with cable)
5503601 Spare transmitter
Remote Finder/Transmitter
Cradle Receiver (with cable)
5486733 Receiver Mount (see Figure 4-17)
5497064 Self-tapping Screw, KA35 X 10mm, Phillips Pan Head (not

shown)
5497362 Drill Bit, 0.5 inch with 0.375 inch shank (not shown)
5497364 Drill Bit, #22 (not shown)
5498227-1EN Wireless Handswitch Installation Manual (this document)

46-302200P7 Rating Plate (not shown)

Figure 4-15 Wireless Handswitch Collector - 5503601
Figure 4-16 Receiver Mount
Section 4.11 Importing custom IP looks from Definium AMX

700
Use the following procedure to back up customized image processing (IP) looks from an Definium
AMX 700 system, and restore them on an Optima XR220amx system or Optima XR200amx with
digital upgrade.

1. Make a system backup on the Definium AMX 700 system.

2. On the Optima system, exit the SUIF if it is open.
3. Insert the Definium AMX 700 system backup CD into the external CD/DVD drive of the system.
4. Press CTRL + SHIFT + F5 to open the Engineering User Interface.
5. On the Engineering User Interface, press the TERMINAL icon.
6. At the command prompt, type:
mount /media/cdrecorder
Press ENTER.
cd /magichome/xruser/config/restore/
Press ENTER.
7. At the prompt, type:
chmod 777 restoreCustomIPLooks_F2toF3.sh
Press ENTER.
./restoreCustomIPLooks_F2toF3.sh
Press ENTER. The script takes approximately 20 minutes to run. When completed, the system
returns to the prompt.
umount /media/cdrecorder
Press ENTER.
10. Remove the Definium AMX 700 backup media from the CD/DVD drive and disconnect the
drive from the system.
11. Type exit to close the terminal window.
12. Exit the Engineering User Interface.
Section 4.12 Enabling Advanced Service mode

Advanced Service (sometimes called “in-house service” or “extended service”) is available to
customers that have purchased an Advanced Service package license from GE Healthcare.
Contact a GE service representative to enable Advanced Service.
Advanced Service provides the following functionality:

• SUIF in Advanced Service mode
• Detailed error descriptions in the Service Error Log Viewer
• Advanced diagnostics
• Extended error log with filtering
The following functionality is never included in an Advanced Service license:

• InSite ExC configuration
• Advanced service configuration or entitlement
• Purchased options configuration
14.
Note:
Page 92 Section 4.12 Enabling Advanced Service mode

Contact system administrator for user name and password.
Section 4.13 IP Address Change Procedure

The system uses IP Addresses 192.168.x.x for communication between the PC and the detectors.
If the hospital network to the PC is also 192.168.x.x, issues will occur. Perform the following
instructions to change the default internal IP Address if an IP Address conflict occurs with the
hospital network.
Note: To change IP address or configure the snapshot tool, you need the Account and Password
information, contact your administrator.
1. Plug in the Service Keyboard.

2. Open a terminal window using CTRL+SHIFT+F5 and click on the terminal window icon.
3. Change users by entering the account and password at the prompt:
Note:
Contact your administrator for the Account and Password information.
4. Run the Change IP script by entering the following text at the prompt:
/magichome/xruser/engg/changeIp.sh
5. Select 1 of the 5 options of subnet IP addresses. Write down the IP Address you select, you
will need this in a later step.
1. 172.16.x.x
2. 172.17.x.x
3. 172.18.x.x
4. 192.168.x.x (SW LFC default)
5. 192.169.x.x
6. The PC will reboot automatically, select SHUTDOWN when the system presents the Degraded
mode screen.
7. Login to system.
8. Open a terminal window and become root.
Note:
Contact your administrator for the Account and Password information.
xruser@magic:
Password:
At prompt, type: ifconfig | more
Confirm the br0 IP Address is XXX.XXX.3.1 (where XXX.XXX equals the address range
selected above).
9. To test network connectivity, perform a C-Echo test to one or more of the Network Hosts.
10. This step applies to Optima XR220amx or Optima XR200amx with Digital Upgrade only.
Verify that all connected detectors boot successfully. Verify that you can take an exposure on
all available receptors.
11. This step applies to Optima XR220amx or Optima XR200amx with Digital Upgrade only.
Verify the Detector Wireless connection is active by acquiring an image.

12. Perform the Snapshot Tool Configuration.
4.13.1 Snapshot Tool Configuration

To ensure that the Auto-Snapshot Tool works after changing the IP Address.
1. Open a terminal window using CTRL+SHIFT+F5 and click on the terminal window icon.
2. Switch to root by entering the Account and Password at the prompt:
Note:
Please consult your administrator for the Account and Password information.
3. Open Firefox Browser by typing the following command.
firefox http://localhost/snapshot/Manual_Snapshot.html
4. Click on SNAPSHOT PREFERENCES. See Figure 4-17.
Figure 4-17 Snapshot Preferences
5. Repeat Steps 6 through 17 (below) for the following four Configurations (available under the
drop-down menu):
* Asnapshot_Lightning
* ASnapshot_BKP
* Snapshot_ResetTimeOut
* QuickSnapshot
Page 94 Section 4.13 IP Address Change Procedure

6. In the Configuration drop-down menu, select ASNAPSHOT_LIGHTNING. See Figure 4-18.

Figure 4-18 Select Configuration

6. In Server Names section, click on EDIT. See Figure 4-19.

Figure 4-19 Edit Server Name - Magic
7. In the IP Address data entry text box, change 192.168.3.1 to “xxx.xxx.3.1” (where
xxx.xxx.3.1 is the same IP Address range used in Section 4.13 IP Address Change
Procedure and 3.1 is the specific address assignment for the host pc port). See Figure 4-
20.
Figure 4-20 Change IP Address

8. Click on SUBMIT. See Figure 4-21.

Figure 4-21 Submit New IP Address
9. Under Target Names - Magic, click EDIT. See Figure 4-22.

Figure 4-22 Edit Magic Target Name

10. In the IP Address data entry text box, change 192.168.3.1 to “xxx.xxx.3.1” (where
xxx.xxx.3.1 is the same IP Address range used in Section 4.13 IP Address Change
Procedure and 3.1 is the specific address assignment for the host pc port). See Figure 4-
23.
Figure 4-23 Edit Magic IP Address
11. Click on SUBMIT. See Figure 4-24.

Figure 4-24 Submit New Magic IP Address

12. Back on Snapshot Preferences main screen, click on Target Names – Table_IDC –
DELETE. See Figure 4-25.
Figure 4-25 Delete Target Name “Table_IDC”
13. You will get a popup like below, select OK. See Figure 4-26.
Figure 4-26 Table_IDC Popup Message

14. Under Target Names – WallStand_IDC click on DELETE. See Figure 4-27.
Figure 4-27 Delete Target Name “WallStand_IDC”
15. You will get a popup like below, select OK. See Figure 4-28.
Figure 4-28 WallStand_IDC Popup Message

16. Under Manage Preferences section, click on SAVE AS.... See Figure 4-29.
Figure 4-29 Save Changes
17. Go to Step 5 until all four configurations are completed.

18. Press CTRL+F4 at the same time to close the html interface.
19. Success Check Steps:
If everything is fine you should be able to see Auto Snapshots getting generated after
reset:
a. Perform a system reset.
b. After system is booted up, login and wait for 5 minutes.
(Snapshot is being created in a temp location)
c. While you are waiting, open a terminal window using CTRL+SHIFT+F5 and click
on the terminal window icon.
d. Run following command:
ls –ltr /enggdata/Snapshots/*3400017*.zip
e. Note the date/time stamp of the most recently created file.
f. After 5 minutes reset and reboot the system, login.
(Snapshot from temp location is written to Snapshots directory and a new
snapshot is being created in a temp location)
g. Open a terminal window using CTRL+SHIFT+F5 and click on the terminal
window icon.
h. Run following command:
ls –ltr /enggdata/Snapshots/*3400017*.zip
i. The output of (c) above should show a snapshot file, having the string 3400017
embedded in the snapshot filename, created after the most recent system boot
(in Step b above).
j. Type date to see the current system time.
The latest snapshot file should have been created a few minutes before the date
command output.
k. Verify the file size is greater than 400,000:
-rw–rw-r- - 1 xruser xruser file size date time /path/filename
20. Close all windows.
21. Complete all system configurations and customer settings.
22. Create a new System Backup on DVD media.
Note: Do not use backup media from any other system. The result will be that half of the
system is configured for 172.x.x.x and other half is configured for 192.x.x.x
The system will then boot into Degraded Mode only.
Also, when performing a Software Load, you must perform this procedure first before
doing a System Restore.

Section 4.14
SVC TOOLS: NO SPECIAL TOOL TO BE REQUIRED
4.14.1 Required conditions

Check the system configuration and software OS version firstly before to start the following steps.
Do NOT execute following steps until you have confirmed the following system configuration and
software OS version.
1. System configuration: Optima XR220amx system configuration check by product model, this
can be gotten from system rating plate. This service instruction is only applicable to 5555000-
5, 5555000-6, 5555000-12, 5555000-25 and 5555000-26.
2. Software OS Version: cselx 2.0 (x86_64). This OS Version can be obtained from
Miscellaneous of SUIF home page as below.
Page 102 Section 4.14

4.14.2 Procedure
1. Follow all proper Safety and Lock-Out/Tag-Out (LOTO) Procedures by referring to the Optima
XR220amx SYSTEM MANUAL (DIRECTION 5336122-1EN) Chapter 1 Safety / Before You
Begin.
2. ALL GEHC Service EHS requirements must be followed while at the Customer Site (e.g. safety
shoes, safety glasses, hand protection, etc.)
3. Always follow ALARA and GEHC radiation protection procedures when generating x-rays.
4.14.2.1 BACKING UP SYSTEM DATA

This section describes the process to save system files, this ensures a valid backup available if the
system software ever needs to be reloaded or upgraded.
You will need the external CD/DVD drive and a blank media disk (DVD-R format).
The backup takes about ten minutes to complete, but depends upon the amount of data that must
be saved.

During a system backup, the following data is saved:

• Calibration files
• Configuration files
However, the following data is not saved by system backup:
SYSTEM PROTOCOL DATABASE

It is recommended to back up the protocol database, unless you confirm that no changes have been
made to the default values. Default values are always loaded during a software installation. The
default protocol database is included with each shipped system. See the Optima XR220amx
Operator Manual for instructions on saving the protocol database.
DOSE REPORT DATA

See Optima XR220amx Operator Manual for instructions on exporting this report, where applicable.
4.14.2.1.1 Perform a System backup

1. Insert a service key in one of the left USB interfaces of PC.
2. Turn on the system and log in with user name “insite” and password “2getin”.
4. On the Utilities desktop, press the Service LAUNCH button.
5. On the SUIF Service Home tab, select the UTILITIES tab.
7. Press the BACKUP link.
8. Select the backup media by selecting CD/DVD.
9. Connect the external CD/DVD drive to the USB ports (2 USB port connections required) and
insert supported media (DVD –R).
10. Press START.
11. The status bar displays a series of messages: "BACKUP in PROGRESS". The backup takes
about ten minutes, after which the right frame displays "BACKUP SUCCESS."
12. Exit the SUIF and back to the home page of the application.
13. Remove backup DVD from external CD/DVD drive.

4.14.2.2 Update the Apache configuration file for Optima XR220amx

(SuseOS) products for Federal Government Sites only
4.14.2.2.1 Get into Apache2 directory by Engineering UI

1. Press CTRL + SHIFT + F5” together. Enter and access Engineering UI as below.
2. Click “monitor” button and enter below interface.
3. Type user name and password to be the “root” user.

Note:
Contact system administrator for user name and password.
4. Type the command cd /etc/apache2/ to get into Apache2 directory.

4.14.2.2.2 Bake up the script “listen.conf”

1. Type the command cp listen.conf listen.conf.bak to back up listen.conf as below.
4.14.2.2.3 Edit the script “listen.conf”

1. Type the command vi listen.conf and click Enter. Then open listen.conf as below:
2. With typing /*:80 and clicking ENTER, you can locate to the line Listen *:80 as below:

3. Click i button and then change the line from Listen *:80 to Listen 127.0.0.1:80 as below:
4. Then click ESC and type the command :wq! to quit “listen.conf”.
5. Type the command exit to quit from root user. Then type the command exit again to quit from
Engineering UI.
6. Turn off the system.
4.14.2.2.4 Verify the Apache configuration change is in place

1. Press CTRL + SHIFT + F5 together. Enter and access Engineering UI as below.
2. Click monitor button and enter below interface.

3. After type user name and password to be the root user, type the command netstat -antlp |
grep -i “http”. Then you can get the verify screen as below.
4. Check the updated content is the same with the content marked with blue circle as above. But
the 3138 value may be different and you can ignore the difference because it is up to the
operation process.
5. Type the command exit to quit from root user. Then type the command exit again to quit from
Engineering UI as below:
6. Click log out button to back Application screen for functional check.
4.14.2.3 Functional check

1. Launch SUIF. Click all the Tabs in SUIF to verify whether you can access their sub_screens
by the Tabs.

Note: If the SUIF cannot work, restore the listen.conf with listen.conf.bak manually by typing the
following command in bold which is similar to Section 2 Bake up the script listen.conf.
cp listen.conf.bak listen.conf
And then perform all of procedures required 4.14.2.2 Update the Apache configuration file for
Optima XR220amx (SuseOS) products for Federal Government Sites only and 4.14.2.3 Functional
check.
2. Perform below functional check as below:
Time
Component Procedure
Estimated
Radiation Hazard
Unit must be in a location where X-rays can be made safely.
• Close collimator blades and move tube arm to its lowest

X-Ray position. 3 min
• Select lowest kVp and mAs settings.
• Pressing the X-ray hand switch button to the first position
causes the tube anode to rotate.
• Pressing the X-ray hand switch button to the second position
makes an exposure. The X- ray tone sounds and X ray On
indicator lights.


Chapter 5 Calibration
Section 5.1 Preparing for calibrations

This chapter explains how to calibrate the detector, printer, touchscreen, drive subsystem, and
elements of the generator. It also covers how to determine the appropriate burn configuration for
PACS images.
FOLLOW PROCEDURES
Important! Perform the calibrations in the order shown in the left frame of the Calibration screen
on the Service User Interface (SUIF).
While working in the SUIF, watch the status bar and wait for activities to complete before starting
the next step. Look for messages like "Ready..." or "Ready for input."
5.1.1 Saving changes

After changing, creating, or restoring calibration files, be sure to reboot the system so that the
application software can detect the file changes.
After completing the steps in this chapter, save the changes by performing a system backup. See
Chapter 3 System data and software in the Optima XR200amx/XR220amx System Manual for
the backup procedure.
Section 5.2 Touchscreen calibration

5.2.1 Calibrating the touchscreen
Follow this procedure to set the active area of the touchscreen and align it to the underlying video
application to ensure accurate measurement.

3. On the SUIF home page, press the CALIBRATION tab button.
4. On the Calibration page, in the left folder tree, select TOUCHSCREEN.
5. Press START and follow the on-screen instructions.
6. The touchscreen calibration utility prompts you to touch a cross-hair icon in a series of nine
locations. Afterward, you can press ACCEPT to write the settings to the calibration config file,
or CANCEL to discard the settings.
When the cross-hair appears, you have 10 seconds to respond. A countdown timer is
displayed. If you do not respond within 10 seconds, the calibration is aborted.
Chapter 5 Calibration Page 111

After you touch all the calibration points, you have 90 seconds to verify pointer accuracy before
accepting the changes. A countdown timer is displayed. If you do not respond within 90
seconds, calibration is aborted.
Important! If the program aborts or you press CANCEL, the utility does not revert to the prior
calibration; the touchscreen calibration is lost. The touchscreen accuracy may be very poor
and require some effort to restart the calibration from the SUIF.
7. Press ACCEPT to write the settings to the calibration config file, or CANCEL to discard the
settings.
8. Click on HARDWARE CALIBRATION and perform the TOUCHSCREEN CALIBRATION at the
hardware level. See. Section 5.2 Touchscreen calibration on page 111.
Section 5.3 Generator calibration

5.3.1 Setting filament drive level
EXPOSURE TO RADIATION
Employ X-ray safety practices to minimize exposure to radiation. Use portable shields or lead
aprons. Aim the tube away from personnel. Adjust both lateral and transverse collimator blades to
the minimum field size setting.
NO DETECTOR IN BEAM DURING CALIBRATION

Make sure there is no digital detector in the X-ray field at any time during this calibration.
This procedure automatically sets the initial filament drive levels for each X-ray tube focal spot.

4. On the Calibration page, in the left folder tree, select GENERATOR > FILAMENT DRIVE.
The process is a sequence of 24 exposures: 9 for the small filament and 15 for the large. The
system automatically sets the technique and selects the focal spot.
Use the handswitch to initiate the prep and expose sequence. The handswitch must be fully
released after each exposure.
A display updates the completion status for each of the 24 exposures.
After completing exposure 24, press COMPLETE to finalize the calibration.
5.3.2 Viewing and resetting tube and generator usage data

Use this procedure to display and store tube usage data that can be accessed to determine
warranty coverage. Reset the data after replacing a tube.
Page 112 Section 5.3 Generator calibration

Note: It is recommended that you record the current values prior to making any changes.

The Service Home tab is displayed. The Home tab contains summary information including
site identification, connectivity parameters, and enabled options.
3. Press the CALIBRATION tab button.
4. On the Calibration page, in the left folder tree, select GENERATOR > TUBE WARRANTY.
5. Select RESET and follow the on-screen instructions.
6. Exit the SUIF and launch it again to see the reset values.
Section 5.4 Detector calibration

Detector calibrations apply only to Optima XR220amx or Optima XR200amx with digital upgrade
systems.
For system operation, detector calibrations are not normally required as the detector contains a set
of calibration files. Calibrations should only be performed if image quality issues warrant updating
bad pixel maps and/or gain calibration files.
IMAGE QUALITY AFFECTED

Detector calibrations must be performed using the tether. Failure to use this process can
result in calibration failures and/or image quality issues.
5.4.1 Executing bad pixel and gain calibrations

Use the Bad Pixel Calibration tool to detect defective pixels. Then use the Gain Calibration Tool to
calibrate a gain coefficient for each pixel to achieve uniform gain across the detector. Perform these
two calibrations in sequence.
Note: DO NOT change the exposure techniques for these calibrations. They are automatically set by the
calibration software and are required for proper calibration.
5.4.1.1 Bad pixel calibration

This procedure calculates defective pixels from dark and X-ray images.
The detector must be connected via tether and stabilized for a minimum of 10 minutes. The 10
minute counter starts when the calibration is initiated.
Be sure that the correct firmware is downloaded to the detector before proceeding.
Bad pixel calibration is a multi-step process, including a QC test exposure and four additional
exposures. The generator technique for each exposure is set automatically by the system.

aprons. Aim the tube away from personnel.
1. Install the flat field phantom from the front of the collimator into the collimator rails as shown in
Figure 5-1.
Figure 5-1 Flat field phantom

5. On the Calibration page, in the left folder tree, select DETECTOR > BAD PIXEL.
Press and hold the Prep/Expose handswitch to make the exposures as directed. The
handswitch must be released after each exposure. The X-ray tube must be positioned at
120cm SID, full FOV, beam centered on the detector.
5.4.1.2 Gain calibration

The bad pixel calibration (see 5.4.1.1 Bad pixel calibration on page 113) must be performed before
starting the gain calibration.
This set of three calibration procedures (one each for 60, 80, and 120 kVp) creates gain maps used
to compensate for gain non-uniformities. The flat field phantom is used only for the 80 and 120 kVp
techniques. The X-ray tube must be positioned at 120 cm SID, full FOV, beam centered on the
detector for this calibration.
Page 114 Section 5.4 Detector calibration

aprons. Aim the tube away from personnel.
1. On the Calibration page, in the left folder tree, select DETECTOR > GAIN.
2. Remove the flat field phantom from the collimator rails.
3. Select 60 KVP MAX DOSE.
5. Insert the phantom into the collimator rails.
6. Select 80 KVP MAX DOSE and 120 KVP MAX DOSE.
a. On the entry page, choose one of the kV techniques, then select START to begin the
calibration (or CANCEL to abort).
b. Each process begins with a QC exposure to check for setup and alignment errors,
followed by a sequence of 10 exposures. The generator technique for each exposure is
set automatically by the system.
c. Press and hold the Prep/Expose handswitch to make the exposures. Release the
handswitch after each exposure. An exposure inhibit symbol appears in the status bar
until the system is ready for the next exposure.
d. After the last exposure, calculations are performed and the message "Calibration
completed successfully" appears, along with instructions to select CANCEL to
abort calibration or COMPLETE to save gain calibration data.
e. After each kV technique, the program returns to the calibration summary page. Re-open
the gain calibration page to verify that the date and pass/fail result for the calibration were
properly updated, then continue by selecting the next technique and starting the
calibration.
8. Reset the system after calibrations are completed.
9. Use the QAP tool to evaluate image quality and verify that it passes. Refer to the Installation
Manual, Chapter 6 - Detector checks and QAP.
Section 5.5 Image quality calibration

Image quality calibrations apply only to Optima XR220amx or Optima XR200amx with digital
upgrade systems.
5.5.1 Calibrating the printer

Follow this procedure to send grayscale output to the printer and to calculate compensation LUT
(look up table) for compatibility.



4. On the Calibration page, in the left folder tree, select IMAGE QUALITY > PRINTER.
5. Press the CALIBRATION icon.
6. In the left frame, select IMAGE QUALITY > PRINTER.
7. Select the correct printer from the Printer Label drop-down list.
Section 5.6 Hardware calibration

5.6.1 Drive handle calibration
Follow this procedure to calibrate the drive handle and ensure accurate movement and steering.

4. On the Calibration page, in the left folder tree, select HARDWARE CALIBRATION > DRIVE
HANDLE.
5.6.2 Touch screen calibration

Follow this procedure to calibrate the touch screen. This calibration is needed for when the Spyder
board has control of the display due to switch display functionality. This calibration is in addition to
the SW touch screen calibration also found in the SUIF.

4. On the Calibration page, in the left folder tree, select HARDWARE CALIBRATION > TOUCH
SCREEN.
5.6.3 DAP calibration
5.6.3.1 Personnel Requirements

- Required persons: 1
- Timing (min): 30
5.6.3.2 Preliminary requirements
5.6.3.2.1 Tools and test equipment

- Dose meter with mR or uGy measurement units.
Page 116 Section 5.6 Hardware calibration

5.6.3.2.2 Consumables
- None
5.6.3.2.3 Safety
- Appropriate ionizing radiation PPE
5.6.3.2.4 Required Conditions

- DAP meter is connected.
- DAP meter is enabled in software.
- No DAP related errors in the system error log.
- DAP temperature stabilized to the operating environment.
- Wait 5 minutes after the DAP is connected and energized per the OEM for internal
stabilization before calibration or clinical use.
5.6.3.3 Preface
The purpose of this calibration is to modify the correction factor stored in the DAP device. The DAP
response is dependent upon temperature and atmospheric pressure.
A correction factor of 1 (no correction) is specified by the OEM of sea level elevation @ 20°C (68°F).
The DAP Calibration correction factor (CF) is stored in the DAP itself and not on the system. For
this reason adhere to the following;
- Do not press COMMIT if you are exploring, entering random numbers and making
exposures. This loads interim CF values into the DAP. Assume this value to be bad. By
pressing CANCEL the original DAP resident CF value will be restored.
- Do not return the system to clinical use if the system shuts down in the middle of this
calibration. The DAP will contain an interim CF value. Assume this value to be bad.
Restore the system to proper working order and perform this calibration procedure. Make
sure you press COMMIT to save the correct and valid CF value.
- A result of PASS is presented when the test meter and the DAP reported values have less
than a 10% error.
* At this point you can select COMMIT and the calibration is complete, or you can select
CONTINUE and repeat in the attempt to reduce the PASS Error percentage. Do not
expect to achieve a 0% error result. It is possible but not probable due to the variables
of the X-ray beam and measurement devices.
5.6.3.4 Procedure
Prior to launching the DAP Calibration utility in the SUIF service interface the following set-up
conditions must be followed.
Do not deviate from this instruction or randomly enter values into the DAP calibration utility. Failure
to follow this instruction can result in grossly inaccurate Dose Value reporting during clinical system
usage.
1. Place the imaging receptor on a platform at least 25 cm (10 in) above the floor to reduce back
scatter. The imaging receptor should be parallel to the floor.
2. Make an exposure with the following parameters;

a. FOV = 10 cm x 10 cm (centered on imaging receptor)

b. SID = 100 cm
c. kV = 70
d. mAs = 100
3. Develop the image as necessary and make measurements accurately recording the FOV X
and Y values (length and width)s
a. For systems with a digital detector use the Image review measure distance tools.
b. For all other imaging media make accurate manual measurements per OEM
recommendations.
c. The acceptable FOV range is as follows;
* X = 80 mm to 120 mm
* Y = 80 mm to 120 mm
d. Make and record these measurements in millimeters. The DAP calibration utility will
accept only metric values.
4. Replace the imaging receptor with the Dose meter probe.
a. Using the field light, place the probe in the center of the FOV at the same plane as the
imaging receptor.
Do not disturb the SID from this point on. Failure to follow this instruction can result in grossly
inaccurate Dose Value reporting during clinical system usage.
5. Launch the DAP calibration utility as follows;
a. On the Applications desktop, press the UTILITIES button.

b. On the Utilities desktop press the Service LAUNCH button.
c. On the SUIF home page press the CALIBRATION tab button.
d. On the calibration page, in the left folder tree, press HARDWARE CALIBRATION.
e. In the left navigation frame press HARDWARE and select DAP CALIBRATION.
6. Follow the On-Screen instructions.
Notes:
- Only valid X and Y values entered in millimeters will be accepted.
- Configure your dose meter to measure in either milli-Roentgen (mR) or micro-Grays
(uGy).
- Select the appropriate unit of measure in the DAP calibration utility and enter the
measured value when prompted.
* A test meter dose reading of approximately 230mR is typical. However, it is
dependent upon the actual FOV, SID, KV, mAs.
* The system will present results in uGy units.
Section 5.7 PACS image tests

PACS image tests apply only to Optima XR220amx or Optima XR200amx with digital upgrade
systems.
Page 118 Section 5.7 PACS image tests

Follow these procedures to test image display characteristics and determine the burn configuration
for PACS images for each destination host.
5.7.1 Comparing PACS test images

In the following tests, use the nine PACS test images to test image display characteristics and
determine image display configuration.
Each PACS test image consists of two aspects:
• On the right, a clinical chest image with image number and GE logo watermark (Figure 5-2).
• On the left, a series of 12 vertical bands. The top six bands are dark and the bottom six are
bright.
Inside each band are five small squares with different intensities (like the 5%/95% squares in
a SMPTE pattern). The squares provide a quantitative way to compare two images.
The pixel data in every test image is identical. Only the DICOM headers, annotations, and window
center (WC) and window width (WW) values are slightly different for each pattern.
Figure 5-2 PACS/image display test image
5.7.2 Determining PACS burn/no-burn configuration
5.7.2.1 Verifying PACS monitor calibration

1. Verify that the PACS monitor is calibrated according to DICOM Standard Part 14. Each site is
responsible for providing evidence of PACS monitor calibration.
2. At the application desktop, press IMAGE TOOLS.
3. Click SMPTE to load the SMPTE pattern into the Patient List.
4. Send the SMPTE pattern to the PACS review workstation
5. Verify that 5% and 95% squares are equally visible on PACS (Figure 5-3).

Figure 5-3 SMPTE pattern
5.7.2.2 Loading test images

1. Load the PACS test images onto the acquisition workstation. Use either:
- A DICOM-formatted CD-ROM with images.
- Images that are stored on the system in Image Tools.
2. Verify that the patient name is GE_DX_Image_Display_Test, GEHC and the patient ID is
2000002.
5.7.2.3 Sending no-burn images to the PACS

1. In the SUIF, press the UTILITIES tab button.
2. Next to Network Connections, press EDIT.
3. Select the appropriate network host and press EDIT.
4. On the Preferences tab, verify that the following parameter is NOT checked:
Apply Burn-on-Send to images when sending to this network host.
5. In the Images list, highlight PACS Test Image #1.
6. In the Destination icon list, press the appropriate PACS network host.
5.7.2.4 Sending burn-on-send images to the PACS

1. In the SUIF, press the UTILITIES tab button.
2. Next to Network Connections, press EDIT.
3. Select the appropriate network host and press EDIT.

4. On the Preferences tab, check Apply Burn-on-Send to images when sending to

this network host.
5. In the Images list, highlight PACS Test Image #6.
6. In the Destination icon list, press the appropriate PACS network host.
5.7.2.5 Reviewing images on PACS

1. On the PACS review workstation, display PACS test images #1 and #6. To identify an image,
look in the chest image region for the watermark image number next to the GE logo.
2. Verify that image #1 is displayed with a Value-of-Interest Look-Up Table (VOI-LUT).
3. Verify that image #6 is displayed with a Linear Look-Up Table (Linear LUT).
4. Compare PACS Test Images #1 and #6 and note the following items:
a. The number of distinct bright and dark bands (based on the band intensity)
b. The number of squares visible in each band
Count bands that have distinct gray levels, not simply the number of bands with visible
squares. For example, in Figure 5-4, there are two squares in band #4, three squares in
band #5, and three squares in band #11. There are three distinct dark bands and six
distinct bright bands. This is because the top three dark bands are indistinguishable.
Figure 5-4 Example showing distinct bands and visible squares
- If PACS test images #1 and #6 appear visually identical (with an equal number of bright
and dark bands), the PACS supports VOI-LUT. Configure the PACS as No-Burn for this
host.
- If PACS Test Images #1 and #6 appear visually different (with a different number of bright
and dark bands), or if you can see saturation in the lung or abdomen of the chest region
(saturation appears as a completely flat dark or white area), the PACS does not support
VOI-LUT or applies it incorrectly. Configure the PACS as Burn-on-Send for this host.
5. Repeat sections 5.7.2.3 Sending no-burn images to the PACS and 5.7.2.4 Sending burn-on-
send images to the PACS for each PACS destination host.
6. Record the results in the table below.
Example Test 1 Test 2 Test 3 Test 4 Test 5 Test 6 Test 7

Distinct dark
3
bands
1 0
2 0

Example Test 1 Test 2 Test 3 Test 4 Test 5 Test 6 Test 7

3 0
4 2
5 3
6 4
7 5
8 4
9 4
10 3
11 3
12 0
Distinct bright
6
bands
Table 5-1 PACS image test results
In addition to the test results above, use Table 5-2 as a guideline to determine if a PACS should be
configured as Burn-on-Send. This table considers only whether a PACS supports VOI-LUT
No-Burn Burn-on-Send
GE Centricity RA1000 v1.0, v2.0, v2.1 GE Pathspeed v7.12, 8.0
GE Centricity RA600 v6.1, 7.0 GE AW v3.1, 4.0
GE Radworks v5.1 Kodak DirectView v4.3
GE Pathspeed v8.1 or later Kodak DirectView v5.1, 5.2
McKesson HRS v3.3, 3.3.2 Kodak Directview(CEMAX ICON), v4.3
Fuji Synapse v3.0, 3.1 Merge eFilm, v2.0
Agfa IMPAX v4.5, 5.2 Stentor iSite v3.0, v3.3.1
Philips Siemens Magic View 300
RealTime iPACS Viewer v5.0 VA Vista
- Picker
- Neusoft v3.0
- Thinking Systems
Table 5-2 PACS support of VOI-LUT
5.7.3 Optional PACS tests

Perform the following tests to obtain further information for troubleshooting.
5.7.3.1 Sending all PACS test images

1. Send all nine images to PACS and follow the test instructions in Table 5-3:
- Send images #1-5 as No-Burn
- Send images #6-8 as Burn-on-Send

2. If the site is interested in exploring CR-Fallback as an option, configure the PACS for CR-
fallback with help from the local IT team. Then send image #9 as No-Burn.
Image # Platform Send Annotation notes

1 All No-Burn None Test No-Burn mode
2 All No-Burn None Identical to #1
3 All No-Burn None Identical to #1
4 All No-Burn Text Test annotations
5 All No-Burn L Test annotations
6 All Burn-on-Send None Test Burn-on-Send mode
7 All Burn-on-Send Text Test annotations
8 All Burn-on-Send L Test annotations
9 All No-Burn None Test TEXT? CR-Fallback
Table 5-3 Test instructions for all PACS images
5.7.3.2 Verifying DICOM header tags

1. On the PACS review workstation, open PACS test image #1 (Patient ID 2000002).
2. Access the DICOM header information through a drop-down list, a button, or by right-clicking
the image and then selecting an option such as “information,” “i,” or “header.” For help, contact
local IT support.
3. Verify Burn-on-Send mode by verifying that:
a. The WC tag is 0028x1050 and the WW tag is 0028x1051
b. The values are WC=5226\5226\5226 and WW=2654\1990\3981
4. Verify VOI-LUT tags as follows:
a. Search the DICOM header for tag 0028x3010VOILUTSequence.
b. Below that tag, verify that there are three additional tags:
* 0028x3002LUTDescriptor
* 0028x3003LUTExplanation
* 0028x3006LUTData
c. Verify that each VOILUTSequence has a LUTExplanation set to either Normal, Harder,
or Softer.
5. Record the results in Table 5-4.
6. Open PACS test image #6 and view the DICOM header.
7. Verify No-Burn mode by ensuring that:
a. The WC tag is 0028x1050 and the WW tag is 0028x1051
b. The values are WC=8192\8192\8192 and WW=16383\12288\24575
8. Verify VOI-LUT tags as follows:
a. Search the DICOM header for tag 0028x3010VOILUTSequence.
b. No VOILUTSequence tag should be present. If a VOILUTSequence is present, the image
was not sent correctly. Resend the image as Burn-on-Send.

5.7.3.3 Verifying WC and WW values
No-Burn Mode (PACS Test Image #1)

The DICOM header of each PACS Test Image is always sent with WC/WW=5226/2654. The values
displayed on the PACS may appear differently. This is acceptable according to DICOM standards.
The values can show up as 8192/16384, 5226/2654, or something else. The most common and
preferred implementation is to show values of 8192/16384 on the PACS.
1. Open PACS test image #1.
2. Verify that the WC/WW values are 8192/16384.
If the values do not appear as 8192/16384, check that the VOI-LUT is enabled on the PACS.
The VOI-LUT often can be enabled with a drop-down list on the image or through hanging
protocols.
Note: This does not indicate that the PACS does not support VOI-LUTs. Support for VOI-LUTs
is strictly determined by the visual appearance of PACS test images #1 and #6.
3. Record the results in Table 5-4 (see 5.7.4 PACS image comparison results on page 125).
Burn-on-Send Mode (PACS Test Image #6)

2. Verify that the WC/WW values are 8192/16384.
If the values do not appear as 8192/16384, check that the VOI-LUT is enabled on the PACS.
The VOI-LUT often can be enabled with a drop-down list on the image or through hanging
protocols.
3. Record the results in Table 5-4 (see 5.7.4 PACS image comparison results on page 125).
5.7.3.4 Checking for image saturation

2. Check that the clinical chest area appears with no saturation in the lung or abdomen region.
5.7.3.5 Testing reduced dynamic range with Burn-on-Send

The Burn-on-Send configuration causes a reduced dynamic range in the image if you change the
window level of the image on the PACS.
2. Change the window level on the PACS to attempt to see the five squares in all twelve bands.
Start by changing the WC value to 0 and the WW value to 500 (the appropriate values may
vary among different PACS workstations).
The loss of dynamic range is most common in the top dark band. If reduced dynamic range
occurs, the five squares will not be visible in the top dark band (band #1).

5.7.4 PACS image comparison results

Use the values in Table 5-4 to quantitatively compare images. For example, to determine if a PACS
supports GE VOI-LUTs, compare PACS test images #1 and #6. If the number of distinct bands and
visible squares are equal, then the PACS correctly supports VOI-LUTs.
Tests Results
WC = __________
DICOM header on PACS (image #1 No-Burn) WW = __________
VOI-LUT (Yes/No)
WC = __________
DICOM header on PACS (image #6 Burn-on-Send) WW = __________
VOI-LUT (Yes/No)
WC = __________
Values displayed on PACS viewer (image #1)
WW = __________
WC = __________
Values displayed on PACS viewer (image #6)
WW = __________
Saturation visible in lung or abdomen region
Able to see all five squares in top band of image #6
Able to see all five squares in top band of image #1
Images #1, 4, 5 appear visually identical
Images #6, 7, 8 appear visually identical
PACS able to select Normal/Harder/Softer
VOI-LUT not present;
DICOM header on PACS (image #9 CR-Fallback).
correct WW/WC
Table 5-4 PACS image comparison results


Chapter 6 Mechanical adjustment procedures
THE POTENTIAL FOR INJURY OR DEATH FROM ELECTRICAL AND

HAZARDS MECHANICAL HAZARDS IS HIGH. CAREFULLY READ AND FOLLOW
EXIST INSTRUCTIONS. ALWAYS LOTO THE SYSTEM BEFORE ATTEMPTING
SERVICE OF ANY KIND, AS DESCRIBED IN Chapter 1 Safety / Before You Begin.
Section 6.1 Column related assemblies

6.1.1 Column balance procedure
6.1.1.1 Personnel requirements

Required persons: 1
Timing (min): 20

• Loctite 242 (GE part# 46-170686P2) or equivalent
6.1.1.2.3 Replacement parts

• None
6.1.1.2.4 Safety
• None
6.1.1.2.5 Required conditions

• None
Chapter 6 Mechanical adjustment procedures Page 127

6.1.1.3 Procedure
1. Remove the apron hanger bracket from the vertical column. See Figure 6-1.
Item Description
1 Apron hanger bracket
Figure 6-1 Apron hanger bracket
2. You now can see the top of the compressed spring assembly (see Figure 6-2). There is up to
1.5 inches of adjustment before the tool insertion becomes un-usable.
Note: The column comes pre-adjusted such that the fine adjustment range falls within the physical
adjustment opening in the column (see Figure 6-2, Item 2). Do not attempt to adjust the spring
tension if the tool does not engage in the adjustment holes easily.
1
2
Item Description
1 Counterbalance adjustment holes
2 Physical adjustment opening in the column
Figure 6-2 Vertical counterbalance adjustment
Page 128 Section 6.1 Column related assemblies

3. Raise the tube arm to approximately 2.5 cm (1 in) from the top of the column. This reduces
spring tension, allowing easier adjustment.
4. Using a 4 mm hex key inserted into the adjustment holes (see Figure 6-2), you can adjust the
spring tension for up to 5 lbs of balance force.
5. Rotating the assembly clockwise reduces the tension on the spring resulting in less buoyancy
of the arm.
6. Rotating the assembly counter-clockwise increases the tension on the spring resulting in more
buoyancy of the arm.
7. Adjust the spring tension such that 80% of the main travel is stable. 10% at the lowest tube
position and 10% of the highest tube position should have minimal to no movement when the
brakes are engaged.
8. Apply thread locker (i.e. Loctite 242 [blue]) to the apron hanger bracket screws. Install the
bracket and tighten the screws.

6.1.2 Tube latch to arm pin adjustment procedure

Required persons: 1
Timing (min): 20

• None

• None
6.1.2.2.4 Safety
• None

• None
6.1.2.3 Procedure
Note: The tube latch assembly mounted to the main body of the mobile unit (called the Thorax assembly)
has minimal to no adjustment capability. Therefore, the adjustments must be performed relative to
the tube latch pin arm mounting assembly. There is up to 13 mm of adjustment capability for smooth
and reliable engagement of the tube latch assembly.

1. Ensure the tube latch assembly is properly secured to the Thorax. See Figure 6-3.
Item Description
1 Tube latch assembly
Figure 6-3 Tube latch assembly on Thorax
2. Adjust the screw tension of the tube latch pin assembly on the horizontal arm (see Figure 6-4)
such that it is snug but can be moved forward/backward with slight effort.
3. Make sure the arm is fully retracted/compressed.

Item Description
1 Tube latch pin assembly
Figure 6-4 Tube latch pin assembly
4. Lower the horizontal arm so that it engages with the Thorax tube latch assembly. Manually
slide the tube latch pin assembly to facilitate the engagement.
5. Manually release the Thorax side of the tube latch such that the horizontal arm side of the pin
assembly is not disturbed.
6. Carefully torque fasteners of the tube latch pin assembly to 8.1 N-m (6 lb-ft) - no thread locker
is used. See Figure 6-4.
7. Raise and lower the horizontal arm such that the arm latching feature can be engaged and
disengaged several times to ensure smooth and reliable functionality.

6.1.3 Column rotational detent procedure

Required persons: 1
Timing (min): 20

• None

• None
6.1.3.2.4 Safety
• None

• None
6.1.3.3 Procedure
1. Ensure the tube latch to arm pin adjustment procedure has been completed (see 6.1.2 Tube
latch to arm pin adjustment procedure on page 130).
2. Disengage the tube latch and raised the tube slightly above the tube latch.
3. Using the collimator left/right lock switch buttons, rotate the column such that you feel the
column rotation detent setting.
4. Release the collimator lock switches when the column rotational lock detent is felt.
5. Lower the tube to engage the tube latch assembly.
If the alignment is not correct, proceed with the following steps.

Column rotation detent adjustment

1. Remove the left side cover and left front cover. See 9.1.5 Front cover removal on page 240.
2. Locate the column detent eccentric adustment (Item 1) as shown in Figure 6-5. A 6mm Allen
wrench or adapter (for ratchet) is required for the adjustment.
IItem Description
1 Column detent eccentric adjustment
Figure 6-5 Column detent eccentric adjustment
3. Locate the column detent lock nut (Figure 6-6, Item 1) at the bottom of the column (under-side
of the chassis). While holding the eccentric adjustment from the top, loosen the detent lock
nut with a 3/4" wrench or socket.

IItem Description
1 Column detent lock nut
Figure 6-6 Column detent lock nut
4. The detent is adjusted through the use of an eccentric, using a 6 mm Allen wrench. Rotate the
eccentric to adjust the left-to-right positioning of the tube latch pin (located on bottom of the
horizontal arm) such that it squarely aligns with the tube latch assembly (located on top of the
Thorax). See Figure 6-7.

IItem Description
1 Tube latch assembly
2 Tube latch pin
Figure 6-7 Column detent latch alignment
5. While holding the eccentric adjustment in position to prevent movement, torque the 3/4"
column detent lock nut to 18N-m (13.3 lb-ft).
6. Using the collimator left/right lock switches to disengage the locks, rotate the column left and
right such that it stops in the detent and then verify the tube latch mechanism engages
smoothly and reliably from both clockwise and counterclockwise rotational directions. Re-
adjust as necessary.
7. Install the front and side covers.

Chapter 7 Regulatory testing

When instructed to do so during installation, planned maintenance, or repair procedures, complete
the tests in this chapter to meet U.S. federal regulatory compliance requirements and to ensure that
X-rays are generated properly.
Section 7.1 U.S. federally required tests

Note: Important! The regulatory tests described in this section are required by the United States Health
and Human Services (HHS) Department for U.S. installations. US-only or as required by local
regulations.
7.1.1 Required test equipment

Gather the test equipment, tools, and materials listed below. Record the serial number and
calibration due date, if applicable. Also record the manufacturer if not specified below.
• HHS test kit (GE 46-303879G1, 46-315694G1)
• Oscilloscope
• Radiation meter with integrate mode
• Probe test stand
• Light meter with 5% accuracy rating
• Digital multimeter
• Light to X-ray field test pattern (GE 46-303843P1 or equivalent)
• Ground tester (Hioki 3157 or Fluke ESA612 or equivalent)
• Leakage tester (Dale 601/601E or Fluke ESA612 or equivalent)
7.1.2 Preparing for testing

For all tests, verify that the DAP meter is removed from the collimator rails unless otherwise
specified.
Before beginning testing, perform the required calibrations (see Chapter 5 Calibration).
Chapter 7 Regulatory testing Page 137

7.1.3 Collimator testing

Perform these tests to verify that:
• The collimator lamp illuminates properly
• The light field and X-ray field are aligned
• The field size matches the expected size per the settings on the collimator
7.1.3.1 Testing light intensity

Use this procedure to verify that the collimator high-intensity field lamp illuminates at a distance of
100 cm (39.37 in) from the focal spot at no less than the light intensity specification in Table 7-1.
Site location Light intensity

Within the U.S. 160 lux (14.9 ft-c)
Table 7-1 Light intensity specification
1. Verify that the light meter has an accuracy of 5% or better.

2. Remove the collimator covers.
3. Adjust the CLS (collimator lamp supply) potentiometer so that the voltage at the collimator
lamp is 20.0 - 22.0 V.
Note: Ignore voltage polarity. The lead positions dictate polarity.
4. Place the light meter on a horizontal surface 40 inches from the X-ray tube focal spot. Direct
the sensor toward the collimator light source.
5. Turn on the collimator lamp.
Note: Important! To ensure that the lamp reaches full brightness, wait while the lamp illuminates and then
automatically shuts off after 30 seconds. Then turn on the lamp again and proceed to the next step.
6. Use the dials on the front of the collimator to adjust the field size to 10 x 10 inches.
7. Turn off the collimator lamp.
8. Turn off the room lights and use the light meter to measure the ambient light level. Record the
ambient light level here:
Ambient light level: ______________
9. Turn on the collimator lamp.
10. Position the light meter in the center of each quadrant and record the intensity of the light field
here:
Quadrant 1: ____________________
Quadrant 2: ____________________
Quadrant 3: ____________________
Quadrant 4: ____________________
11. Turn off the collimator lamp.
12. Calculate the average illumination by summing the light levels of the 4 quadrants and dividing
by 4, then subtracting the ambient light level. Record the average illumination here:
Average illumination: ______________
13. Verify that the average illumination is greater than the ambient brightness by the specification
listed in Table 7-1.
Page 138 Section 7.1 U.S. federally required tests

7.1.3.2 Testing light field to X-ray field alignment

Use this test to verify that the light field and X-ray field are aligned laterally and longitudinally. Total
misalignment may not exceed the specification that pertains to the site, given below.
Table 7-2 Light field to X-ray field alignment specification by site
Site location Total misalignment

Within the U.S. Not to exceed 1.8% of SID
Be sure to follow the instructions for Optima XR200amx or Optima XR220amx, as appropriate. For
example, the Optima XR200amx uses a cassette as a receptor, whereas the Optima XR220amx
uses a digital detector.
This procedure requires a light to X-ray test pattern, GE p/n 46-303843P1.
7.1.3.2.1 Preliminary test - light field accuracy
Note: If this test fails, then the Light to X-ray field alignment test on page 140 will fail.
1. Place the X-ray receptor on a flat, horizontal surface such as a table or floor 40 inches from
the source.
2. Place the light to X-ray field test pattern on the receptor and center it squarely.
3. Align the X-ray tube to the receptor.
4. Set the source-to-image distance (SID) to 40 inches.
5. Use the collimator dials to adjust the light field settings to 10 X 10 inches on the collimator
scales.
6. Turn on the field light and squarely center the crosshair on the test pattern.
7. Minimize the room lights.
8. See Figure 7-1. Measure the light field projection edges on the test pattern marks to the 10 X
10 inches test pattern scale for each North, South, East, and West vector. (This is the error
measurement.)
- If the light field is outside the test pattern scale, record it as a positive (+) value.
- If the light field is inside the test pattern scale, record it as a negative (-) value.
Enter the measurements here:
Error measurement: N _____ S_____ E_____ W_____

N
1
W E
Item Description
1 Light field to X-ray field test pattern
2 Light field or X-ray field
Figure 7-1 Light to X-ray field test
9. Calculate the absolute error value for N+S and E+W and record it here:
ABS(N+S) error: _____
ABS (E+W) error: _____
10. Determine the percentage of misalignment and record it here:
ABS(N+S) error / SID * 100 = __________
ABS(E+W) error / SID * 100 = __________
Pass criteria is  1.8% SID
7.1.3.2.2 Light to X-ray field alignment test

1. Prepare for an exposure.
2. Align the X-ray tube to the receptor for a SID = 40 inches.
3. Place the test pattern on the receptor and center it squarely.
4. Use the collimator dials to adjust the light field settings to 10 X 10 inches on the test pattern.
5. Minimize the room lights.
6. Select 50 kVp and 1 mAs (small spot).
7. Make an exposure.
8. Continue with the appropriate procedure below:
- For Optima XR200amx, see 7.1.3.2.3 Light field to X-ray field alignment (Optima

XR200amx) on page 141.

- For Optima XR220amx or Optima XR200amx with digital upgrade, see 7.1.3.2.4 Light
field to X-ray field alignment (Optima XR220amx or Optima XR200amx with digital
upgrade) on page 141.
7.1.3.2.3 Light field to X-ray field alignment (Optima XR200amx)

1. Open the collimator blades to 12 X 12 inches.
Be careful not to bump the receptor or test pattern.
2. Make another exposure on the same receptor.
3. Develop the film in a dark room.
4. Use a light box to locate the edges of the 10 X 10 inch field, and make a pencil mark on the
North, South, East, and West edges of the 10 X 10 inch X-ray field.
5. Measure from the 10 X 10 inch test pattern mark (light field) to the pencil mark of the 10 X 10
inch X-ray field for each North, South, East, and West vector. This is the error measurement.
- If the light field is outside the test pattern scale, record it as a positive (+) value.
- If the light field is inside the test pattern scale, record it as a negative (-) value.
Enter the measurements in the X-ray field row of Table 7-3.
Value N S E W
Light field 5 5 5 5
X-ray field
Error
Table 7-3 Optima XR200amx light field to X-ray field alignment
ABS(N +S) error / SID * 100 = __________
ABS(E +W) error / SID * 100 = __________
8. Verify that the percentage of misalignment is within the specification in Table 7-2.
7.1.3.2.4 Light field to X-ray field alignment (Optima XR220amx or Optima

XR200amx with digital upgrade)
1. Select the RAW image, select Annotation, select Measurement Tools, then select line cursors.
2. Using the Line Measurement Tools, measure the text pattern scale number seen for each
North, South, East, and West edge of the image. This is the X-ray field dimension (for example,
4.7).

Enter the measurements in the X-ray field row of Table 7-4.
Value N S E W
Light field 5 5 5 5
X-ray field
Error
Table 7-4 Optima XR220amx light field to X-ray field alignment
3. Determine the error (difference) between the light field and X-ray field values for the N, S, E,
and W vector.
- If the X-ray field value is greater than 5, record the error as a positive (+) value.
- If the X-ray field value is less than 5, record the error as a positive (+) value.
ABS(N +S) error / SID * 100 = __________
ABS(E +W) error / SID * 100 = __________
6. Verify that the percentage of misalignment is within the specification in Table 7-2.
7.1.3.3 Testing field size indicator accuracy (Optima XR200amx)

For Optima XR220amx or Optima XR200amx with digital upgrade, see 7.1.3.4 Testing field size
indicator accuracy (Optima XR220amx or Optima XR200amx with digital upgrade) on page 143.
Use this test to ensure that the difference between the indicated field size and the actual field size
is not greater than the specification that pertains to the site, given below.
Site location Total difference

Within the U.S. Not to exceed 1.8% SID in either direction
Table 7-5 Field size indicator specification by site

3. Set the SID to 100 cm.
4. Set the X-ray angle to 0 degrees.
5. Set the field size to 25 x 25 cm.
6. Select 50 kVp and 1 mAs.
7. Take an exposure.
8. Develop the film in a dark room.
9. Use a light box to locate the edge of the first X-ray field, and place a pencil mark on the North,
South, East, and West edges of the X-ray field.
10. Measure from the pencil mark to the 25 x 25 cm exposure edges.
11. Record the measured value of the North-South distance (d1) here:
d1: _____________
12. Record the measured value of the East-West distance (d2) here:
d2: ______________

13. Calculate the indicator to actual size error.

25 cm - actual size d1 25 cm - actual size d2
---------------------------------- x 100 -------------------------------- x 100
100 cm 100 cm
14. Record the error values here:
(d1) = height of image % error __________
(d2) = width of image % error ___________
15. Verify that the difference between indicated field size and actual field size does not exceed the
specification in Table 7-5.
7.1.3.4 Testing field size indicator accuracy (Optima XR220amx or Optima

XR200amx with digital upgrade)
For Optima XR200amx, see 7.1.3.3 Testing field size indicator accuracy (Optima XR200amx) on
page 142.
Use this test to ensure that the difference between the indicated field size and the actual field size
is not greater than the specification that pertains to the site, given below.
Table 7-6 Field size indicator specification by site
Site location Total difference

Within the U.S. Not to exceed 1.8% SID in either direction
To determine image size and centering, exposures are to be completed in Application mode. All
measurements are to use the RAW image.
3. Set the SID to 100 cm.
4. Set the X-ray angle to 0 degrees.
5. Set the field size to 25 x 25 cm.
6. Select 50 kVp and 1 mAs.
7. Take an exposure.
8. Select the Measurement Tools icon, and select Line.
9. Using the Line Measurement tool, measure the size of the X-ray image at the detector plane.
Line values are displayed in the bottom right corner of the screen.
10. Measure the distance between the front blade and rear blade of the image. Record that value
as d1, here:
d1 _____
11. Measure the distance between the left blade and right blade of the image. Record that value
as d2, here:
d2 _____
12. Calculate the indicator to actual size error, using d1 and d2 from above.
25 cm - actual size d1 25 cm - actual size d2
---------------------------------- x 100 -------------------------------- x 100
100 cm 100 cm
13. Record the error values here:
(d1) = height of image % error __________
(d2) = width of image % error ___________

14. Verify that the difference between indicated field size and actual field size does not exceed the
specification in Table 7-6.
7.1.4 Generator tests
7.1.4.1 Operator warning message

Verify that the following warning message is displayed on the control panel (ensure the warning
label of the applicable language is legible as required by local regulations):
"Warning: This X-ray unit may be dangerous to patient and operator unless safe exposure
factors, operating instructions and maintenance schedules are observed. To be used by
authorized personnel only."
7.1.4.2 Testing kVp accuracy

Perform the kVp accuracy test to determine whether actual X-ray energy generated by the system
at a particular voltage matches the expected energy (within a specified tolerance).
kVp accuracy is measured using a non-invasive meter
7.1.4.2.1 Piranha test meter setup

Setting up the Piranha and Palm OS for wireless connectivity
1. Power on the Piranha using the power switch.
2. Place the Piranha under the tube or mount it on a stand as needed.
Position the Piranha in such a way that the area is orientated perpendicular to the anode/
cathode axis.
3. Collimate the X-ray field slightly larger than the Piranha active sensor.
QABrowser for kVp Accuracy Test
Note: DO NOT SELECT THE "AMX-4" MODE (UNDER SETTINGS/WAVEFORM) ON THE METER.
THE "AMX-4" MODE IS NOT VALID FOR USE WITH THIS PRODUCT.
1. Turn on the Palm OS.

2. Launch the QABrowser by tapping on the QABrowser icon.
* Please note that All needs to be selected at the top of the screen for the QABrowser
icon to be visible.
3. The handheld searches for available Bluetooth devices and shows them to you.
4. Select the Piranha meter and Press Ok.
* Please note that the Piranha meter might be selected automatically thus proceeding
to the next step.
5. From the Select Type of Measurement Menu select Radiography and press Select.
6. From the Select Parameter Menu select Tube Voltage and press Select.
7. Tap Appl to open application list.
8. From Select Application Menu choose Accuracy and then tap the Back button to bring
you back to the kVp measurement screen.
7.1.4.2.2 Procedure
1. Turn on system power and boot up the system.
2. Position the tube above the kVp meter at a SID of 100 cm (39.4 in).

3. Collimate the beam to slightly larger than the kVp meter active sensor.
4. Select the kV and mAs as defined in Table 7-7 (for 15 kW generator) or Table 7-8 (for 30 kW
generator).
Table 7-7 kV and mAs settings for kVp accuracy - 15 kW generator
Sample Selected kV Selected mAs Exposure Time (See Note)

1 50 2.5 <40mS
2 80 2.5 <40mS
3 125 1.6 <40mS
4 50 25 >40mS
5 80 20 >40mS
6 125 12.5 >40mS
Note: Exposure Time reference is for generator specifications (not selectable).
Table 7-8 kV and mAs settings for kVp accuracy - 30 kW generator

1 50 2.5 <40mS
2 80 2.5 <40mS
3 125 1.6 <40mS
4 50 25 >40mS
5 80 32 >40mS
6 125 25 >40mS
5. Make an exposure and measure the kVp value. Record the values in Table 7-9 (for 15 kW
generator) or Table 7-10 (for 30 kW generator).
Table 7-9 kVp values for kVp accuracy - 15 kW generator
Sample Measured kVp Acceptance Criteria

1 +/- 4 kVp and +/- 2% of selected kVp
4 +/- 4 kVp of selected kVp



6. Verify that the kVp accuracy passes the regulatory limits for each test exposure.
7.1.4.3 Testing mAs accuracy
7.1.4.3.1 Overview
mAs accuracy is measured using a non-invasive kVp meter and oscilloscope connected to the mA
test point of the generator. Considering a threshold of 75% of the requested kV, the mAs is the
integral of the mA during the exposure time:
The exposure time (pulse width) is the time between when the kV waveform rises above the
threshold and when the kV falls back below the threshold.
For short exposure times (< 15 mSec), it is necessary to accurately measure and calculate the mAs
by integrating the mA and time in defined intervals. (Three are used for this example.)
The integrated values are the sum of the weighted means of the measured time intervals for
the full exposure time.
Mt1+ Mt2 + Mt3 = MT
Where
M = mean of the measured mA
t1, t2, t3 = time interval of the measured mean of mA (Mt1, Mt2, Mt3)
T = total exposure time @ 75% of kVp rise and fall value.
MT * T = mAs
This is simplified by the use of an oscilliscope that supports signal integration. The TDS 3000 family
of scopes provides this function using vertical cursors and gating cursors selections. So a single
measurement can be made for the full exposure defined as T above with a highly accurate result.
Figure 7-2 mA waveform, example 1
For exposures > 15 mSec the waveform stabilizes and the effects of Mt1 and Mt2 become
negligible.

Using the cursor gating function find the mean of the entire waveform.
Figure 7-3 mA waveform, example 2
Note: Because of the nature of the design of the high frequency generator, the use of a kV meter to
determine kVp rise time is not necessary. The rise/fall of the kVp waveform has negligible impact
upon the mAs measurement.
7.1.4.3.2 Procedure
1. Connect a CH 1 scope probe to TP5 (signal scale is 100mA = 1V) of the generator and chassis
ground. See Figure 7-4.
Note: TP4 is the mA Anode Negative signal and can be used in place of TP5.
TP4
TP5
Figure 7-4 Generator TP4 & TP5 mAs test points

2. Select the kV and mAs as defined in Table 7-11 (for 15 kW generator) or Table 7-12 (for 30
kW generator).
Table 7-11 kV and mAs settings for mA accuracy - 15 kW generator

1 50 2 <15mS
2 125 1.25 <15mS
3 50 25 >15mS
4 125 12.5 >15mS
Table 7-12 kV and mAs settings for mA accuracy - 30 kW generator

1 50 2 <15mS
2 125 1.25 <15mS
3 50 25 >15mS
4 125 25 >15mS
3. Adjust scope settings to display a single waveform.

4. Using the vertical cursor measurement functions, position the cursors on the mA waveform at
75% of the rise/fall for the entire exposure.
5. Using the undisturbed vertical cursor measurement functions, record the mean of the mA
waveform for the entire exposure. This requires using the integration function of the
oscilliscope. Each scope can vary as to how this is performed.
For the TDS 3000 Series scopes, the following applies.
a. Press the MEASURE button. Press the GATING button (ignore on/off state).
b. Press the BETWEEN THE V BAR CURSORS button.
c. Press SELECT MEASUREMENT FOR CH 1 button.
d. Change selections as need and select MEAN.
6. Record the CH 1 Mean value in Table 7-13 (for 15 kW generator) or Table 7-14 (for 30 kW
generator).
Table 7-13 Ch1 Mean value - 15 kW generator
Sample Ch1 Mean value Measured Time Acceptance Criteria

1 +/- 20% or 0.1mAs, whichever is greater



7. Verify that mAs accuracy passes the regulatory limits for each test exposure.
7.1.4.4 Testing reproducibility and linearity of exposure
7.1.4.4.1 Overview
Reproducibility: For any specific combination of selected technique factors, the estimated
coefficient of variation (C.V.) of radiation exposures shall be no greater than 0.05.
Linearity: The quotients of the average measured dose divided by the selected technique
values at 2 consecutive settings shall not exceed 0.10 times their sum result for
HHS.
7.1.4.4.2 Piranha test meter setup

Setting up the Piranha and Palm OS for wireless connectivity
1. Power on the Piranha using the power switch.
2. Place the Piranha under the tube or mount it on a stand as needed.
Position the Piranha in such a way that the area is orientated perpendicular to the anode/
cathode axis.
3. Collimate the X-ray field slightly larger than the Piranha active sensor.
QABrowser for Reproducibility Test
Note: DO NOT SELECT THE "AMX-4" MODE (UNDER SETTINGS/WAVEFORM) ON THE METER.
THE "AMX-4" MODE IS NOT VALID FOR USE WITH THIS PRODUCT.
1. Turn on the Palm OS.

2. Launch the QABrowser by tapping on the QABrowser icon.
* Please note that All needs to be selected at the top of the screen for the QABrowser
icon to be visible.
3. The handheld searches for available Bluetooth devices and shows them to you.
4. Select the Piranha meter and Press Ok.
* Please note that the Piranha meter might be selected automatically thus proceeding
to the next step.
5. From the Select Type of Measurement Menu select Radiography and press Select.
6. From the Select Parameter Menu select Dose and press Select. This brings you to the
mGy (dose) measurement screen.
7. Tap Appl to open application list.
8. From Select Application Menu choose Reproducibility and then tap the Back button
twice. This brings you back to the mGy (dose) measurement screen.
Note: When the exposure is less than 5ms:

The default time on the Piranha is set to 5ms, which records a low signal continuously since the
exposure time is shorter than 5ms.

1. Tap the i symbol.

2. Under Conditions Menu select Internal Detector.
3. Under Delay drop down menu select Off.
7.1.4.4.3 Procedure
Data collections for each sample set defined in the tables below consist of 10 exposures each.
Each sample of 10 exposures must be completed within 1 hour of start. There are a total of
60 exposures required to complete this section.
1. Position the dose probe 30 cm above the floor to limit scatter effects.
2. Position the tube above the probe at a SID of 100 cm.
3. Collimate the beam to slightly larger than the dose probe active sensor.
4. Select the kV and mAs starting with Sample A in Table 7-15.
Table 7-15 kV and mAs values for reproducibility tests - 15kW and 30kW generator
Selected kV Selected mAs

Sample A 80 32
SID = 100 cm
Sample B 80 40
SID = 100 cm
5. Measure the exposure in uGy for each of the 10 exposures. Each sample of 10 exposures
must be completed within 1 hour of start.
After each exposure, recycle the technique (switch to other values and then return them to the
original values). Also vary the time between exposures to capture any filament heating
variations.
6. Measure and record the values in Table 7-16.
Table 7-16 Measured uGy values
Measured uGy for each exposure

Sample
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
A
B
7. Repeat this process of 10 exposures with Sample B, using the correct techniques as given in
Table 7-15.
8. Verify that the reproducibility (Coefficient of Variation) for samples A and B is < 0.045 as
calculated.
Calculation:
[CV] = the Coefficient of Variation = [Std Dev] / [Average Mean]
[Std Dev] = the standard deviation of 10 samples [Sample A - exposures 1 through
10]
[Average Mean] = the average of 10 samples [Sample A - exposures 1 through 10]
Sample A: ______________
Sample B: ______________

9. Verify that the linerarity for samples A and B is < 0.10 for HHS. (This is a pass or fail solution.)
Calculation:
ABS[(avgmA/Selected mAs) - (avgmB/Selected mAs) <= (0.1((avgmA/Selected mAs) +
(avgmB/Selected mAs))]
[avgmX] = the average of 10 samples [Sample X = exposures 1 through 10]
Avg Mean Sample A = avgmA =________________

Avg Mean Sample B = avgmB =________________
Verify the linearity meets the regulatory limits.
7.1.5 Beam Quality Test
7.1.5.1 Measuring half value layer (HVL)

This test measures the combined HVL of the tube and collimator.
1. See Figure 7-5. Using a probe holder, position the probe a minimum of 30 cm (12 in) from a
flat level surface (to avoid scatter) and 30 cm (12 in) from the X-ray beam output port
(collimator).
2. Collimate the beam down to just cover the receptor of the dose probe.
X-ray
Focal Spot
Tube
Collimator
Additional Test
Filtration
Tape
30 cm (12 in)
Useful Beam
Probe
Maintain at least
Table or any 30 cm (12 in)
other object from any object
Figure 7-5 HVL test setup
3. Select kVp of 80, mAs of 12.5.

4. Remove or dial out all filters that are removable by the operator and collimate slightly larger
than the active volume of the probe using the light field.
5. Make an exposure and measure exposure with no added filters. Record the reading.
Exposure (without additional filtration) ___________
This represents 100% transmission level.
6. Place 3 mm additional filtration (using filters from HVL Attenuator, GE p/n 46-194427P274,
total aluminum filtration = 3.0 mm) in beam. Additional filtration must be as close to the source
as possible. Affix to the collimator rails using masking tape. Ensure tape does not encroach
upon the usable beam.

7. Make an exposure with additional filtration. Record the reading.

Exposure (with additional filtration) ___________
8. Determine the ratio.
Ratio = ________________ Exposure (with additional filtration) / Exposure (without additional filtration)
Note: The ratio of Exposure (with additional filtration) to Exposure (without additional filtration) shall be
equal to or greater than 0.5.
9. Enter the beam quality data in Table 7-17.
Table 7-17 Beam quality data (half value layer)
Radiation Reading Ratio Aluminum Manufacture

(with/without) Filtration Date
With Without
Value
Additional Filtration Additional Filtration
3.0 mm
7.1.6.1 Testing tones, buzzers, and the X-ray ON indicator

1. On the system touchscreen, start an exam and select an exposure.
2. Make the exposure.
3. Verify that an X-ray tone sounds and the X-ray ON indicator illuminates during the exposure.
4. Verify that the selected kVp and mAs are displayed in the protocol modification frames and the
left side of the status bar. Both displays should match.
7.1.6.2 Testing the heat unit alarm

1. Change the generator configuration of the Tube HUR Alarm to 95%. Select COMMIT.
3. Make X-ray exposures (use appropriate radiation safety procedures, i.e. close collimator
blades, etc.):
- 80kVp
- 40mAs
4. When the Heat Units go below 95%, a tone is heard.
5. Return the Tube HUR Alarm to 20% (default). Select COMMIT.
Section 7.2 Testing electrical safety

This procedure is intended for the field engineer and describes the test procedure for the IEC 62353
Planned Maintenance and power plug replacement for the mobile X-ray products.
The IEC 62353: Medical Electrical Equipment - Planned Maintenance and power plug replacement
of Medical Electrical Equipment standards ensures the electrical safety of medical electrical
equipment.
Page 152 Section 7.2 Testing electrical safety

Perform Ground Resistance testing

Site Location Installation PM Repair
Within USCAN Fluke ESA612 Fluke ESA612 Fluke ESA612
Outside USCAN Hioki Tool Using 25A current source Fluke ESA612 Fluke ESA612
Perform Leakage Current testing

Site Location Installation PM Repair
Within USCAN Fluke ESA612 Fluke ESA612 Fluke ESA612
Outside USCAN Fluke ESA612 Fluke ESA612 Fluke ESA612
Table 7-18 Test Requirements
7.2.1 Perform Ground Resistance Testing

Ground Resistance test must be performed mandatory during every PM. The ground resistance test
must be repeated if the AC power plug has been replaced or disturbed anytime.
Ground resistance testing has two different tools:

• 7.2.1.1 Ground Resistance Test using FLUKE ESA612 on page 153.
• 7.2.1.2 Ground Resistance Test with Hioki 3157 on page 159.
7.2.1.1 Ground Resistance Test using FLUKE ESA612
PERSONNEL REQUIREMENTS
Required Persons: 01
Timing: 30mins
PM frequency: 12 months
PRELIMINARY REQUIREMENTS
Tools and test equipment
• Standard Toolkit
• Fluke ESA612 or below equivalent specification
Specification
Test Standard Selections ANSI/AAMI ES-1, IEC62353, IEC60601-1, and AN/NZS3551
Voltage
Ranges (Mains voltage) 90.0 V to 132.0 V ac rms 180.0 V to 264.0 V ac rms
Range (Point-to-point voltage)
5000 m 0.0 V to ≤150 V ac rms
2000 m 0.0 V to ≤300.0 V ac rms
Accuracy (2% of reading + 0.2 V)

Earth Resistance
Modes 2-Wire
Test Current >200 mA ac
Range 0.000 Ω to 2.000 Ω
Accuracy (2% of reading + 0.015 Ω)
Equipment Current
Range 0.0 A to 20.0 A ac rms
Accuracy (5% of reading + (2 counts or 0.2 A, whichever is greater))
Leakage Current
Modes* AC+DC (True-rms)
AC only
DC only
* For tests that do not use MAP voltage, AC+DC, AC ONLY, and DC ONLY modes are available for
all leakages. MAP voltages are available only in True-rms (shown as AC+DC).
Patient Load Selection AAMI ES1-1993, IEC 60601

Crest factor ≤3
Ranges 0.0 μA to 199.9 μA
200 μA to 1999 μA
2.00 mA to 10.00 mA
Frequency response/Accuracy
DC to 1 kHz (±1% of reading + (1 μA or 1 LSD, whichever is greater))
1 kHz to 100 kHz (±2% of reading + (1 μA or 1 LSD, whichever is greater))
1 kHz to 5 kHz (current > (±4% of reading + (1 μA or 1 LSD, whichever is
1.6 mA) greater))
100 kHz to 1 MHz (±5% of reading + (1 μA or 1 LSD, whichever is greater))
RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK

Voltage present!
Disconnect the AC charging plug from any wall outlet power source.
Before you start the test, ensure the system is in OFF position and the system input power plug is
connected to test socket on the side of Fluke ESA612 meter.
It is recommended to use Fluke ESA612 to set up the test conditions. The nominal AC Mains should
be 120VAC or 220VAC to match the standard system plug. Refer to 7.2.3 Test Point Locations for
XR200/XR220 on page 172 for earth resistance test points of XR200/XR220 systems 120VAC or
220VAC AC Mains (site-specific input source).

TEST PROCEDURE
Note:
It is important to ‘Zero/Null’ leads to eliminate resistance in test leads as follows.
1. Make sure the power cord from the DUT is connected into outlet of the Fluke ESA612.
2. From the setup menu, press F4 button, on the blue screen press More to reveal additional
menu selections.
3. Press F2 button, on the blue screen press Instrument to select the instrument setup.
4. Press F1 button, on the blue screen press Standard to open scroll box.

5. Press up or down to scroll through the standard selections.
6. Select IEC62353 standard is displayed, press F1 button, on the blue screen press Standard
to confirm the standard.
7. Press F4 button, on the blue screen press Done to complete the standard setup.
8. Push to reveal the resistance function menu.

9. Connect one end of a test lead to the V/ Ω /A jack.

10. If you use an accessories probe, connect it to the other end of the test lead and put the probe
tip into the ∅/Null jack. If you use an alligator clip accessory, connect it to the other end of the
test lead, put the null post adapter in the ∅/Null jack, and clamp the alligator clip to the null post
adapter.
Note: The ∅/Null jack does not accept the test leads supplied with the Product.
To avoid electric shock, remove the null post adapter from the Null jack after a test lead zero is
performed. The Null jack becomes potentially hazardous during some of the other test conditions.
11. Push ZERO LEADS button until the display shows 0.000 Ω
12. Now connect one end of the test lead between the V/Ω/A jack of the test meter and other end
to an exposed conductive surface of the DUT ensuring that the input power plug of the DUT
remains in the test socket on the side on the Fluke ESA612. Refer to Table 7-19 for the list of
conductive surfaces (accessible dead metal parts) of the AMX system. Refer to Table 7-19 for
the list of conductive surfaces (accessible dead metal parts) of the XR200/XR220/XR240
systems.
When a current of 200mA from the current source with a no-load voltage not exceeding 24V at a
frequency of 50/60Hz is applied between conductor terminals for 5 to 10 seconds, the voltage drops

between the terminals. The resistance determined using the current and voltage drop should not be
greater than 0.2 Ohm (200 mΩ).
The resistance value will be displayed on the Fluke. Record the test results in Table 7-20.
Using steps 10 - 12 above, take measurements for each test point identified in Table 7-19. Record
test results in Table 7-20 as appropriate. (Refer to 7.2.3 Test Point Locations for XR200/XR220 on
page 172 for images of test points for respective systems).
Manufacturer recommendation is to perform Null test before testing each test point.
Test Point Component Test Point Description

1 Tube Tube endcap screws or HV cable nuts
2 Collimator Collimator Skin guards
3 Column Scroll support rivets
4 Bin Screw used for mounting strain relief of wired Hand switch cable
5 Tube latch Tube latch on top-cover
Table 7-19 Conductive surface test points for XR200/XR220
EXPECTED TEST RESULTS

The resistance, when measured, should NOT be greater than 0.3 Ohm (300m Ohm).
Expected Measured Result

Test Point Units
Value Value (Pass/Fail)
Tube endcap screws or HV cable nuts Ω ≤ 0.3
Collimator Skin guards Ω ≤ 0.3
Scroll support rivets Ω ≤ 0.3
Screw used for mounting strain relief of Ω ≤ 0.3
wired Hand switch cable
Tube latch on top-cover Ω ≤ 0.3
Table 7-20 Results of the Protective Earth Resistance Test for XR200/XR220
If the measured value exceeds the expected value then refer to 7.2.5 AC Power plug
troubleshooting on page 175 for power plug troubleshooting procedure to fix the grounding issues.

7.2.1.2 Ground Resistance Test with Hioki 3157
RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK

Voltage present!
Disconnect the AC charging plug from any wall outlet power source.
Obtain a Hioki 3157 grounding tester or equivalent. For sites in Europe, use the cables that are
provided with the Hioki tester. For sites outside of Europe, obtain the following:
• Two green/yellow ground stranded wire cables:
- Cable A = 2.5 mm² (12 AWG), 3 m (9.8 ft)
- Cable B = 2.5 mm² (12 AWG), 5 m (16.4 ft)
• Two lugs to fit 0.64 cm (0.25 in) terminals to the meter end of each cable (Figure 7-6).
• Two clamps to fit onto the other end of the cables (Figure 7-6).
Figure 7-6 Lug and clamp on ground wire
7.2.1.2.1 Attaching test cables

1. On the tester, loosen both the current output (Source) terminal knob (top right) and the voltage
measurement (Sense) terminal knob (bottom right) by turning them counterclockwise.
2. Connect Cable B to the current output knob.
3. Connect the short bar between the current output and voltage measurement knobs as shown
in Figure 7-7.

Figure 7-7 Test Cable B and short bar installation
4. Turn the two knobs clockwise to tighten.

5. Loosen the other current output (Source) terminal (top left), attach Cable A, and retighten the
knob.
The resulting connections should look as shown in Figure 7-8.
Figure 7-8 Cable A, Cable B, and short bar connections
7.2.1.2.2 Setting test parameters

1. Turn on the tester by pressing the POWER button.
The tester enters the ready state five seconds after startup (the model name and version
display during startup).
2. Verify that the tester displays the test parameters specified in Table 7-21.
Test parameters Values

Canada: 30.0 A
Current
All other countries: 25.0 A
Test value 0.100 Ohms
Timer 5.0 sec

Table 7-21 Ground resistance test parameters
If it does not, perform the following steps to change the parameters as needed (the system will
save the settings even after system power is turned off). See Figure 7-9.
A. While in the ready state, press the or button until the output current display
begins flashing.
B. Press the or button to change the output current. The value changes in
0.1-A increments. To change the value by 1.0-A increments, press + or
button.
C. Press the button again to move to each of the other settings (Maximum Test
Value, Timer, and Frequency).
D. Use the or + buttons as needed to adjust the values.
E. Press .
Figure 7-9 Test parameter value settings
3. While in the ready state, press the + buttons to display the Optional function
setting screen.
The Output Current Frequency is the first digit displayed, where the value is 0 for 50 Hz or 1
for 60 Hz. The Pass/Fail hold function is represented by the second digit.
4. Press the or button until the second digit begins flashing.

5. Press the button to change the value to 1 (Figure 7-10).
6. Press the + buttons to save this setting and return to the ready state. The unit will
display and hold the measured resistance value after the test.
Figure 7-10 Current setting on the tester
7.2.1.2.3 Performing zero adjustment

Ground measurements may be affected by a voltage drop in the A and B cables. To account for the
voltage drop, perform the zero adjustment procedure before taking ground measurements.

1. Confirm that the unit is in the ready state.

2. Short circuit cable A with cable B.
Figure 7-11 Cable A and cable B short-circuited
3. Press the button.

The orange test indicator is displayed, the 0ADJ indicator begins flashing below the resistance
value, and the zero adjustment begins. During the zero adjustment, a preset current is output
through the shorted leads. When zero adjustment is complete (about three seconds), the unit
enters the ready state, and the 0ADJ lamp lights.
If the test cables are too resistive, the offset cannot be set. Use less-resistive cables and try to
set the offset again. The zero adjustment function is automatically disabled if the output current
value is changed or if data settings are changed.
Zero adjustment is possible within a range equivalent to a resistance between 0.000 Ohms and
0.100 Ohms on the resistor indicator. If the measured value falls outside this range, the
resistance value flashes, and the unit enters the ready state.
Figure 7-12 Tester during and after zero adjustment
7.2.1.2.4 Taking ground measurements

1. Turn off system power and main circuit breaker.
2. Connect cable A to the grounding pin on the electrical plug.
3. Connect cable B to the first measurement point listed in Table 7-22 .
4. On the tester, press the green START button.
The orange indicator is displayed, the Test Current display value quickly increases from 0.0 to
the preset output current (25.0 A or 30.0 A), and the timer value decreases from 5.0 seconds
to 0.0 seconds.

If the test passes, the green Pass indicator is displayed. Record the displayed resistance value
in Table 7-22.
5. Press Stop.
6. Move cable B to the next measurement (Table 7-22), then repeat steps 4 and 5.
The voltage must not exceed 2.5 V (0.1 ohms).
Measured
Component Measurement point
resistance
Tube endcap screws or HV cable nuts
Tube
See Figure 7-15
Skin guards
Collimator
See Figure 7-16
Scroll support rivets
Column
See Figure 7-17
Screw used for mounting strain relief of wired hand switch
Bin cable
See Figure 7-18
Tube latch on top cover
Tube latch
See Figure 7-19
Table 7-22 Ground measurement test points

7.2.2 Performing Leakage Current Testing

If ground testing is required for this system, verify that the ground testing results (see Table 7-22)
are < 0.3 Ohms before conducting leakage testing.
Leakage Current test must be performed mandatory during every PM. The leakage current test
must be performed if the AC power plug has been replaced or disturbed anytime.
The leakage current must not exceed 300 μA.
Before you begin, verify these steps:
1. Complete ground testing, if required (see 7.2.1 Perform Ground Resistance Testing on
page 153).
2. Ensure that all system covers are installed.
3. Obtain a Dale 601/601E test meter or Fluke ESA612.
Ground resistance testing has two different tools:

• 7.2.2.1 Leakage Current Testing using Dale 601/601E on page 164.
• 7.2.2.2 Leakage Current Test using FLUKE ESA612 on page 167.
7.2.2.1 Leakage Current Testing using Dale 601/601E

Perform leakage testing under the five specific conditions outlined in Table 7-23:
Test meter
Condition Power X-ray on Section reference
outlet
7.2.2.1.1 Condition 1: Power Off, Normal
1 Off Normal No
Outlet, X-ray Off
7.2.2.1.2 Condition 2: Power off, reversed
2 Off Reversed No
outlet, X-ray off
7.2.2.1.3 Condition 3: Power on, normal
3 On Normal No
outlet, X-ray off
7.2.2.1.4 Condition 4: Power on, reversed
4 On Reversed No
outlet, X-ray off
7.2.2.1.5 Condition 5: Power on, normal
5 On Normal Yes
outlet, X-ray on
Table 7-23 Leakage current test condition

7.2.2.1.1 Condition 1: Power Off, Normal Outlet, X-ray Off
Potential test equipment damage. Always pause in the OFF position when moving the OUTLET
switch from NORMAL to REVERSED or REVERSED to NORMAL. Failure to do so can result in the
internal test meter failure and tripping of facilities circuit breakers.
1. Turn off the system power, main circuit breaker ON.

On the test meter, set the Function switch to ENCLOSURE LEAKAGE, the L2 switch to
CLOSED, the Outlet switch to Normal and the M.A.P/Lift Gnd to OFF (Figure 7-13).
Figure 7-13 Dale 601 meter

2. Insert the black coil cord with clamp into the CHASSIS connection located on the top of the
test meter (Figure 7-14).
Figure 7-14 Dale 601 meter, top view
3. Connect the Dale 601 test meter to a wall outlet.

4. Important! Connect the System AC power cord to the receptacle on the test meter.
5. Using the clamp, connect to all conductive surfaces listed in Table 7-24. Record the readings.
Readings should be close to 0.0. Address high readings by checking for damaged ground wire
or internal system wiring that could be causing current to flow to the tested component or
chassis.
Condition 1: Condition 2: Condition 3: Condition 4: Condition 5:

Power off, Power off, Power on, Power on, Power on,
Conductive normal reversed normal reversed normal
surface outlet, X-ray outlet, X-ray outlet, X-ray outlet, X-ray outlet, X-ray
off off off off on
Leakage current
Tube
Collimator
Column
Bin
Tube latch
Table 7-24 Leakage current test results
7.2.2.1.2 Condition 2: Power off, reversed outlet, X-ray off

1. On the test meter, set the Outlet switch to Reversed.
2. Verify the system power is OFF, main circuit breaker ON.
3. Using the clamp, connect to all conductive surfaces.
4. Record the readings in Table 7-24.

7.2.2.1.3 Condition 3: Power on, normal outlet, X-ray off

1. Turn on the system power.
2. On the test meter, set the Outlet switch to Normal.
7.2.2.1.4 Condition 4: Power on, reversed outlet, X-ray off

1. On the test meter, set the Outlet switch to Reversed.
2. Verify that system power is on.
7.2.2.1.5 Condition 5: Power on, normal outlet, X-ray on
Wear a lead vest to protect yourself from radiation.
1. On the test meter, set the Outlet switch to Normal.

2. Verify that system power is on.
3. Make an exposure (see Table 7-25) while using the clamp to connect to all conductive
surfaces.
Generator power kVp mAs

15 kW 125 100
30 kW 125 100
Table 7-25 Exposure technique
7.2.2.2 Leakage Current Test using FLUKE ESA612
Timing: 30mins
PM frequency: 12 months
Tools and test equipment
• Fluke ESA612 or below equivalent specification
Specification
Test Standard Selections ANSI/AAMI ES-1, IEC62353, IEC60601-1, and AN/NZS3551

Voltage
Ranges (Mains voltage) 90.0 V to 132.0 V ac rms 180.0 V to 264.0 V ac rms
Range (Point-to-point voltage)
5000 m 0.0 V to ≤150 V ac rms
2000 m 0.0 V to ≤300.0 V ac rms
Accuracy (2% of reading + 0.2 V)
Earth Resistance
Modes 2-Wire
Test Current >200 mA ac
Range 0.000 Ω to 2.000 Ω
Accuracy (2% of reading + 0.015 Ω)
Equipment Current
Range 0.0 A to 20.0 A ac rms
Accuracy (5% of reading + (2 counts or 0.2 A, whichever is greater))
Leakage Current
Modes* AC+DC (True-rms)
AC only
DC only
* For tests that do not use MAP voltage, AC+DC, AC ONLY, and DC ONLY modes are available for
all leakages. MAP voltages are available only in True-rms (shown as AC+DC).
Patient Load Selection AAMI ES1-1993, IEC 60601

Crest factor ≤3
Ranges 0.0 μA to 199.9 μA
200 μA to 1999 μA
2.00 mA to 10.00 mA
Frequency response/Accuracy
DC to 1 kHz (±1% of reading + (1 μA or 1 LSD, whichever is greater))
1 kHz to 100 kHz (±2% of reading + (1 μA or 1 LSD, whichever is greater))
1 kHz to 5 kHz (current > (±4% of reading + (1 μA or 1 LSD, whichever is
1.6 mA) greater))
100 kHz to 1 MHz (±5% of reading + (1 μA or 1 LSD, whichever is greater))

TEST DESCRIPTION
It is recommended to use Fluke ESA612 or equivalent meter (Refer to 7.2.5 AC Power plug
troubleshooting on page 175) to establish the test conditions. The nominal AC Mains should be
120VAC or 220VAC, to match the standard system plug.
Note:
Before you start the test, ensure the Equipment input power plug is connected to test socket on the
side of Fluke ESA612 meter and the system is in ON condition. If ground testing is required for this
system, verify that all ground testing results passed (see Table 7-19) are ≤ 0.3 Ohms before
conducting leakage testing. Leakage testing must be performed if the AC power plug has been
replaced or disturbed. The leakage current must not exceed 300 μA.
TEST DESCRIPTION
The Equipment Leakage Current test must be conducted under both normal condition and Single
Fault Condition. The test procedures for both the conditions are described below.
TEST UNDER NORMAL CONDITIONS

To perform the Equipment Leakage Current Test under normal conditions, follow the steps listed
below:
Note:
Refer to Table 5 for normal test conditions and 7.2.4 Test Equipment on page 174 for the test
equipment used. Refer to Table 7-27 for the leakage current test points of the XR200/XR220
systems for 120VAC or 220VAC AC Mains (site-specific input source).
1. Push μA to access the leakage current main menu.
2. Push the ‘Direct Equipment button on the Fluke.
3. Push the Polarity button to select NORMAL.

4. Now connect one end of the test lead between the V/ Ω /A jack of the test meter and other end
to an exposed conductive surface of the DUT (Refer Table 7-27 for test points) ensuring that
the input power plug of the DUT remains in the test socket on the side on the Fluke ESA612.
5. The leakage current value will be displayed. Record the test results in Table 7-28 for XR200/
XR220 systems.
6. Repeat the above steps for each test point in Table 7-27 and record the test results in Table 7-
28 for each test points.

7. Repeat above steps with test conditions 2 & 3 as per Table 7-26. (XR200/XR220)
Condition Power Test Meter Polarity X-Ray

1 OFF Normal No
2 ON Normal No
3 ON Normal Yes
Table 7-26 Test Condition for XR200/XR220
Test Point Component Test Point Description

1 Tube Tube endcap screws or HV cable nuts
2 Collimator Collimator skin guards
3 Column Scroll support rivets
4 Bin Screw used for mounting strain relief of wired hand switch cable
5 Tube latch Tube latch on top-cover
Table 7-27 Test points for XR200/XR220
Note: Refer to 7.2.3 Test Point Locations for XR200/XR220 on page 172 for the locations of XR285/
XR200/XR220/XR240/ systems test points.

Condition 1:
Test Point Units Expected Measured Result

Tube endcap screws or HV cable nuts μA ≤ 300
Collimator skin guards μA ≤ 300
Scroll support rivets μA ≤ 300
Screw used for mounting strain relief of wired μA ≤ 300
hand switch cable
Tube latch on top-cover μA ≤ 300
Condition 2:

hand switch cable

Condition 3:

hand switch cable
Table 7-28 Results of the leakage current test under normal conditions for XR200/XR220
TEST UNDER SINGLE FAULT CONDITION (SFC)

In SFC, a single fault means of protection against electrical hazard is defective or faulty.
To create Single Fault Condition, see Table 7-29.
Condition Power Test Meter Polarity X-Ray

1 On Reversed No
2 On Earth Open No
Table 7-29 SFC Test conditions for 120VAC or 220VAC AC Mains
To perform the Equipment Leakage Current Test under SFC, follow the steps listed below:
Note:
Refer to Table 7-29 for the test conditions and 7.2.5 AC Power plug troubleshooting on page 175
for the test equipment used. Refer to Table 7-27 for XR200/XR220 systems.
1. Set up test condition 1 listed in Table 7-29, follow step 2 below.
2. Press the ‘Polarity’ button to select ‘Reversed’ on the Fluke ESA612.
3. Now connect one end of the test lead between the V/ Ω /A jack of the test meter and another
end to exposed conductive surface of the DUT ensuring that the input power plug of the DUT
remains in the test socket on the side on the Fluke ESA612.
4. The leakage value will be displayed. Record the test results in Table 7-30.
5. Connect the test lead between the V/ Ω /A jack of the test meter and an exposed conductive
surface of the DUT ensuring that the input power plug of the DUT remains in the test socket
on the side on the Fluke ESA612. Record the test results in Table 7-30.
6. Set up test condition 2 listed in Table 7-29, Press the ‘Earth’ button to select ‘Open’ on the
Fluke ESA612.
7. Connect the test lead between the V/ Ω /A jack of the test meter and an exposed conductive
surface of the DUT ensuring that the input power plug of the DUT remains in the test socket
on the side on the Fluke ESA612. Record the test results in Table 7-30 as appropriate.
Repeat the above steps for each leakage current test point mentioned in Table 7-27.


Condition 1:

hand switch cable
Condition 2:

hand switch cable
Table 7-30 Results of the leakage current test under SFC conditions for XR200/XR220
systems
If the measured value exceeds the expected value then refer to 7.2.5 AC Power plug
troubleshooting on page 175 for power plug troubleshooting procedure to fix the Leakage current.
7.2.3 Test Point Locations for XR200/XR220

This section contains the illustrations of the test points listed in Table 7-19.

Figure 7-15 Test Point 1: Tube endcap screws or HV cable nuts
Figure 7-16 Test Point 2: Collimator Skin guards
Figure 7-17 Test Point 3: Scroll support rivets

Figure 7-18 Test Point 4: Screw used for mounting strain relief of wired Hand switch cable
Figure 7-19 Test Point 5: Tube latch on top-cover
7.2.4 Test Equipment

This section contains the illustrations of the meters used in the IEC 62353 tests.
Fluke ESA612 or equivalent (For more details refer the product manuals and video explanation at
http://www.flukebiomedical.com/).

Figure 7-20 FLUKE ESA612
7.2.5 AC Power plug troubleshooting
7.2.5.1 Tools and Test Equipment

7.2.5.2 Required Conditions

Perform LOTO on the system. Leave the AC Plug (E1) exposed.
7.2.5.3 Procedure
• Remove screws on the top of plug marked
• Check the cable core if any open strands or broken wires, connect properly into plug
• Ensure all ground connections are properly tightened.
• Inspect cord reel box and termination of ground cables.
Note:
If system using molded power cord type then check ground connection, Cord reel box and
termination of ground cables.
Section 7.3 Tube Radiation Leakage Test - Optional

7.3.1 Personnel Requirements
Required persons: 1
Timing (min): 90 including setup and clean up
7.3.2 Preliminary requirements
7.3.2.1 Tools and test equipment

• RTI Piranha model 657 with R100, R100B or Piranha Dose probe as provided by the vendor
(or equivalent)

• 3 mm lead to block the primary beam

• Metric tape measure
7.3.2.2 Consumables
• None
7.3.2.3 Safety
• Appropriate ionizing radiation PPE
7.3.3 Purpose
The purpose of this section is to provide guidance and definition for those that wish to perform a
radiation leakage test of the X-ray tube/collimator assembly (also known as "source assembly").
Per the technical data sheet, the Leakage Technique Factor is 150 kV, 0.4 mA.
This is used by Canon for their bench testing.
The technique for this mobile system is 125 kV, 250 mAs.
The details as to why and how are explicitly defined at the end of this section.
This content applies to the Optima XR220amx, Optima XR200amx, Optima XR200 with Digital
Upgrade, and the Brivo XR285amx products.
7.3.4 Common Errors:

• The most common error identified is incorrect meter settings. Many test meters have the ability
to perform what they define as “Dose Rate”, “Dose Accumulate” or some similar verbiage
measurements. However, these settings are not applicable to our system as described above.
Ensure your test meter is configured for a single measurement and zeroed as
applicable. Reset the meter for each subsequent exposure.
• Another common error is poor positioning of the probe. Care should be taken to ensure the
probe is positioned perpendicular to the focal spot at a 1 meter distance. See Figure 7-1.
• Ensure the collimator blades are closed and block the collimator port with at least 10 HVL
equivalence of lead (3 mm or more) to block the primary beam limiting scatter radiation noise
in the readings. See Figure 7-1.
• Ensure your units of measure conversions are correct.
7.3.5 X-Ray Tube Leakage Radiation Requirement:

Tube Leakage Radiation < 0.88 mGy/hr at 1m from focal spot (125 kV, 250 mAs)
GE Rejection limit < 0.80 mGy/hr at 1m from focal spot (125kV, 250mAs)
This rating is applicable at the Long-Term Maximum Input Power rating. Multiply the measured
leakage of each 125 kV, 250 mAs exposure (in mGy) by 6.9 to determine the leakage radiation of
each exposure at this power level.
Repeat measurements as needed, one exposure at different locations, each at 1 meter from the
focal spot. See Figure 7-1 and Figure 7-2. It is also recommended that 520 seconds between
exposures is observed for tube thermal considerations. These readings are not cumulative.
Page 176 Section 7.3 Tube Radiation Leakage Test - Optional

The integration value (IV/hr) is determined with the following formula;
(3600 sec/hour) x Continuous mA / desired mAs = Integration Value (IV)/hr

(3600 sec/hour) x 0.48 mA / 250 mAs = 6.912 / hr
Calculate the Leakage reading by the following formula;
Integrated Leakage Reading = Measured dose x IV/hr

Integrated Leakage Reading = Measured dose x 6.9
90 Test
° Ionization
Chamber
1 Me
ter
ANODE CATHODE
3 mm lead
Collimator sheilding
Collimator
Focal Spot
Blades Tube Port
Closed
Figure 7-1 Test tool setup
Figure 7-1 illustrates the positioning of the test tool (ionization chamber) in 2 dimensions only.
Ensure the ionization chamber is perpendicular to the source in each dimension for accurate
readings. The testing parameters per 21CFR 1020.30 define that this test should be performed in
“1 meter in any direction from the source” (3 dimensionally). Also stated is the following;
“Compliance shall be determined by measurements averaged over an area of 100 square cm with
no linear dimension greater than 20 cm.” This statement defines the maximum size of the Ionization
Chamber that should be used.
Figure 7-2 illustrates the approximate position of the Canon Rotanode™ E7894X X-ray Tube
assembly utilized with these defined products.

Note: When making these measurements, it is common to see the highest readings relative to the anode
side of the tube.
Collimator
Tube
Port ANODE
Flange
Central Beam Reference

122 mm
mm
53
81 mm
12.5 °
CATHODE
Figure 7-2 Model E7894X Focal Spot Reference (Drawings not to scale)
See OEM data sheet for details
Background:
The Optima XR220amx, Optima XR200amx, Optima XR200amx with Digital Upgrade, and the
Brivo XR285amx products are battery operated systems and not capacitive discharge or field
emission systems. Therefore, per regulatory requirements (21CFR 1020.30 being the most
stringent), we fall under the “For all other diagnostic source assemblies” category.
Per 21CFR, the leakage radiation from the diagnostic source assembly shall not exceed 0.88 mGy
air kerma in 1 hour. In our system, we are not capable of performing continuous exposures for this
time frame. Therefore, an integrated leakage reading would be desired. However, the system
design is such that independent mA and time control is not possible. It is a two point system
interface design. Additionally, most exposures are sub-second in length approaching the test
meters capabilities.
The maximum rated tube potential is 125 kVp for the following products;
- Optima XR220amx
- Optima XR200amx
- Optima XR200amx with Digital upgrade
- Brivo XR285amx
The maximum continuous tube current is defined by the “continuous anode input power” found in
the tube technical data sheet. Per Canon, for the E7894X tube, the average anode power is 60
watts. Knowing the average anode power is 60 W and the max kVp is 125, we then get;
60 W / 125 kVp = 0.48 mA continuous
Page 178 Section 7.3 Tube Radiation Leakage Test - Optional

For testing purposes, a radiographic exposure is used and the leakage measured for that exposure.
The technique used for measurement is a rad exposure of 125 kVp, 250 mAs.
The actual values for the 30 kW systems are 125 kVp at ~77.01 mA and ~ 3.246 seconds.
The actual values for the 15 kW systems are 125 kVp at ~64.39 mA and ~3.883 seconds.
Using these actual values the duty cycle (IV/hr) becomes 6.9 exposures per hour.
The exact mA and time used to get 250 mAs on a 30 kW versus the 15 kW systems may be
different, but the mAs ratio relative to continuous 0.48 mA at 125 kVp calculate to be the same.
Section 7.4 Medical Device List

The product contains the following Medical Devices, see Table 7-31 Medical Device List. Product
installation, service maintenance, repair or field replacement of these Medical Devices should
follow the applicable reporting requirements of the regulation.
From September 24th in 2016, service provider should comply with FDA UDI reporting for all the
Class II Medical Devices.
FDA Medical Device Classification Component / Description

Class II Optima XR220 system Assembly
Class II Optima XR200 system Assembly
Class II URP Rad Portable Detector, BG1_3
Table 7-31 Medical Device List

Page 180 Section 7.4 Medical Device List

Chapter 8 Troubleshooting
Section 8.1 Performing diagnostics

Follow these steps to diagnose system issues:
1. Review the error log to help determine what system functionality is affected.
- For additional information, insert the Class C service docs CD for this product into the CD/
DVD drive. Clicking on an error code will display additional information for the selected
error.
- Before starting the SUIF, attach the external CD/DVD drive (both USB connections must
be made) and insert the Class C service docs CD for this product into the CD/DVD drive.
You must wait approximately 1 minute for the drive to stop spinning before launching the
SUIF.
2. Speak with the system operator to determine under what circumstances issues occur.
3. Test specific areas of the system using the applicable Diagnostic tests in the SUIF.
8.1.1 Running diagnostics on the system

1. At the SUIF, press the DIAGNOSTICS button.
2. At the left navigation bar, select from among the diagnostic categories (Table 8-1).
3. Press a diagnostic test and follow the on-screen instructions.
Table 8-1 System diagnostic categories
Category Description
System Power See 8.1.1.1 Testing system power
System Control See 8.1.1.2 Testing system control
Drive and Brakes See 8.1.1.3 Testing the drive system and brakes
Generator See 8.1.1.4 Testing the generator
Detector Tethered See 8.1.1.5 Testing the tethered detector (Optima XR220amx or
Optima XR200amx with digital upgrade only) on page 184.
Wireless Detector See 8.1.1.6 Testing the wireless detector (Optima XR220amx or
Optima XR200amx with digital upgrade only) on page 185.
Communication See 8.1.1.7 Testing network communication on page 185.
8.1.1.1 Testing system power

Table 8-2 describes the system power tests available in the SUIF.
Table 8-2 System power tests
Test Description
Power Control Comm Low level communication and control test of the Spyder control board
and other hardware controllers.
Power Control Limits Compares actual battery voltage and current readings to limits.
Chapter 8 Troubleshooting Page 181

Table 8-2 System power tests
Test Description
Power Supply Thermal Compares internal temperature readings to limits.
Collimator Light Reports system recognition of collimator lamp on/off commands from
various inputs.
On/Off Button Disables system shutdown while in diagnostics.
Breaker Trip Tests whether the system is able to control the breaker.
AC Present Tests whether the system recognizes that the power plug is connected
to the receptacle.
8.1.1.2 Testing system control

Table 8-3 describes the system control tests available in the SUIF.
Table 8-3 System control tests
Test Description
Drive Login Reports system recognition of keypad functionality.
System Sanity Includes several tests, including:
• System monitoring checks: Tests actual board voltages of local
and remote supplies against the limits.
• Memory test: Verifies the memory function of the Spyder board.
• Integrity check: Performs board flash storage cyclic redundancy
checks (CRC) to determine if the software code is valid.
• Communication tests: Checks the Spyder ability to test local and
system communications.
Overlay Test Visual check of X-ray on indicators.
Audio Check Audio check of X-ray on indicators.
Video Test Displays the color bar test pattern, and black and white screens to
check for bad pixels.
Wired Hand Switch Tests the X-ray generation initiation circuitry.
Wireless Hand Switch Tests the X-ray generation initiation circuitry.
8.1.1.3 Testing the drive system and brakes

Table 8-4 describes the drive system and brake tests available on the SUIF.
Table 8-4 Drive system and brake tests
Test Description
Drive Handle Test Tests whether the system recognizes handle switch activation.
Drive Tests Tests drive directional and speed control functionality.
Brake Tests Tests the drive brakes, vertical column release, column rotation and
arm extension releases, and the tube park latch to determine if each is
able to receive a system signal.
Tube Interlocks Tests whether the system recognizes that the tube park is latched.
Page 182 Section 8.1 Performing diagnostics

Table 8-4 Drive system and brake tests
Test Description
Detector Parked (Optima Determines if the bin switch recognizes when the detector is in the bin.
XR220amx or Optima
XR200amx with digital
upgrade only)
Bumper Determines if the system is properly reading signals from the switches
on the bumper.
8.1.1.4 Testing the generator

Table 8-5 describes the generator tests available on the SUIF. For more information, see Section
8.2 Djinn Generator Troubleshooting Guide.
Test Description
Rotation Test A compound test that includes tube filament impedance and 70C circuit
tests.
Tube Rotor Impedance Tests tube stator winding impedance.
Power Supplies Checks the +13 V, 48 V, 3 V3 power supply.
Resonant Components Determining if the system receives one pulse from each side of each
resonant component.
Inverter Test Tests with low DC bus value and independently driven switches.
Test 70C Circuit Tests to determine if the internal temperature for the HV tank and
control circuitry is within limits.
Rise Time/Regulation Tests the generators ability to recognize and control the DC Bus.
Real Time Lines Test Tests the real time circuitry of components.
Fil 1 Drv Clsd Loop Tests filament driver 1 in closed loop.
Fil 1 Xfmr Primary Tests open load transformer primary for filament 1.
Fil 1 Drv Short Test Tests filament driver 1 in short circuit.
Fil 2 Drv Clsd Loop Tests filament driver 2 in closed loop.
Fil 2 Xfmr Primary Tests open load transformer primary for filament 2.
Fil 2 Drv Short Test Tests filament driver 2 in short circuit.
MA Measurement Tests mA measurement.
KV Measurement Tests kV measurement.
KV Test A compound test that includes:
• kV measurement
• Inverter test
• Resonant component verification

Test Description
MA Test A compound test that includes:
• mA measurement
• Filament driver 1 in short circuit
• Filament driver 2 in short circuit
• Open load transformer primary for filament 1
• Open load transformer primary for filament 2
• Filament driver 1 in closed loop
• Filament driver 2 in closed loop
Auto Test Tests both mA and kV measurement circuitry in a simulated system
level.
Table 8-5 Generator Tests
8.1.1.5 Testing the tethered detector (Optima XR220amx or Optima

XR200amx with digital upgrade only)
Table 8-6 describes the tethered detector tests available on the SUIF.
Table 8-6 Detector (tethered) tests
Test Description
Built In Self Test Performs the internal power on diagnostic sequence of
Flash memory, Image and Software SDRAM (Tether and
Gbit ethernet, Image SDRAM (Wireless), Ethernet digital
and analog loopback, Internal wireless loopback.
LED Info Meanings of the detector LEDs and illumination pattern
definitions.
Ping A simple communication test using small packet
transmissions.
Ethernet Stats Verifies ability to transfer images through communication
channels with CRC and Image data integrity checking.
Temperature Reports the values of the internal detector sensors with
limits.
PS Full Load Reports the internal detector power supply values in
imaging mode with limits.
PS Partial Load Reports the internal detector power supply values in
standby mode with limits.
PS Unloaded (Tether) Enables the unloaded source power supply to isolate
potential Tether/Connector failures.
Shock Sensors Demonstrates detector sensor functionality by using a
defined test method.
Grid Sensor Verifies the detectors ability to sense if a Grid is attached
properly.

8.1.1.6 Testing the wireless detector (Optima XR220amx or Optima

XR200amx with digital upgrade only)
Table 8-7 describes the wireless detector tests available on the SUIF.
Table 8-7 Wireless detector tests
Test Description
Wireless Comm Presents the various stages of UWB connection,
authentication, and signal strength. The visual status aids
in identification of root cause for basic communication
faults and data transfer performance issues.
Signal Strength Resides in the Configuration Tab of the SUIF. It is a
subset of the Wireless Comm diagnostic.
Battery Health Reports the percentage of the full charge capacity over
the design capacity of the Battery.
Built In Self Test Performs the internal power on diagnostic sequence of
Flash memory, Image and Software SDRAM (Tether and
Gbit ethernet, Image SDRAM (Wireless), Ethernet digital
and analog loopback, Internal wireless loopback.
LED Info Meanings of the detector LEDs and illumination pattern
definitions.
Ping A simple communication test using small packet
transmissions.
Ethernet Stats Verifies ability to transfer images through communication
channels with CRC and Image data integrity checking.
Temperature Reports the values of the internal detector sensors with
limits.
PS Full Load Reports the internal detector power supply values in
imaging mode with limits.
PS Partial Load Reports the internal detector power supply values in
standby mode with limits.
Grid Sensor Tests user interaction and status display.
8.1.1.7 Testing network communication

Table 8-8 describes the network communication tests available on the SUIF.
Table 8-8 Communication tests
Test Description
Hospital Network Performs low-level TCP-IP checks to determine if the
system can communicate with the network.
Port to Port Diag Isolates the ports on the PC and, instead, connects them
to one another to test ability to send and receive signals.
4.
Figure 8-1

5. To get further detail on the test, click on ‘Detailed Result.’ Once Detailed result is clicked, a
window opens with test log displayed.
Figure 8-2 Detailed result window with Failed test information
Note: This window should only be used to get information on the tests being run. Results on this window
could mislead tester, since it only shows result for the ‘last executed’ Batch / Test.
6. Once the result is checked, close this window to return to the test view. To export the results
to an excel file click on Export to Excel button. Once clicked, it will open Excel file with Results
summary as shown below:
Figure 8-3 Excel Sheet with Results summary
Note: User may save this excel to a directory of choice. Also, note that the Excel file records the SSO ID
and Service Record ID recorded in the Main View.
7. The Logs for the test session, with information in the Detailed result window is captured in the
below directories:
a. Blue Spyder: C:\goepel\CAS4WIN4.6\Uuts\SPYDER 7350002\RESULTS
b. Red Spyder: C:\goepel\CAS4WIN4.6\Uuts\SPYDER 5350002\RESULTS
With file names captured in cap file extension. For Ex:
MANDATORY_GE67891_201801101356.CAP file is the one generated for the Mandatory tests.
The Test file naming template is <Button_Name>_<Service_Id>_<Date_Time_Stamp>.CAP
Note:
The log files are created as per the Buttons selected. In this workflow, there would be 2 log files
generated; one for ‘Mandatory Tests’ and the other for ‘ALL’. If the tester needs even the Mandatory
tests in the Excel, then Export to Excel must be done prior to running All Tests.

To complete the test session, please click on Exit to close the application. Once Exit is clicked, the
following prompt is shown to user to confirm application
closure.
Figure 8-4 Exit prompt
Click Yes to exit. Now an instruction is given to tester to reboot the X-Ray unit being tested, since
it would be in degraded mode. The instruction is as below:
Figure 8-5 X-Ray System Reboot prompt
Note: It is important to exit the application once the testing is done, to release the license for use by others.
There are only a limited number of licenses available.
8.1.2 Tips and Tricks Tips

1. Always run only one instance of the BScan Service Tool. One of the libraries used by the tool
is a third party proprietary software, that allows only a single instance to be running at a given
point of time.
2. Remove the USB cable from either the Spyder or the PC when the system is rebooted.
3. Please provide feedback on tool operation and areas of improvement.
4. For any other Install related queries or technical support contact OLC.

Section 8.2 Djinn Generator Troubleshooting Guide
Djinn Beetle Wiring Diagram
8.2.1 Introduction
The Djinn Beetle generator is the X-ray generation subsystem used in XR285amx / XR200amx /
XR220amx systems. It is a bootable subsystem with 2 way CANOpen communication to the
system. Logic power is a 48V DC input from the system’s LVLE2. Battery stack voltage is also input
to the generator.
Page 188 Section 8.2 Djinn Generator Troubleshooting Guide

8.2.2 Description of Djinn Beetle Errors
8.2.2.1 System reported error related to generator:
System Reported
Description
Error Code
3600130 Generator Abort Error
3600131 Generator Warning Error
3600132 Generator Debug Error
3600133 Generator Inhibit thermal Error
3600134 Generator Inhibit non-thermal Error
The generic errors shown above may be displayed to the customer on the applications screen if a
generator issue occurs. Additional more detailed errors are present in the class M error log. For
example, the system raises the Abort error 3600130 if the Djinn sends it any Abort class error.
Similarly the system raises the Warning error 3600131 if the Djinn sends it any Warning class error
and so on.
Generator error codes consist of four numbers written in hexadecimal. The first two digits describe
the Djinn module sub component to which the error is related, as you can see in the table below.
The last two digits provide the specific details of the error condition.
First two digits of

Djinn sub Components
Djinn Error Code
01 Heater 1 (Small Filament)

02 Heater 2 (Large Filament)
04 Rotor
05 Boost / DC Bus
06 KV
07 Thermal
08 System
09 Boot
0A Various
0B MA Generation
81 CAN Open
8.2.2.2 Complete Table of Generator Errors:

This table lists every possible generator error code, description and likely related FRUs. This table
is meant to help in the case where multiple error codes are seen, it is then critical to evaluate the
FRU commonalities and interactions between FRUs to find the correct FRU(s). The error specific

diagnostic instructions starting on page 204 can be followed if a single error is occurring to fix the
issue.
Involved FRUs
Genera
Generator check for
Error Code Error Tube/ HV System tor Set Power HV Aux Aux
Error presence of LVLE2 Batteries
Description class cables cables of Module Tank 15kW 30kW
Code other errors
Cables
Fil Small Unexpected

0100 generator firmware INHIBIT X
error
Fil Small: Filament

0101 INHIBIT X
over current detected
Fil small: Filament

0102 INHIBIT X X X X
open circuit detected
Fil small: Filament

0103 drive current exceeds INHIBIT X
max limit
Fil small: Filament

0104 drive current below INHIBIT X
min limit
Fil small: Filament

0105 inverter is off and INHIBIT X
current not zero
Fil small: Over

0107 current detection on INHIBIT X
filament
Fil small: 48V supply

0108 filament circuit out of X INHIBIT X
range [44V-52V]
Fil small: Unexpected

error
Fil small: Autodiag

0183 failed during DEBUG X
generator boot
Fil large: Unexpected

error
Fil large: Filament

0201 INHIBIT X
over current detected
Fil large: Filament

0202 INHIBIT X X X X
open circuit detected
Fil large: Filament

0203 drive current exceeds INHIBIT X
max limit
Fil large: Filament

0204 drive current below INHIBIT X
min limit
Fil large: Filament

current not zero
Fil large: Over current

0207 INHIBIT X
detection on filament

Involved FRUs
Genera
Generator check for
Code other errors
Cables
Fil small: 48V supply

0208 filament circuit out of X INHIBIT X
range [44V-52V]
Fil small: Unexpected

error
Fil large: Autodiag

0283 failed during DEBUG X
generator boot
Rotor: Lost rotor

communication
0401 INHIBIT X X X
between Power and
Main Aux modules
Rotor: Generator SW
0402 corruption. Download INHIBIT X
generator SW
Rotor: Over current

0403 detected on rotation ABORT X X
phases.
Rotor: Open circuit

phases.
Rotor: Rotation
0405 phases current ABORT X X X
unbalanced.
Rotor: Rotation
0406 phases angle error ABORT X X
detected.
Rotor: Rotation
current not zero.
Rotor: Generator SW
0409 ABORT X
corruption
Engineering:
0410 Simulation Rotor SW INHIBIT X
detected
Rotor: Generator SW
0412 INHIBIT X
corruption at boot
Rotor: Over current

phases
Rotor:
Communication
0458 failure between INHIBIT X X X
Power and Main Aux
modules
Rotor:
Communication
Power and Main Aux
modules

Involved FRUs
Genera
Generator check for
Code other errors
Cables
Rotor:
Communication
Power and Main Aux
modules
Rotor:
Communication
Power and Main Aux
modules
Rotor: 48V supply

0466 rotation circuit out of X ABORT X X
range [40V-50V]
Rotor: Current
0467 measurement issue ABORT X
on rotation
Rotor: Measurement
0468 ABORT X
circuit failure at boot
Rotor:
Communication
Power and Main Aux
modules
Rotor: Board found in

0481 reset state. Reset INHIBIT X
system
Rotor: State
mismatch between
0482 INHIBIT X
Power and Main Aux
modules
Rotor: State
mismatch between
0483 INHIBIT X
Power and Main Aux
modules
Rotor: State
mismatch between
0484 INHIBIT X
Power and Main Aux
modules
Rotor: State
mismatch between
0485 INHIBIT X
Power and Main Aux
modules
Rotor: State
mismatch between
0486 ABORT X
Power and Main Aux
modules.
Rotor: Service mode

diagnostic
0487 DEBUG X
communication
failure

Involved FRUs
Genera
Generator check for
Code other errors
Cables
Rotor: Speed
communication
0488 failure between ABORT X X X
Power and Main Aux
modules
Rotor: Generator
detected
0489 INHIBIT X
incompatible rotor
board circuit
Input stage:
Unexpected
0500 ABORT X
generator firmware
error
Input stage: DC Bus

0501 command out of ABORT X
range [100V-420V]
Input stage: DC Bus

rise time too fast
0503 during DC Bus ABORT X X X X
charge [DC Bus <
200V]
Input stage: DC Bus

rising time too slow
0504 during DC Bus ABORT X X X X
charge [DC Bus <
200V]
Input stage: No input

current detected
0505 ABORT X
during DC Bus
charge
Input stage: Over

voltage on DC output
0510 INHIBIT X
detected [DC Bus >
460V]
Input stage:
Unexpected
0511 INHIBIT X
generator firmware
error
Input stage: Software

0520 over input current INHIBIT X
detected [Iin > 140A]
Input stage: Input

0523 INHIBIT X
stage damaged
Input stage:
Hardware over input
0524 INHIBIT X
current detected [Iin
> 140A]
Input stage: Boot

0525 timeout when boot is INHIBIT X
started
Input stage: DC Bus

0580 timeout when boot is ABORT X
started

Involved FRUs
Genera
Generator check for
Code other errors
Cables
Input stage: Low

0581 input voltage during DEBUG X X X X
boost while Vin < 95V
Input stage: High

input voltage during
0582 INHIBIT X X X
boost while Vin >
200V
Input stage: Low DC

Bus voltage during
0583 X INHIBIT X X X X
boost while Vout <
280V
Input stage: No input

voltage detected
0584 ABORT X X X X
before boost start
[Vin < 90V]
Input stage: Input

current detected
0585 INHIBIT X X
while boost is off [Iin
> 8A]
kV: Unexpected
0600 generator firmware ABORT X
error
kV: Exposure
0601 sequence error from ABORT X X
system
kV: Unbalanced kV
0602 [kV cathode - kV ABORT X X X X
anode > 10kV]
kV: Unbalanced kV
0603 [kV anode - kV ABORT X X X X
cathode > 10kV]
kV: kV max reached

0604 on anode [kV > 125% X ABORT X X X X
of kV anode target]
kV: kV max reached

on cathode [kV >
0605 X ABORT X X X X
125% of kV cathode
target]
kV: Too many spits

0606 detected [spits count ABORT X X
> 8 per second]
kV: Inverter current

mismatch between
0607 INHIBIT X X X
measured &
expected values.
kV: Inverter over

0608 current detected [ILR X INHIBIT X X
> 250A]
kV: Measured kV is
0609 greater than target ABORT X X
before exposure start

Involved FRUs
Genera
Generator check for
Code other errors
Cables
kV: Measured kV too

060A low after exposure ABORT X X X
start [kV < 3kV]
kV: Unexpected
060C generator firmware ABORT X
error
kV: Measured kV too

low during exposure
060E X ABORT X X X X
[kV < 75% of kV
target]
kV: Inverter current

060F INHIBIT X
regulation issue
RTL: Issue detected

0611 on X-ray hardware INHIBIT X X
command (RTL2)
RTL: Issue detected

0613 on X-ray hardware INHIBIT X X
enable (RTL4)
kV: Techniques
0616 demanded cannot be X DEBUG X X X X
achieved
kV: Synchronization
0681 issue at exposure ABORT X
start
kV: kV detected while

0684 inverter is off [kV > INHIBIT X
1kV]
kV: Resonant current

detected while
0685 INHIBIT X
inverter is off [ILR >
1A]
Thermal: Tube
0701 overtemp switch INHIBIT X X
open
Thermal: Tank
0702 temperature is too INHIBIT X
high
Thermal: Power
0703 board temperature is INHIBIT X
too high
Thermal: Filament
0704 board temperature is INHIBIT X
too high
Thermal: Rotor board

0705 temperature is too INHIBIT X
high
Thermal: Tank
0706 temperature is getting DEBUG X
hot
Thermal: Power
0707 board temperature is DEBUG X
rising

Involved FRUs
Genera
Generator check for
Code other errors
Cables
Thermal: Filament
0708 board temperature is DEBUG X
rising

0709 DEBUG X
temperature is rising
Thermal: Tank
0782 temperature sensor INHIBIT X X
failure is detected
Thermal: Power
0783 board temperature INHIBIT X
sensor failure
Thermal: Tube
0784 thermal protection INHIBIT X
error
Config: Revision
0785 device configuration INHIBIT X X X
failure detected
Config: Unexpected
0786 generator parts INHIBIT X X X
detected
Config: Generator
0787 parts identification is INHIBIT X X X
impossible
Thermal: Filament
0788 board temperature INHIBIT X
sensor failure
Thermal: Thermal
sensor
0789 INHIBIT X X X
communication
failure
Thermal: There is no
response from at
078A INHIBIT X X X
least one thermal
sensor

078B temperature sensor INHIBIT X
failure
Thermal: Incorrect
078C temperature on Rotor INHIBIT X
board sensor ID
Sys: Exposure start

0801 ABORT X X
timeout [Time > 180s]
WDT: Watchdog SW
0802 ABORT X
error on CanCtrl task
WDT: Watchdog SW
0803 ABORT X
error on DevCtrl task
WDT: Watchdog SW
0804 ABORT X
error on SysCtrl task
Sys: System
0805 identification INHIBIT X X
mismatch

Involved FRUs
Genera
Generator check for
Code other errors
Cables
Sys: System CAN

0806 command received is ABORT X
unknown
WDT: Watchdog SW
0814 ABORT X
error on RoseRT task
Boot: Download has

0901 been requested by INHIBIT X
system
Boot: No application
0902 or application INHIBIT X
corruption
Boot: No database or
0903 INHIBIT X
database corrupted
Boot: Database not

0905 INHIBIT X
compatible with SW
Boot: Application not

0906 INHIBIT X
compatible with Boot
Boot: FPGA missing

0907 INHIBIT X
or corrupted
Boot: FPGA not

0908 DEBUG X
compatible with SW
Boot: Rotor FW not

0909 DEBUG X
compatible with SW
090A Boot: Boot corruption INHIBIT X
RTL: X-ray hardware

090B command risen at ABORT X X
generator boot up
WDT: Watchdog SW
090C DEBUG X
error
Boot: Autodiag failure

0981 INHIBIT X X X
detected on diag
Misc: Internal power

0A81 X INHIBIT X
supplies out of spec
Cable: Power
module's internal
0A82 INHIBIT X
cabling is missing or
damaged
Cable: Cable
between Tank and
0A83 INHIBIT X X X
Power module is
missing or damaged
Misc: External 48V

0A85 power supplies out of X INHIBIT X X X X X
spec
Misc: Simulation SW
0A87 INHIBIT X
detected
Misc: NVRAM Battery WARNI

0A90 X
is low NG

Involved FRUs
Genera
Generator check for
Code other errors
Cables
Misc: Real-time clock

0A91 INHIBIT X
issue detected
Misc: Reboot caused

0AA0 by an unexpected DEBUG X
crash
WDT: Watchdog SW
0AA1 INHIBIT X
error
mA: mA measured
0B81 while inverter is off INHIBIT X X X
[mA > 1mA]
mA: No mAs
measured after
0B82 X ABORT X X X
exposure start [mAs
< 0.005]
mA: Inconsistency
between mA anode
0B83 ABORT X X X X
and mA cathode
measurement
mA: mA
measurement at start
0B84 DEBUG X X X X
of exposure lower
than expected
mA: mA
measurement at start
0B85 DEBUG X X
of exposure higher
than expected
mA: Filament ageing

saturation detected
0B86 when computed DEBUG X X X X
target reach
command limit
mA: Measured mA is
out of range during
0B87 ABORT X X X X
exposure [mA < 10%
of target]
CANOpen:
8110 Communication ABORT X X
overflow detected
CANOpen:
Communication
8130 INHIBIT X X
watchdog failure
detected
8.2.2.3 Testing a System after a Generator Component Change

In situations dealing with intermittent generator issues, additional testing may be desired to build
confidence that the repair solved the issue. In addition to the Finalization Tasks listed for the FRU
replacement procedure in the System Service Manuals, some optional use (stress) testing may
help flush out intermittent issues.
a. Charge the system if needed.
b. Unplug the system.
c. Attempt to confirm that the issues are no longer present, check all functionality.

i. Turn on the collimator lamp.

ii. Drive the system.
iii. Power cycle the system.
iv. Take several high power exposures (125kVp, 25 or 125 mAs), see that no errors
occur.
v. Repeat customer exposures that triggered the issue (if applicable).
d. If no errors appear during the high power exposures, and the issue can no longer be
reproduced the fix was successful.
8.2.3 In-Depth Djinn Beetle generator description

In a XR285amx / XR200amx / XR220amx system, the 15kW Djinn Beetle generator subsystem
consists of 3 main generator modules; the Power Module, the HV Tank and the Main Auxiliary
Module. An additional 30kW Auxiliary Module can be added to the system to increase the capacity
of the generator subsystem.
Location of generator parts is described in the following picture for 30kW generator. For 15kW Djinn
generator, 30kW Auxiliary Module is removed from the system and locations of other parts are still
the same.
Main Auxiliary HV Tank

Module
30kW Auxiliary
Module
Power Module
Figure 8-6 View of 30kW Djinn Components from the rear of the system (rear bin removed)

This section includes:

- Description of the parts of the generator and their functions.
Generator parts and functions

1. POWER MODULE (FRU)
Power Module
2. HV TANK (FRU)
High Voltage (HV) Tank, see the HV receptacles for Anode and Cathode where HV Cables shall be
connected
3. MAIN AUXILIARY MODULE (FRU)

Main Auxiliary Module

4. 30KW AUXILIARY MODULE FOR 30kW DJINN ONLY (FRU)
Figure 8-7 30kW Auxiliary Module
5. DJINN BEETLE SET OF CABLES

Figure 8-8 Djinn Beetle set of cables
The set of cables includes:

- 2 ground cables. (not used)
- 2 Djinn HV Tank to Power cables (one short and one long).
- 1 cable Filament Board to Auxiliary (pn: 5557064):
Figure 8-9
Pin Signal
5, 12 CAN Low and CAN High
1, 2, 7, 8 48Vdc
4, 9, 10, 13, 14, 15 Ground
6 Rotor state
3, 11 Not used
- 1 cable Filament to HV Tank (pn: 5159146):

Figure 8-10
- 1 Flat Cable CONTROL to HV Tank (pn: 5144844):
Figure 8-11
Pin Signal
2, 7, 9, 11 Ground
3 Vcc (+5V from CTRL board)
1, 16 Used for Tank presence check, short-circuited on INT MEAS board
4 HV Tank Uniq ID and HV Tank inner temperature (Digital signal)
13 Cathode kV measurement
15 Anode kV measurement
14 Cathode current measurement
12 0V reference for Cathode current measurement
6 Current injection for Cathode current measurement Diag
10 Anode current measurement
8 0V reference for Anode current measurement
5 Current injection for Anode current measurement Diag
- 1 Shielded Cable Assy- Djinn Aux Box to Djinn Power Board (pn: 5557063):

Figure 8-12
Pin Signal
1 Internal Generator DC BUS (420Vdc)
2 Battery Stack Voltage
3 0V reference for DC BUS and battery stack voltage
8.2.4 Specific Error Code Handling and Actions

Error Code Structure
Generator errors can be broken up into two categories; system reported (generic) generator errors
and errors reported directly from the generator.This is a very important distinction when
troubleshooting as a system reported generator error may not always be a generator error at all.
Indeed, issues due to battery or to tube will create generator errors.
The information given by the error code and its description text includes that following:
• Description: it describes briefly the error detected in Generator.
• Data: it shows detailed information over the state of the generator when the error occurred. It
is composed by 5 fields: data content (i.e. HV Tank temperature), data description (i.e.
temperature), data value (i.e. type float with 2 decimal parts), data gain (i.e. multiplication by
10) and data unit (i.e. mA).
• Precise description: it shows additional information of the error. It defines the description of
the error in detail with their database value.
• Error class: there are three classes of errors that correspond to different levels of impact to
the system.
A Djinn inhibit error will abort the ongoing x-ray exposure, and go to an error state until the cause
of error disappeared.
A Djinn abort error will abort the ongoing x-ray exposure and immediately go back to a standby
state (i.e. tube arc).
A Djinn warning is only the information. The Generator will not abort the ongoing x-ray exposure
and it will not go back to a standby state (i.e. input voltage slightly out of range).
Note: Some columns of error logs shown in the document are removed for clarity and BRIVO
system has a different error log than an Optima system.

6. System Diagnostic Descriptions

Tube rotor impedance
Description: Launch the software diagnostic 0x4020h from the system interface. This diagnostic
tests the stator impedance, the DC Bus presence (before and after fuse), and the rotation power
bridge.
Power supplies
Description: Launch the software diagnostic 0x8050h from the system interface. This test checks
that internal power supplies (+/-13V, 48V, 3.3V) are within the proper range when all the modules
are turned off
Resonant Components
Description: Launch the software diagnostic 0x6080h from the system interface. Resonant
components verification one pulse on each side. This test drives the MOSFETs gates in order to
confirm the inverter resonant components are functional.
Inverter test
Description: This test drives the MOSFETs gates in order to confirm the inverter is functional, test
with low DC BUS value.
Test 70°C circuit

Description: This diagnostic checks the status of thermal switch connected to rotation board.
Rising time and regulation test

Description: This diagnostic checks that the DC bus stays in an acceptable range several times in
a row after asking a RAD_MODE voltage command.
RTL Test
Description: This test checks that the RTL commands sent by system are properly received by
Djinn.
Fil 1 Drv Clsd Loop

Description: This test sends 3 targets of current on Fil1 and checks the measured feedbacks are in
a correct range. It also checks feedback measured on inactive filament Fil2 to determine that there
is no short-circuit between the two filaments.
Fil 1 Xfmr Primary

Description: This test drives the inverter of Fil1 and creates a resonant current through the parasitic
Magnetic inductance at primary transformer pins. Then it verifies if measured current is different
from 0.
Fil 1 Drv Short Test

Description: This test drives the Fil1 inverter at two fixed frequency with a short-circuit at the output
of the Fil1 using a relay on Filament-Board output. Then it verifies if measured current is in a proper
range.
Fil 2 Drv Clsd Loop

Description: This test sends 3 targets of current on Fil2 and checks the measured feedbacks are in
a correct range. It also checks feedback measured on inactive filament Fil1 to determine that there
is no short-circuit between the two filaments.
Fil 2 Xfmr Primary

Description: This test drives the inverter of Fil2 and creates a resonant current through the parasitic
Magnetic inductance at primary transformer pins. Then it verifies if measured current is different
from 0.
Fil 2 Drv Short Test

Description: This test drives the Fil2 inverter at two fixed frequency with a short-circuit at the output
of the Fil2 using a relay on Filament-Board output. Then it verifies if measured current is in a proper
range.
MA Measurement
Description: This test applies a known voltage into the mA measurement circuit board and checks
if real Measured value is in a specified range.
KV Measurement
Description: This test applies a known voltage into the KV measurement circuit board and checks
if real Measured value is in a specified range.
KV Test
Description: This diagnostic performs the following group of standalone diagnostic tests simulating
normal system functionality:
• HV Tank connection test
• KV Measurement
• Inverter test
mA Test
• HV Tank connection test
• mA Measurement
• Inverter test
Rotation Test
• Check the communication with the rotation board
• Tube Rotor impedance
• Test 70C circuit
• Sequence start and brake
• Discharge test

• Verify Checksum rotation
Auto Test
Description: This test runs automatically at start-up and encompasses the mA measurement and
kV measurement tests.

Definitions
Term or Acronym Definition

MWS My Workshop
SSRS Sub-System Requirements Specifications
mA Tube emission in mA
kV Kilo Volts
HW Hardware
SW Software
DSO Digital Storage Oscilloscope
DVM Digital Value Multimeter
LVLE2 Low Voltage Low Energy Sub System
FS (LF, SF) Focal Spot (Large Focal, Small Focal)
FRU Field Replaceable Unit
HV High Voltage
CTRL CONTROL
ILR Resonant Inductor Current

Section 8.3 FlashPad Detector Troubleshooting

8.3.1 Detector Overview
8.3.1.1 Detector Components
8.3.1.3 Communication Methods
8.3.1.4 Detector Modes of Operation
8.3.1.5 Detector LEDs and Indicators
8.3.1.6 Battery LEDs, TEST Pushbutton, and Pins
8. Charger is faulty and may need replacement.
8.3.1.9 Detector Icons
8.3.1.10 Detector Registration and Management
8.3.1.11 Detector Sensors
8.3.1.12 Detector Boot Routine
8.3.1.13 Detector Sense in a Charging Bin vs Table or Wall Stand
8.3.1.14 Warning Levels
8.3.1.15 Host PC Connectivity
8.3.2 Failure Modes
8.3.2.1 Communication Failures
8.3.2.2 Environmental and Physical Failures
8.3.2.3 Battery and Charging Failures
8.3.2.4 Detector – System Firmware/Software Compatibility
8.5.3 Detector Diagnostics and Troubleshooting
8.5.3.1 SUIF Diagnostic Tool Set
GLOSSARY OF TERMS
Term Definition
ARC Apollo Readout Circuit performs data module readout.
Authentication The process by which the host PC “authenticates” a detector.
Charging Bin Mobile units have a specialized storage assembly that provides 12 vdc
power for charging the Detector Battery.
Bandwidth The term used to indicate the signal rate between host PC and detector.

Beacon The search function, or “call out” which is initiated by the host Radio Board
when trying to establish communication with any detector.
Detector Connect Detector Connect is the status of the detector response to the Beacon
Docked The mechanism to provide the detector input power and signal
communication in a table tray or wall stand in a fixed X-ray system.
DPM Detector Power Module, used on a mobile, provides 12VDC
Error A report of an exception condition, as generated by the error management
facility. Errors are logged to the system error log.
Event Any important system activity or occurrence that is to be logged to the
system event log.
GbE Gigabit Ethernet communication. Currently a hardwire connection.
Link Quality An indicator of the system/detector ability to reject electronic noise
LSL Lower Specification Limit
LVLE2 A power supply used in the mobile
Mbps Mega Bits Per Second, a data transfer rate measurement.
Operator UIF Operator User Interface
PAA Primary Application Area
PNA Primary Navigation Area, consists of both the SAA and the SNA
Port Connection A device located on the system that provides GbEthernet connectivity
RSSI Receiver Signal Strength Indicator
SAA Secondary Application Area
SNA Secondary Navigation Area
SRB Switching Regulator Board
SSB System Status Bar frames, located below the PAA framework
SUIF Service User Interface
Tether A specialized cable used to connect the Detector to the System. Provides
power and communications for control and Raw Image Data transfer.
TIB Tether Interface Box is used on fixed rad systems
URP Wireless Detector
USL Upper Specification Limit
UWB Ultra Wide Band, a wireless communications technology
Page 210 Section 8.3 FlashPad Detector Troubleshooting

8.3.1 Detector Overview
8.3.1.1 Detector Components

• The detector contains a panel consisting of a two-dimensional pixel array. It converts a two-
dimensional X-ray image to a two dimensional array of electrical signals with each value
providing a representation of the amount of X-ray accumulated in the respective area since last
read.
• The panel support provides an assembly medium and heat isolation between the panel from
the motherboard as well as heat spreading. It also provides a cushioned support between the
glass panel array/motherboard and detector case via shock mounts to reduce the possibility
of shock acting on the panel.
• The detector case protects inside components against loading, drop, impact, patient body
fluid, cleaning agents etc. It also provides shielding for EMC and EMI.
• The motherboard together with the firmware and software controls detector operation including
system initialization, image acquisition, data communication, power management,
diagnostics, environmental monitoring etc. It also provides regulated voltage to panel, scan
modules, and data modules.
• Data modules read out the signals stored in pixels along each column of the two-dimensional
pixel array on the panel in parallel.
• Scan modules select the row or rows of the pixel array to be read by the data modules.
• The power supply and management are accomplished with a switching regulation board
(SRB). The SRB provides motherboard-required voltages from a battery or an external input
voltage. It is also responsible for managing battery charging and monitoring.
• The battery provides power while detector is in Wireless applications.
• The docking mechanism provides GbEthernet link and both charging power and input power
when detector is in the table tray or wall stand.
• The mobile storage bin provides only battery charging power.

8.3.1.2 Detector Block Diagram
Figure 8-13 Detector Block Diagram

8.3.1.3 Communication Methods

The user will be allowed to configure the method of communicating between the detector and the
host pc using one of three different technologies:
• GbEthernet (gigabit cable connection)
• Tether (megabit cable connection)
• Wireless UWB (ultra wide band, no cable connection, requires battery in detector)
During start up, the system searches for the detector in priority of GbEthernet, Tether, then
Wireless. The block diagram indicates this priority. See Figure 8-14.
Start
Detector on
Docking?
Yes
No
Tether
Yes
plugged in?
No
Setup 100BT Ethernet Setup Wireless Setup GbEthernet

Communication Communication Communication
Initialize Communication
Figure 8-14
The detector will communicate with the host pc using only ONE method at one time. The detector
can be used with compatible mobile, fixed RAD, and Fluoro systems and employ combinations of
these three communication technologies.
8.3.1.4 Detector Modes of Operation

The detector operational states are defined below:
• Power-off - The detector is completely powered down.
• Sleep - The detector is in a power saving mode.
• Charging - The detector is charging battery in storage bin.
• Idle - The detector is idle and waiting for exam command.
• Standby - The detector is ready for imaging.

• Imaging - The detector is acquiring images.
8.3.1.5 Detector LEDs and Indicators

The detector has four LEDs on board to indicate various conditions of operation. The LEDs can
display Green, Red, Yellow, or can be Dark. See Figure 8-15.
Detector Status LED

Wireless LED
Wakeup Button
Battery LED 1
Battery LED 2
Figure 8-15
Wireless LED:
• Green: Excellent signal strength with throughput no less than 20 Mbps;
• Yellow: Wireless connected but with degraded performance (<20 Mbps);
• Red: No wireless connection after beacon has been detected.
• Dark: No color when used in GbEthernet mode, Tethered mode, or a Beacon has not been
detected.
Detector Status LED:

• Green: Normal
• Red: Fault Condition
Battery LEDs represent the following conditions:

• LED 1 & LED 2 = Green: Indicating no less than 60% remaining power
• LED 1 = Dark + LED 2 = Green: Indicating between 35% and 60% remaining power
• LED 1 = Dark + LED 2 = Yellow: Indicating between 10% and 35% remaining power
• LED 1 = Dark + LED 2 = Red: Indication no more than 10% remaining power
• LED 1 & LED 2 = Dark: A tether is connected (Battery Removed)
10% is the minimum remaining battery capacity in order to prevent the battery from entering
sleep mode. Battery charging time will be significantly increased when it is in sleep mode.
Thus, 10% is really 0% for the customer. When the battery LEDs become LED 1 = Dark +
LED 2 = Red, the battery has to be either recharged or replaced before continuing operation.
Some Interactive Conditions:

• A red wireless LED and/or a red battery LED will trigger the red detector status LED. This is a
FAULT condition and the battery may need to be replaced.

• In Wireless operation - press & hold the Wake Up button to activate sleep mode (power saver
mode). The Wireless and Status LEDs will go dark, but the battery LEDs will remain on. Press
the Wake Up button to restore operation.
• In Tethered operation – press & hold the Wake Up button and the detector will power off, all
LEDs will go dark. Press the Wake Up button to restore operation.
The typical Detector LED condition for Wireless Communication:

• Wireless LED = Green
• Detector Status LED = Green
• Battery LEDs = Green + Green (~60% -100% charge)
The expected Detector LED condition for Tether Communication:

• Wireless LED = Dark (off)
• Battery LEDs = Dark (off) + Dark (off)
The typical Detector LED condition for GbEthernet (Docked) Communication:

• Wireless LED = Dark (off)
• Battery LEDs = Green + Green (~60% -100% charge)
Note: If the battery is inserted into the detector it will be charged when the detector is in “Stand By” mode.
The charging is stopped during image acquisition.
8.3.1.6 Battery LEDs, TEST Pushbutton, and Pins

The battery is necessary and must be inserted into the detector for Wireless Communication. The
detector will not work properly if any other battery is installed. See Figure 8-16.
Figure 8-16
Press the TEST pushbutton on the battery to determine what percentage of charge is remaining in
the battery. Note that this percentage is relative to the capacity of the battery, and this capacity will
deteriorate with charging cycles, time, and use. Regularly performing a battery calibration will
ensure that the reported charge amount is accurate.

Detector Troubleshooting
Figure 8-17 below shows the pin definition located on the bottom of the battery. The battery key is
a connector mating guide pin. There is no conductor in this pin. There are 5 conductors on battery
connector where:
• -: Common return
• T: Thermistor (used by the system to monitor and report temperature)
• D: Data
• C: Clock
• +: Voltage (in/out)
- T D C + Battery Key
Figure 8-17
8.3.1.7 Battery Charging

Place the detector w/battery into a table tray or wall stand.
Place the detector w/battery into the charging bin on a mobile.
Place the battery into a battery charger to charge or calibrate (Deep Cycle Charge).The customer
may complain the battery is not holding the charge or the battery may not be lasting for as long as
usual. An average use of 2.0 hours time on a calibrated battery is typical.
8.3.1.7.1 URP detector battery desktop charger

Whenever there is complaint related to URP detector battery, the remote FE/OLE has to remotely
connect with the customer and guide as per this procedure.
Desktop charger helps reconsider the replacement of the battery if conditioning (calibration) is
performed and does not indicate battery fault.
Note:
Following are the references in this section:
• “URP detector”, also known as “Flashpad detector”, is referred to as “detector”.
• “URP detector’s battery” is referred to as “battery”.
• “URP detector’s desktop battery charger” is referred to as “charger”.

Timing: 15 mins. (To remotely guide customer step by step procedure, see Figure 8-18)
Figure 8-18
TOOLS AND TEST EQUIPMENT

• P/N: 5394471: Dual bay SMBus battery charger
OR
• P/N: 5561651-2: KIT BATTERY CHARGER WITH US LINE CORD
The charger is delivered with the system during installation. If there is no charger on site, the FE
should discuss applicability with the customer and order charger unit as needed. If there is no
charger on site, and the customer does not require one, this procedure is not applicable.
CONSUMABLES
• None.
REPLACEMENT PARTS
• None.

Note: In case battery fails, then order 5382000: Flash Pad Battery with cap
SAFETY
• None.
Required conditions
• None.
PROCEDURE
1. Following are the failure indications, but not limited, to assume that the battery is faulty and
needs replacement:
• When the battery is present in the detector but the LED indications are: LED1 not lit and LED2
steady RED.
• If the battery charge does not hold for long, example: draining quickly for 1 or 2 exposures.
Figure 8-19 LED indicators
2. Before replacement of battery, it is advised to charge and condition the battery using the
charger. This charger is intended to duplicate and support the detector charging bin.
3. Battery test: You can check the charge capacity, by pressing the TEST push button on the
battery to determine what percentage of charge is remaining in the battery.
Figure 8-20 Test button
Note:
The charge percentage is relative to the capacity of the battery, and this capacity will deteriorate
with charging cycles, time, and use. Regularly performing a battery conditioning (calibration) as
explained in Step 4 will ensure that the reported charge amount is accurate.

4. There are two types of chargers:

Note:
If your site has this charger, follow the steps below for charging and conditioning else proceed to 4.B
A. DUAL BAY SMBus BATTERY CHARGER P/N: 5394471
Figure 8-21 Refresh button and charging slot
1. Insert the battery in any charging slot.

2. If LED is steady green
- Battery is fully charged.
3. If LED is flashing green.
- Battery is charging.
- It takes approximately 1hr 40mins to 2hrs to fully charge from 0% to 100%.
4. If LED is flashing amber (yellow) or steady amber (yellow).
- Battery will start charging soon.
- When battery starts charging, the LED turns to flashing green.
5. Conditioning: If LED is continuously flashing amber or steady amber for >10mins “OR”
if you think the battery needs to be conditioned (calibrated).
- Then remove the battery from the slot, no matter which slot.
- Insert back on to the left side slot only (right side slot does not work for conditioning).
- Press the refresh button, the battery starts the conditioning cycle.
- It will take approximately 9hrs to complete the conditioning cycle including charging
100%.
6. f. If LED is steady red.
- Then the battery is faulty and may need replacement.
B. KIT BATTERY CHARGER WITH US LINE CORD: 5561651-2

Figure 8-22 Refresh button and charging slot
Note:
If your site has this charger, follow the steps below for charging and conditioning cycle.
1. Insert the battery in any charging slot.

2. If LED is flashing green.
- Then the battery is fully charged.
3. If LED is steady green.
- Then the battery is charging and the battery charge is >80% capacity.
4. If LED is steady amber.
- Then the battery is charging and the battery charge is <80% capacity.
Note:
It takes approximately 1hr 40mins to 2hrs to fully charge from 0% to 100%
5. Conditioning:
- When the battery is inserted into either slot of the charger.
- The condition led flashes amber, if the conditioning cycle is required.
- Press condition button within 10seconds else it will go to recharge mode.
Note:
The conditioning can be started manually by pressing the condition button anytime if battery in a
charger slot.
- It will take approximately 9hrs to complete the conditioning cycle including charging
100%.
6. If LED is flashing red.
- Battery is faulty and may need replacement.
7. If LED is steady red.
8. Charger is faulty and may need replacement.
8.3.1.8 Host PC Radio Board LEDs

The mobile and fixed X-ray system will have a small board and antenna (see Figure 8-23) that is
used to transmit and receive between the host and the detector, in Wireless Communication. This

small board has five status LEDs. A summary is below:
Figure 8-23
PWR LED Power applied to the radio board

BEACON LED Host PC is calling out to any detector
RESP LED Indicates the host PC has received a response from a detector
READY LED Indicates association to a single detector has been completed
DATA LED Flashes during data transfer between detector and host PC
The following table defines host radio board LED status for various communication states.
Note: READY LED flashes too fast to be seen. Advise monitoring PWR, BEACON, RESP, and DATA.
Radio Board LED Status State or Conditions of Communication

All LEDs off (power off) No host pc to radio board communication
PWR On, all others are OFF No communication between host PC and radio board. Can’t
transmit
PWR and BEACON are ON The host PC is communicating with the radio board, radio board
is transmitting, but no detectors seen yet
PWR and BEACON are ON Detector Wireless LED is Red, Battery LEDs are ON.
Host PC is communicating with the radio board, radio is
transmitting, but no detector seen yet.

PWR, BEACON, and RESP Detector Wireless LED Red, Battery LEDs ON.
are ON but intermittent If detector is powered off and RESP goes out, problem could be
RESP LED an issue with detector firmware
PWR, BEACON, and RESP Detector Wireless LED Red, Battery LEDs ON.
are ON but intermittent Intermittent RESP on Radio board and/or intermittent Wireless
RESP LED LED on Detector, then the host radio board is seeing activity,
but the detector is (out of range), or positioned too far away
from the host radio board antenna to communicate effectively,
or there is RF blockage.
PWR, BEACON, RESP, and Detector Wireless LED Yellow, Battery LEDs ON.
READY are ON Detector Host can communicate with the detector and the detector is
Wireless LED Yellow, Battery registered and active. This could be caused by a weak signal
LED's ON between detector and host PC. Check the operator UIF for
exposure inhibits or related error messages.
UWB PC radio board LEDs Detector Wireless LED = Green, Detector Status LED = Green,
(PWR, BEACON, RESP, Battery LEDs = Green
READY, DATA) ON Host SW Successful Exposure, Readings Available - Host can
'hear' a detector and successfully exchanges keys, detector
'device' is in 'Configured' state. Exposure Successful (no
errors). This is the perfect condition.
8.3.1.9 Detector Icons

The table below defines various detector Icons. A single Icon will appear on the Operator UIF.
Icon Description
Active Wireless Detector ready for exposure.

Battery charge level 100% - 51%. - 2 green bars
Active Wireless Detector ready for exposure.

Battery charge level 50% - 26%. - 1 green bar
* Active Wireless Detector ready for exposure.

Battery charge level 25% - 1%. (actually 25% - 11%) – 1 yellow bar
* The Icons indicate the battery is too low to power the detector in Wireless
operation. The Icon indicates 0% charge (actually 11%) and the warning
indicator will toggle on/off.
The Icon is a WARNING of possible lost communication between the host PC

and detector.
No Primary Detector selected by the user.
Active GbEthernet (Docked = Fixed Rad) Detector

Any time a detector is tethered it becomes the active detector by default. See
8.3.1.3 Communication Methods on page 213.
Active / Primary Detector in Sleep mode (Wireless Only), or in bin on mobile.
System is in a Cassette exam.
* Remember 10% is really 0% for the customer. By design, 10% is the minimum remaining battery
capacity in order to prevent the battery from entering sleep mode.

8.3.1.10 Detector Registration and Management

The following section describes the registration and management features and functions.
• Detector Registration feature will display the detector(s) that have been registered on the
system.
• The Detector System List indicates the system(s) on which the detector can be utilized.
• Detector Sleep Time is a function that allows the operator to program the amount of time a
detector is in the energy savings mode (Sleep Time).
• The Operator Manual for the system should include these screens and describe the functions.
1. Navigate to the screen below and click on Wireless Detector. See Figure 8-24.
Figure 8-24
2. The screen for Wireless Detector will appear. Click on Detector Registration: Edit. See Figure
8-25 .
Figure 8-25

3. The Detector Registration screen will appear. See Figure 8-26.
Figure 8-26
4. Detector Registration is the initial process performed with a tether to recognize the detector in
relation to the system. Add and Edit functions require a tether be connected between the host
PC and the detector. Remove and Identify functions will work without a tether connection. See
Figure 8-27.
Figure 8-27
5. Clicking on the detector Icon shown on the operator UIF will enable the Detector Management
feature and the screen will appear. This screen displays the details of the detector(s) that have
been set up for use with the system. Only one detector can be Active at any time.

6. Click the Identify button. Observe the detector Status LED blinking for 15 seconds. See
Figure 8-28.
Detector Status LED – Should be

blinking RED for 15 sec
Figure 8-28
8.3.1.11 Detector Sensors

The detector design includes sensors that combined with software provide warnings to the operator
for certain conditions. There are diagnostics that can be run to check these conditions. If these
diagnostics report a FAILED status, replace the detector. DO NOT ATTEMPT A REPAIR.
• Voltages internal to the detector are monitored for conformance to lower spec limit (LSL) and
upper spec limit (USL). Voltage failure conditions are reported to the operator UIF. The event
is recorded. Depending on severity, exposure may be inhibited, and a request for detector
service will be posted.
• Temperature sensors are positioned in the detector to monitor panel temperature (for image
quality) and surface temperature (for patient safety). Defective sensor detection is employed
and the detector enters error-handling process once a new bad sensor is detected. A
temperature sensor is also integrated into the battery.
• Shock sensors monitor G-forces to detect any physical event that may have happened. There
is a 3-axis accelerometer inside the detector, which is used to monitor the amount of shock
received by the detector. There are two warning levels that can be reported to the operator
based on acceleration, levels 3 and 5. Level 3 indicates a shock of 200+ G's in magnitude, and
level 5 is between 100 to 200 G's. If the event(s) have been severe, the detector may not be
reliable and degraded image quality could be the result.
• Grid sensors detect the placement and removal of the grid on the front of the detector. Two
polarized magnets on the grid are used to accomplish this monitoring. Placement of a grid on
the rear of the detector will create a FAULT. The detector will monitor the presence of a grid
and send the system a grid status change message when the grid is attached to or removed

from the detector. If the grid is attached on the wrong side of the detector, the detector sends
a level 3 warning message.
8.3.1.12 Detector Boot Routine

The operator UIF will display the code and description of these processes during a Normal start of
the host to detector communication. The code #’s are different, but the routine is the same for
Wireless, Tethered, or GbEthernet (Docked) communication.
• Code # - Digital Cassette Detector Boot In Process
• Code # - Digital Cassette Detector Calibration Data Upload In Process
• Code # - Digital Cassette Detector Boot Completed
• Code # - Digital Cassette Detector Calibration Data Upload Completed
8.3.1.13 Detector Sense in a Charging Bin vs Table or Wall Stand
Figure 8-29
The detector/system has the ability to know when a detector is in a mobile bin or in the fixed-room
dock. This is accomplished by sensing the resistance between the connector pins, shown in the
yellow circle, in Figure 8-29 above. This figure is shown in the diagnostics section, also.
• In mobile bin, these two pins shall be open where the resistance shall be no less than 1M ohm.
(>1M ohm)
• While in fixed room dock including both table and wall-stand, the two pins shall be shorted and
the resistance shall be no more than 1 ohm. (< 1 ohm)
This connector is replaceable, a (FRU).
8.3.1.14 Warning Levels

• Level 3: Indicating a critical event is detected. This warning indicates the performance of
the detector may be downgraded or detector surface temperature is approaching
safety limitation. The system shall inhibit the use of the detector with by-pass
function and direct the operator to stop using the detector except emergency use.
• Level 5: This warning is indicating a serious event was detected. The system shall warn
the operator of preparing for further action.
8.3.1.15 Host PC Connectivity

Assure all Ethernet cables are connected to the correct locations on the Host PC. Reference the
system wiring diagram, observe cable marking, and host PC connector marking.

8.3.2 Failure Modes
8.3.2.1 Communication Failures

An error message, error code, and Warning Icon will appear on the operator UIF when
communication between the host and detector is lost or fails to be established during detector boot.
Communications failures can occur at anytime whenever there is a failure to establish or maintain
the handshake between the host PC and the detector.
8.3.2.2 Environmental and Physical Failures
8.3.2.2.1 Temperature
A detector motherboard problem or internal power issue can raise panel or surface temperature
resulting in a warning posted to the operator UIF. Increased panel temperature may contribute to
image artifacts and may inhibit exposures. Extreme surface temperature is a risk to patient safety.
The battery may contribute to a temperature problem. Temperature sensors in the detector and
battery can also fail.
8.3.2.2.2 Voltage
The Switching Regulator Board (SRB) could develop a problem, which could cause a
communication failure or a temperature issue. The Power Supply Board could also become
defective and fail to provide the required voltages.
8.3.2.2.3 Sensors (shock and grid)

If the detector was dropped or somehow physically damaged, the detector may cause degraded
image quality. Shock sensors can fail.
If the grid was placed on the backside of the detector, the detector will not image. The polarized
magnets, which detect the grid placement, could be missing from the grid.
8.3.2.2.4 Detector Panel Defects or Damage

If the detector panel becomes damaged, internal problems may develop which could contribute to
degraded system performance or poor image quality.
8.3.2.3 Battery and Charging Failures

Battery failure and low battery can be a cause of communication or system operation failure.
Charging bin connector/circuitry can fail. Docking connections and circuitry can fail or cause
degraded system performance. Battery charger failure or poor operation can occur resulting in an
undercharged or poorly calibrated battery.
8.3.2.4 Detector – System Firmware/Software Compatibility

Customers that acquire additional systems and multiple detectors may experience inhibits when
sharing detectors across these systems. The cause could be related to different detector firmware
versions or detector – system FW/SW incompatibility.



8.3.2.5
Figure 8-30
7.

Section 8.4 Wireless Connectivity Troubleshooting

8.4.1 Band Selection
The Networks Configuration screen was updated to allow the user to select whether they want to
operate in the 2.4 GHz band, 5 GHz, band or both the 2.4 GHz and 5 GHz bands. See Figure 8-31.
Figure 8-31
A Band Selection section is now located above the IP settings within the Network Configuration
screen as highlighted above. The default selection is to use both 2.4 GHz and 5 GHz. This screen
should be used to in place of the modifications called out in the Wireless Band Selection Service
Instruction (DOC1273850).
8.4.1.1 Indications for Use

The customer will report about problems with wireless networking such as not being able to pull a
worklist or push images to PACS. Further investigation requires answering the following questions:
• Does the network in question utilize both bands (2.4 GHz and 5 GHz)?
• Does the wpa_supplicant.log file show challenges connecting to one band but not the other?
• Can the network admin at the site confirm whether the site is utilizing Band Select (Cisco) or
Band Steering (Aruba)?
If the site is utilizing Band Steering or Band Select then you set the device to utilize 5 GHz.
Page 232 Section 8.4 Wireless Connectivity Troubleshooting

If the site is only utilizing a single band for their network, then using this feature will not resolve any
connectivity issues the site is having.
If analysis of the wpa_supplicant.log file shows equal challenges connecting to 2.4 GHz (channels
1, 6, & 11) and 5 GHz channels then this feature will most likely not help with connectivity issues
the customer is having.
8.4.1.2 Cause
If the site is using Band Steering, Band Select, or some other similar technology the problem is that
the site is using methods outside of the 802.11 standard to guide clients that are capable of
operating on both 802.11 bands up to the less congested 5 GHz band. WiFi operates in two discrete
frequency bands: 2.4 GHz and 5 GHz. Most hospitals primarily utilize the 2.4 GHz band for their
wireless networks as it has better spatial coverage and decreases the total cost of ownership/
operation for a wireless network. Unfortunately, the 2.4 GHz band only offers 3 available channels
for use in an enterprise network, which leads to many issues in larger institutions including co-
channel interference and overcrowding.
To alleviate this, many sites are now beginning to utilize the 5 GHz spectrum as well as there are
more than 20 channels available and much less traffic. Since most clients only support 2.4 GHz, if
a network that utilizes Band Steering/Band Select sees a client capable of 2.4 GHz and 5 GHz
connections it will not let the client connect to the 2.4 GHz network. By doing this, the goal is to force
the client to move to the 5 GHz network and minimize connections on the 2.4 GHz network.
Vendor implementations of Band Steering vary widely, but each has its own perils and pitfalls from
the client’s perspective. This manifests itself as long roaming times (large gaps in connectivity while
moving around the hospital) and further inspection of log files shows little success connecting to 2.4
GHz Access Points (APs) while also showing consistent success connecting to 5 GHz APs.
There are other times where for other reasons (usually pertaining to timing settings on the wireless
controllers) having the client operate on one band or the other only instead of both is desirable.
When in doubt, utilize the 5 GHz band.
8.4.1.3 How To Use

If you have determined that Band Steering or Band Select (or another WLAN issue) may be harming
roaming performance you can set the system to utilize only one band or the other. Simply select the
radio button for 2.4 GHz only or 5 GHz only, save the change to the profile, and do a full system
reboot.

8.4.2 Roaming
Whereas previously adjustments to the roaming algorithm was done via the command line, the
parameters are now adjustable via the Roaming Tab in the wireless configuration screen. See
Figure 8-32.
Figure 8-32
8.4.2.1 Min. dB to attempt to connect

This field is used to establish the minimum connection threshold. If the best signal strength the
system hears from neighboring APs is not above this threshold the system will not attempt to
connect.
Default value is -75 dB, users should not have to adjust this value.

8.4.2.2 Min. dB to remain connected

This field is used to establish the threshold at which point the system will automatically disconnect
from an AP and search for a better connection if a roam has not already taken place.
Default value is -80 dB, users should not have to adjust this value.
8.4.2.3 Min. dB difference to roam to a new AP

This field is used to establish the roaming threshold. After scanning its environment, if the system
sees another access point (AP) that matches the network the system is assigned to that is at least
X dB better (where X is the Min. dB difference to roam to a new AP value) then the system will
attempt to roam to the new AP.
For example, if the value is set to 7 dB, our current RSSI is -70 dB, and the best AP we see that
matches the current profile is -63 dB, the system will attempt to roam to the new AP.
The default value is 7 dB. Environments with dense AP deployments or lots of sharp corners may
find they need to decrease this value in order to improve roaming performance.
8.4.2.4 Slow & Fast Scan Rate and Fast scan when signal is below threshold
The final three sliders on this page determine how often the client is performing background scans
to evaluate the RF environment. One of the primary jobs of the wireless software is to constantly
monitor the RF environment it is in to determine whether it is connected to the proper AP or whether
it is time to roam to a new one. The way our client does this is by doing what is called a background
scan. These sliders help determine how often that background scan is performed.
The Fast scan when signal is below threshold determines when the fast scan rate is used and when
the slow scan rate is used. If the signal strength of the current connection falls below this threshold,
the fast scan rate will be used. If the signal strength of the current connection is above this
threshold, the slow scan rate is used.
In dense installations of APs (APs are not spaced very far apart) it may be necessary to decrease
the fast scan rate to 4 seconds and the slow scan rate to 10 seconds so that the client can pick up
the new APs quickly as they become available.

8.4.3 Advanced
The final update to the user interface is the addition of the Advanced Tab (Figure 8-33).
Figure 8-33
8.4.3.1 Indications for Use

If the system is having trouble connecting to the network or has trouble maintaining a connection to
an 802.11n network you can now disable 802.11n mode for our system from the user interface.
Simply select the option for 802.11n Disabled, Commit, and do a full system reboot. The system will
now act as an 802.11 a/b/g client and won’t advertise 802.11n capabilities. This will simplify the
connection process and can increase stability.
Note: This only applies to systems with Intel 5200 and 6200 cards:
Rev 2 PCs will use Atheros 9280 based wireless cards manufactured by Compex, these do not
allow you to disable 802.11n.
The option to use software crypto moves the encryption process from the hardware on the wireless
chipset and into software. If after disabling 802.11n you are still having trouble maintaining
connectivity to the network try using the software crypto option. Check the box next to the option,
commit, and do a full system reboot.

Chapter 9 Replacement procedures
THE POTENTIAL FOR INJURY OR DEATH FROM ELECTRICAL AND

HAZARDS MECHANICAL HAZARDS IS HIGH. CAREFULLY READ AND FOLLOW
EXIST INSTRUCTIONS. ALWAYS LOTO THE SYSTEM BEFORE ATTEMPTING
SERVICE OF ANY KIND, AS DESCRIBED IN Chapter 1 Safety / Before You Begin.
Section 9.1 Cover management

9.1.1 Personnel requirements
Required persons: 1
Timing (min): Depends on cover

• Security Torx screw bit = 5427920
9.1.2.2 Consumables
• None
9.1.2.3 Replacement parts

Item: Cover
Quantity: Depends on cover
9.1.2.4 Safety
• None
9.1.2.5 Required conditions

• None
Chapter 9 Replacement procedures Page 237

9.1.3 Side cover removal

1. Loosen the 5 fasteners on the side cover(s) to be removed. See Figure 9-1.
2. Remove the side cover(s).
Figure 9-1 Side cover screws (left side shown)
9.1.4 Top cover removal

1. Remove the side covers. See Section 9.1.3 Side cover removal.
2. Remove the 3 cap screws from each side of the top cover. See Figure 9-2.
Figure 9-2 Top cover screws
Page 238 Section 9.1 Cover management

3. Lift the top cover and disconnect the 3 cables. See Figure 9-3.
Figure 9-3 Top cover cables
4. Remove the top cover.

9.1.5 Front cover removal
9.1.5.1 Right front cover removal

1. Remove the right side cover. See Section 9.1.3 Side cover removal.
2. See Figure 9-4. Remove the 2 mounting screws (Item 1) from the bottom cable exit cover (Item
2).
Item Description
1 Mounting screws (2 used)
2 Bottom cable exit cover
Figure 9-4 Bottom cable exit cover

3. Remove 2 mounting screws (Item 1) from the side of the cover. See Figure 9-5.
Item Description
1 Rear mounting screws (2 used)
2 Front mounting screw (1 used)
3 Right front cover
Figure 9-5 Right front cover
4. Remove 1 mounting screw (Item 2) at the front of the cover.

5. Slide the cover sideways to remove.

9.1.5.2 Left front cover removal

1. Remove the left side cover. See Section 9.1.3 Side cover removal.
2. Remove the 3 mounting screws (Item 1) from the breaker tray (Item 2). See Figure 9-6.
Item Description
2 Breaker tray
Figure 9-6 Breaker tray
3. Remove the breaker tray.

4. Remove 2 mounting screws (Item 1) from the side of the cover. See Figure 9-7.
Item Description
1 Rear mounting screws (2 used)
2 Front mounting screw (1 used)
3 Left front cover
Figure 9-7 Right front cover
5. Remove 1 mounting screw (Item 2) at the front of the cover.

6. Slide the cover (Item 3) sideways to remove.

9.1.6 Column skirt cover removal

1. Remove the left side cover and left front cover. See Section 9.1.5 Front cover removal.
2. Rotate the tube column to access one of the mounting screws (Item 1), then remove the
mounting screw. See Figure 9-8.
Item Description
1 Mounting screw
2 Column skirt cover
Figure 9-8 Column skirt cover
3. Rotate the tube column to access and remove the other mounting screw.
4. Remove the column skirt covers (Item 2).

9.1.7 Tube head cover removal

1. If the lower tube cover needs to be removed, the collimator must be removed first. See section
9.8.9 Collimator.
2. See Figure 9-9. Remove the 4 mounting screws (Item 1) from the bottom of the lower tube
cover (Item 2). The collimator can be rotated to provide access to the screws.
Item Description
1 Safety Torx screws (4 used)
2 Lower tube cover
3 Upper tube cover
4 Wireless USB Host Radio Board
5 X-ray tube
Figure 9-9 Tube covers
3. Remove the upper tube cover (Item 3).

4. Unplug the USB cable from the Wireless USB Host Radio Board (Item 4) - Optima XR220amx
or Optima XR200amx with digital upgrade only.
5. Remove the lower tube cover (Item 2).

9.1.8 Top cover or display & inverter collector

Required persons: 1
Timing (min): 60

• Anti-static (ESD) kit
• Cable ties

Item: Top cover or display & inverter collector
Quantity: 1
9.1.8.2.4 Safety
• None

• Remove the side covers and the top cover. See 9.1.4 Top cover removal.
• Perform LOTO on the system. See 1.2.2 Performing LOTO on page 28.

9.1.8.3 Procedure

LOTO must be performed. The mobile system is a battery-powered unit that can deliver lethal
current. Ensure you are not providing an earth ground path when practicing ESD procedures. See
Section 1.3 Electrostatic discharge (ESD) on page 32.
For top cover replacement, perform LOTO, remove appropriate cable connections, install new
cover. If the new top cover part number is 5555005-10 then you need to load the LUT. Please follow
instructions provided in finalization steps to load the LUT and perform finalization steps.
If replacing just the display & inverter, follow the steps listed below.
1. See Figure 9-10. On the rear of the top cover, locate the Hornet circuit board which is under a
metal cover (Item 4).
6
1
2 3 4
Figure 9-10 Board identification - top cover
Item Description
1 Display assembly mounting screws (7 screws: 3 on left, 4 on right)
2 Display inverter
3 Ferrite core
4 Hornet UIF board metal cover
5 Cable clamp location (cable clamp not shown)

Item Description
6 Board mounting plate screws (6 screws: 3 on each side)
7 Hornet to Overlay board cable
2. Disconnect two cables from the top of the Hornet board.

3. Remove the cable clamp (Item 5) from the large cable.
4. Disconnect the cable from the right side of the Hornet board.
5. On the left side of the Hornet board, unplug the other end of the cable from the display inverter
board (Item 2). Remove cable ties from the ferrite core (Item 3) and remove the core from the
cable.
6. Remove the 12 mounting nuts and tip the Hornet board metal cover (Item 4) to gain access to
the remaining cable. Disconnect the cable from the left side of the Hornet board. Route the
cable connector through the cover and remove the cover.
7. Disconnect the cable from the bottom of the Hornet board.
8. Remove the Hornet board (4 screws).
9. Disconnect the cable from the Overlay board (Item 7)
10. Remove the 4 small cables from the top and bottom of the Display inverter board (Item 2). Note
the colors of the cable wires (blue on the left, pink on the right).
11. Remove the 6 screws (3 on each side) and the board mounting plate. See Figure 9-11. Note
the locations of cable restraints and ground wires so that they can be properly placed upon re-
assembly.
Item Description
1 Board mounting plate
Figure 9-11 Board mounting plate
12. Remove the 7 display assembly mounting screws (Figure 9-10, Item 1) from the left and right
sides.
13. Remove the old display assembly and replace it with the new display assembly.
14. Install the 7 display assembly mounting screws.
15. Route the cable with 2 ferrite cores through the opening in the board mounting plate. Make
sure both ferrites are outside of the mounting plate before fastening it down.

16. Install the board mounting plate and 6 mounting screws.

- Be sure to attach all ground wires and cable clamps in the proper locations.
- Be careful not to trap any cables or wires underneath the plate.
17. Position the closest ferrite core into the opening in the board mounting plate. See Figure 9-12.
Item Description
1 Position one ferrite core in opening
Figure 9-12 Ferrite cores
18. Reconnect the 4 small cables to the Display inverter board (blue = left, pink = right).
19. Reconnect the cable to the Overlay board (Figure 9-10, Item 7).
20. Install the Hornet board (4 screws).
21. Connect the cable to the bottom of the Hornet board.
22. Route the left-side cable through the metal cover, plug it into the Hornet board, then install the
metal cover and mounting nuts.
23. Connect all remaining cables to the Hornet board.
24. Connect the other end of the left-side cable to the display inverter board. Re-install the ferrite
core onto the cable and secure with cable ties.
25. Re-install the cable clamp on the large cable.
26. Remove LOTO from the system. See 1.2.3 Returning system to service on page 31.
27. Install the top cover and side covers.
9.1.8.4 Finalization
1. If top cover part number is not 5555005-10, only perform calibration and test as below step 2
& 3 for Touchscreen and Generator operator indicators. If top cover part number is 5555005-
10, you must load the LUT by step 4 first and then perform the calibration and test as below
step 2 & 3.
2. Perform the following calibration:
- Touchscreen - see Section 5.2 Touchscreen calibration on page 111.

3. Perform the following HHS checks:

- Generator operator indicators - see 7.1.6 Testing generator operator indicators on
page 152
4. The detailed steps to load the LUT if the top cover is 5555005-10
A. Connect external CD/DVD drive to mobile unit.
B. Connect keyboard to mobile unit.
C. Insert CD/DVD (P/N 5589296) with LUTs into external CD/DVD drive.
Note: After top cover 5555005-10 was phased into production, CD/DVD (P/N 5589296) with LUTs is
shipped to customers together with system. If new top cover 5555005-10 is required by a system
which top cover is not 5555005-10, you need to order CD/DVD (P/N 5589296) together with new
top cover 5555005-10 for this system.
D. Open the engineering GUI on the mobile unit by pressing Ctrl+Shift+F5 together.
E. Press the terminal icon in the engineering GUI to open a terminal window.
F. In the terminal window, type the following commands step by step.
Step 1:mount /mnt/cdrom (enter)
Step 2:cd /tmp (enter)
Step 3:cp /mnt/cdrom/* /tmp (enter)
Step 4:./setlut.sh (enter)
Step 5:User is presented with the following statement---This script installs the correct LUT for
a given top cover. Top cover part numbers include 5555005-2, 5555005-8, 5555005-10. Enter
the part number of the top cover after the dash (suffix number). For example: “2”, “8”, “10”.
Step 6:Enter the number (suffix number) of the top cover (enter)
Step 7:Message is displayed after successful installation:Successfully copied LUT for
5555005-x (x is the number entered previously).
Step 8:eject
G. Remove CD/DVD from external CD/DVD drive.
H. Reboot the mobile unit.
Note: The LUT needs to be loaded anytime a software Load From Cold (LFC) is performed on a system
with the 5555005-10 top cover.

9.1.9 Power switch assembly

Required persons: 1
Timing (min): 20

• Loctite Super Bonder 416 Gap Filling Inst Adhesive (46-220312P1) or equivalent

Item: Power switch assembly
Quantity: 1
9.1.9.2.4 Safety
• None


9.1.9.3 Procedure

1. See Figure 9-13. Disconnect the power switch connector (Item 1).
2. Remove the 3 cable clamps (Item 2) from the power switch wires.
3. Disconnect the drive login cable (Item 6) from the Display Overlay Board (Item 4).
4. Disconnect the overlay board to Hornet board cable (Item 5) from the Display Overlay Board.
5. Remove the mountings screws (Item 3) from the Display Overlay Board.
3 5
6 4
2
2
Item Description
1 Power switch connector
2 Cable clamp (3 used)
4 Overlay board assembly
5 Overlay board to Hornet board cable
6 Drive login cable
Figure 9-13 Top cover components
6. Remove the Display Overlay Board and set aside.

7. See Figure 9-14. Remove the mounting nut (Item 1) from the rear of the power switch (Item 2)
using a pair of side cutters. The nut is secured in place with thread locker.
Item Description
1 Mounting nut
2 Power switch
Figure 9-14 Power switch
8. Remove the old power switch and replace with the new part. Install and secure the mounting
nut using a thread locker.
9. Install the Display Overlay Board and re-connect the cables.
10. Install the cable clamps (3).
11. Connect the power switch connector.
13. Install the top cover.
14. Install the side covers.
None

Section 9.2 Cable replacement

9.2.1 General cable replacement

Required persons: 1
Timing (min): Depends on cable

• Cable ties

Item: Cable
Quantity: Depends on cable
9.2.1.2.4 Safety
• None

• Remove covers to access the desired cable. See Section 9.1 Cover management.
9.2.1.3 Procedure

1. For cables that connect to the vertical column, horizontal arm, X-ray tube, collimator or DAP,
remove the zip ties and unzip/remove the cable cover.
2. Mark the location of all cable restraints on the old cable.
3. Cut or remove the cable restraints from the old cable.
4. Disconnect and remove the old cable.
5. Transfer the locations of the cable restraint marks from the old cable to the new cable.
6. Install and connect the new cable.
7. Install the cable restraints on the new cable.
Page 254 Section 9.2 Cable replacement

9. Install the covers.
10. Re-install the cable cover and zip ties. See Cable cover installation on page 271.
See Table 9-1 to determine required tests.
Table 9-1 Test matrix for cable replacement
Cable being replaced Tests that must be performed

Aux Box to Rotor Cable Assembly Functional Checks:
(See 9.2.2 High voltage cable replacement on • X-ray (see X-ray on page 43)
page 259 for the correct cable bundle
arrangement for the HV cable clamp)
Aux Box to Rotor Jumper Cable Functional Checks:
• X-ray (see X-ray on page 43)
Col Bulkhead to DAP Cable Assembly Functional Checks:
(See 9.2.2 High voltage cable replacement on • X-ray - Dose report (see X-ray on page 43)
Cable Assy- Spyder to Hornet HHS Checks:
• Generator operator indicators (see
on page 152)
Cable Assy- Spyder to Locust Functional Checks:
• Drive (see Drive on page 42)
Cable Assy- Spyder to Djinn Functional Checks:
Cable Assy- Spyder to LVLE2 Functional Checks:
• Charging (see Charging on page 41)
• Light field buttons (see Collimator on
page 36)
Cable Assy- Spyder to Firefly Functional Checks:
Cable Assy - Spyder to Wired Handswitch Functional Checks:
Cable Assy- LVLE2 to Firefly Functional Checks:
(there are 2 separate cables) • Charging (see Charging on page 41)
Cable Assy- Locust to LVLE2 Functional Checks:
page 36)
Cable Assy- LVLE2 to Djinn Functional Checks:


Cable Assy - LVLE2 to DPM-PC Functional Checks:
• X-ray (see X-ray on page 43), ensure
images are created
Cable Assy- Locust to Caterpillar Functional Checks:
(there are 2 separate cables) • Drive (see Drive on page 42)
Cable Assy - Locust to Drive Handle Functional Checks:
Cable Assy - Locust to Cricket Functional Checks:
• Drive - see Drive on page 42
Cable Assy - Hornet to Display HHS Checks:
on page 152)
Cable Assy - Mantis to Firefly Functional Checks:
Cable Assy - Cricket to Firefly Functional Checks:
Cable Assy - Cricket to Djinn Functional Checks:
Cable Assy - Cricket to Breaker Functional Checks:
Cable Assy - Locust to Park Latch Functional Checks:
• Drive (speed limited when tube not latched)
(see Drive on page 42)
Cable Assy - Caterpillar to Bumper Functional Checks:
• Drive - see Drive on page 42
Cable Assy - Caterpillar to Rot Brake Functional Checks:
• Drive (brake solenoids) (see Drive on
page 42)
• Tube column & arm (locks & latches) (see
Tube Column and Arm on page 42)
Cable Assy - Hornet to Inverter HHS Checks:
on page 152)
Cable Assy - Hornet to Overlay Board HHS Checks:
on page 152)
Cable Assy - Drive Login to Overlay Board Functional Checks:
• Drive (drive login) (see Drive on page 42)
Cable Assy - Firefly to Power Switch Functional Checks:


Cable Assy - Firefly to CLS J1 Functional Checks:
page 36)
Cable Assy - Firefly to CLS HHS Checks:
• Light field intensity (see 7.1.3.1 Testing light
intensity on page 138)
Cable Assy - Mantis to Filter Functional Checks:
Cable Assy - Fuse to Filter HHS Checks:
• Grounding (see 7.2.1 Perform Ground
Resistance Testing on page 153)
• Leakage (see 7.2.2 Performing Leakage
Current Testing on page 164)
Cable Assy - Locust to Hard Brake Release Functional Checks:
• Drive (brake solenoids) (see Drive on
page 42)
Cable Assy - DPS to PC-Backup Tether Functional Checks:
• X-ray (see X-ray on page 43), ensure
images are created
Cable Assy - Locust to Thorax Column Functional Checks:
Bulkhead • Tube column & arm (locks & latches) (see
(See 9.2.2 High voltage cable replacement on Tube Column and Arm on page 42)
Cable Asm - Detector Power Supply to None
Detector charge cable (surge-limit cable
assembly)
Cable Asm - Surge-limit cable assembly to None
Detector charge bin connector
Cable Assy - Spyder to Speaker Functional Checks:
• X-ray (sounds & tones) (see X-ray on
page 43)
Cable Assy - Sypder to Thorax Column Functional Checks:
Bulkhead -DAP- • X-ray (dose report) (see X-ray on page 43)
Cable Assy - CLS to Thorax Column Bulkhead HHS Checks:
-Collimator- • Light field intensity (see 7.1.3.1 Testing light
intensity on page 138)
Cable Assy- Spyder to PC video cable None
Cable Assy - Spyder to PC USB None
Cable Assy - PC to Ethernet Bulkhead None
Cable Assy - PC to USB Bulkhead None


Cable Assy - PC to UWB Antenna None
(See 9.2.2 High voltage cable replacement on
Cable Assy - Caterpillar interconnect harness Functional Checks:
to Detector Park Switch pigtail • Drive (speed limited in tethered mode
Cable Assy - Detector Park Switch pigtail to Functional Checks:
Caterpillar interconnect harness • Drive (speed limited in tethered mode
Cable Assy - Detector Bin Charge connector Functional Checks:
to interconnect cable from Surge Assembly • Drive (speed limited in tethered mode
Cable Assy - Spyder Dose Reporting to USB None
Bulkhead
Handswitch Cable - N9 Color Functional Checks:

9.2.2 High voltage cable replacement

Required persons: 1
Timing (min): 60

• Cable ties

Item: HV cable(s)
Quantity: 1 or 2
9.2.2.2.4 Safety
• None

• Remove the side covers and the front covers. See 9.1.5 Front cover removal.
• Remove the front bin. See 9.1.6 Column skirt cover removal.
9.2.2.3 Procedure
1. Remove the zip ties and unzip/remove the cable cover.
2. On the existing cable(s) to be replaced, mark the cable(s) at the position of each cable clamp
and cable tie.
3. Remove the HV cable clamp mounting screws. See Figure 9-15.

Item Description
4. Remove the clamp from the HV cable bundle. See Figure 9-16.
5. See Figure 9-17. Loosen the set screw(s) (see Figure 9-18) in the HV cable tightening ring(s)
at the Djinn HV tank. Loosen and remove the tightening ring(s) and pull the cable(s) out of the
tank.

Item Description
1 Anode HV cable (not visible)
2 Cathode HV cable
3 Ferrite (one on each HV cable)
Figure 9-17 Djinn tank - HV cables
Item Description
1 HV cable tightening ring set screw
Figure 9-18 Djinn tank - tightening ring set screw

6. See Figure 9-19. Remove the cable clamps (Item 1) from the side of the horizontal arm (Item
3) and vertical column (Item 4) and cut the cable ties (Item 2) from the cable(s) to be replaced.
3
2 1
2
4
Item Description
1 Cable clamps
2 Cable ties
3 Horizontal arm
4 Vertical column
Figure 9-19 Cable clamps and ties
7. Use a HV spanner wrench to loosen and remove the HV cable tightening ring(s) at the X-ray
tube. Pull the cable(s) out of the tube.
8. Lay the old cable down next to the new cable and transfer the cable clamp and cable tie
position marks over to the new cable. If both cables are being replaced, be sure to pair up
anode cables and cathode cables.
9. Remove the ferrites (see Figure 9-17, Item 3) from the old HV cables and install them in the
same locations on the new HV cables.
Note: Some of the original systems had HV cables that are approximately 250mm (10 inches) shorter than
the replacement HV cables. Distribute the additional cable length as follows (see Figure 9-20):
• Add 75mm (3 inches) in Loop 1 (Item 1) between the two plastic cable clamps on the horizontal
arm (Item 3) and vertical column (Item 4).
• Add 175mm (7 inches) in Loop 2 (Item 2) between the plastic clamp on the vertical column
(Item 4) and the clamp near the Djinn HV tank (Item 5).

Item Description
1 Loop 1 - Add 75mm (3 inches)
2 Loop 2 - Add 175mm (7 inches)
3 Cable clamp on the horizontal arm
4 Cable clamp on the vertical column
5 Cable clamp near Djinn HV Tank
Figure 9-20 HV cables
Note: HV cables must be lubricated with silicone grease (GE P/N 46-125224P3 or equivalent) before
insertion into the X-ray tube HV wells.
10. Insert the new cable(s) into the X-ray tube HV well(s). Make sure that the cable marking (Tube
Anode or Tube Cathode) matches up with the X-ray tube marking (Anode or Cathode).
Route the cable(s) along the vertical column and horizontal arm, installing cable clamps and
cable ties at the marked positions.
If the new HV cables are longer than the old cables, be sure to distribute the extra length as
shown in Figure 9-20.
11. At the rear of the X-ray tube, route the cables and apply cable ties as shown in Figure 9-21,
Figure 9-22 and Figure 9-23.
C
A
3
1
Item Description
1 Cathode high voltage cable
2 Wireless detector cable (digital systems only)
3 Collimator cable
4 DAP cable (standard on Optima XR220amx, optional on Optima XR200amx)
Figure 9-21 Cable identification at Anode side of X-ray tube

2 1
Item Description
1 Anode high voltage cable
2 Stator cable
Figure 9-22 Cable identification at Cathode side of X-ray tube
Anode Side Cathode Side

Figure 9-23 Cable routing at rear of X-ray tube
Note: HV cables must be lubricated with silicone oil (GE P/N LNR8733) before insertion into the tank HV
wells. See Figure 9-24.

Figure 9-24 Lubricate HV cables
12. Insert the new cable(s) into the Djinn HV tank well(s). Make sure that the cable marking (Djinn
Anode or Djinn Cathode) matches up with the HV tank marking (Anode or Cathode). See
Figure 9-17. Tighten the HV cable tightening ring(s), then tighten the set screw(s) in the ring(s)
(see Figure 9-18).
clamp.
C
1 2
4 3
Item Description

18. Install the system covers.
Perform the following HHS checks:
• mAs accuracy - see 7.1.4.3 Testing mAs accuracy on page 146.

9.2.3 “Super cable” 5557068 cable replacement

Some early production units were shipped with cable assembly 5557068 (see Figure 9-26). This
cable assembly consisted of a bundle of the following individual cables:
• Locust to LVLE2
• Locust to Caterpillar
• Locust to Park Latch
The original cable (5557068) is not available as a replacement part and must be replaced with the
individual cables as identified above.
State: RELEASE - Document is released and under formal Change Control. Changes are subject to the ECR/ECO Process.
See the GEHC Myworkshop System to determine the status of this document.
Approved Document - 5557068ADW_r3.pdf Page 2 of 2
Figure 9-26 “Super cable” 5550768

Required persons: 1
Timing (min): 120

• Cable ties


Item: Cable assemblies (need all three cables to replace ’Super cable’ 5557068):
- Locust to LVLE2
- Locust to Caterpillar
- Locust to Park Latch
Quantity: 1 each
9.2.3.2.4 Safety
• None

• Remove the side covers, top cover and the rear bin. See 9.6.2 Rear bin removal on page 311.
9.2.3.3 Procedure

See Section 9.2.1 General cable replacement on page 254 for generic cable replacement steps.
1. Remove the 7 fasteners (4 nuts, 3 cap screws) and heat shield from the right side of the unit.
See Figure 9-27.
Figure 9-27 Heat shield

2. Remove the existing ’super cable’.

3. Install the three replacement cables (Locust to LVLE2, Locust to Caterpillar, Locust to Park
Latch).
4. Install cable ties on the new cables.
5. Install the heat shield.
Perform the following tests:
• Cable Assy - Locust to LVLE2 - see Table 9-1.
• Cable Assy - Locust to Caterpillar - see Table 9-1.
• Cable Assy - Locust to Park Latch - see Table 9-1.

Section 9.3 Cable cover installation

1. The cable cover and several zip ties are required. See Figure 9-28.
Figure 9-28 Cable cover and zip ties
2. Place cover over cables and close all five zippers shut. See Figure 9-29.
Figure 9-29 Install and zip cover

3. Install zip ties through openings on all three ends of cable cover. Secure ties tightly and clip
away excess tie wrap material. Push cable cover in as far as possible where cables enter body
of unit. See Figure 9-30.
Figure 9-30 Install zip ties at ends of cover
4. Orientate cover as desired so that zippers and junctions are best hidden. See Figure 9-31.
Figure 9-31 Conceal zippers and junctions
Section 9.4 Software Load From Cold

See Chapter 3 System data and software on page 49.
Page 272 Section 9.4 Software Load From Cold

Section 9.5 Base assembly

9.5.1 Drive wheel

Required persons: 1 or 2
Timing (min): 30

• 3 - 2 x 4 inch wood blocks (or equivalent)
• 1 - 3 ft.to 4 ft. (1.0 to 1.2 m) wood lever (or equivalent)
(Lever to be construction grade or better with no splits, bowing, and free from knots)

Item: Drive wheel
Quantity: 1
9.5.1.2.4 Safety
• PPE - Gloves
• PPE - Kneeling pad
TIPPING HAZARD
TIPPING THE POTENTIAL FOR SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH EXISTS. ENSURE WORK AREA IS FREE
AND CLEAR OF ANY PERSONS OR OBJECTS WITHIN A 3 METER RANGE OF THE SYSTEM.

• Remove the side cover for the wheel that requires replacement. See 9.1.3 Side cover removal.
• Remove the front cover for the wheel that requires replacement. See 9.1.5 Front cover
removal.
• Tube arm must be in the latched position.

TIPPING HAZARD
Tipping FAILURE TO LATCH THE TUBE ARM WILL RESULT IN A CHANGE OF THE CENTER OF
GRAVITY OF THE SYSTEM. THIS CAN RESULT IN UNCONTROLLED LIFT AND TIPPING OF
THE SYSTEM.
9.5.1.3 Procedure
1. A fulcrum and lever will be used to create a controlled lift of the system. See Figure 9-32 for
the dimensional representation.
Figure 9-32 Lever and fulcrum locations
Page 274 Section 9.5 Base assembly

Note: For system stability, the position of the support block is important. The support point must
be close to the wheel to be replaced. See Figure 9-33.
Support
Block
Position
Drive Wheel
Replacement
Figure 9-33 Drive wheel lift and support
The following steps are a generic representation of how to lift the system. Ensure the fulcrum, lever
and support blocks are positioned correctly for the wheel being replaced.
2. Prepare the two 2 x 4 inch blocks. Secure them together using tape or screws. (Screws have
been used in these examples.)

3. Position single 2 x 4 inch block approximately 4 inches from the vertical face of the battery box.
Place lever approximately 2 inches under battery box, perpendicular to the vertical face of the
battery box. Ensure the lever is fully supported on the fulcrum. See Figure 9-34.
Figure 9-34 Lift and support unit
4. While applying downward pressure onto the end of the lever (see Figure 9-35 - left), position
the two 2 x 4 support blocks under the other corner of the battery box (see Figure 9-35 - right).
Note: This example uses a one person standing position. This is simpler if two people are available.
5. Place aside the lever and fulcrum as needed for the remaining steps.

6. Remove the 8 mounting screws (Item 1) from the drive wheel (Item 2). See Figure 9-36.
Item 1
Item 2
Figure 9-36 Drive wheel and mounting screws
7. Remove the drive wheel from the shaft.

8. Slide the new drive wheel onto the shaft.
9. Apply thread locker to the mounting screws. Install the mounting screws, finger-tight only.
Make several passes, slightly tightening the screws in an alternating pattern until all the screws
are fully seated. Torque to 3 N-m (2.2 lb-ft).
10. Lift the unit and remove the support blocks.
None
9.5.2 Battery packs

Required persons: 1
Timing (hours): 13

• None


Item: Battery pack
Quantity: 1 to 4 as required
9.5.2.2.4 Safety
• Weight of an individual battery is approximately 22.7 kg (50 lbs).

• Remove the side covers. See 9.1.3 Side cover removal.
• Dedicated location for Battery Integration Procedure.
9.5.2.3 Procedure
1. See Figure 9-37. Remove the battery compartment covers (Item 1) from both sides (4 screws
on each cover).
Item Description
1 Battery compartment cover (left side shown)
Figure 9-37 Battery compartment covers

2. See Figure 9-38. On the Cricket battery board, loosen the connector screws on the J1/J2 (left
side) and the J3/J4 power connectors (Item 1 - right side), then unplug the cables.
Item Description
2 Battery sensing connectors (J13, J14)
Figure 9-38 Battery connectors (right side shown)6
3. On the Cricket battery board, unplug the cables from the sensing connectors J11/J12 (left
side) and J13/J14 (Item 2 - right side).
4. On each side, remove the top battery and then the bottom battery from the battery
compartment.
5. Install the new batteries in the battery compartment.
6. Route the power and sensing cables through the cutouts in the chassis and plug them into the
Cricket battery board (the upper battery cables go to the upper connectors on the Cricket
battery board). Tighten down the connector screws for J1, J2, J3, J4 connectors.
7. Install the battery compartment covers. The tabs in the covers are intended to hold the
batteries in the proper location and should be positioned towards the front of the unit. If the
covers will not fit correctly, reposition the batteries to provide proper clearance.
If the cover holes do not line up properly, rotate the cover 180 degrees (it is upside down).
9.5.2.3.1 Battery Integration Procedure

1. Before you restore the system power you must configure the unit in “Safe Mode” charge.
2. Set jumper J17 on the Firefly board to the “Safe” position (pins 2 and 3).

Figure 9-39 Normal Charging Mode Jumper Position
3. Install the system covers.

4. Ensure the circuit breaker is on.
5. Connect to an AC source.
6. Ensure the system is turned off.
Note: The Safe Mode is basically a trickle charger. If the system is on, the current draw on the batteries
is greater than the charging current. This will result in a slow depletion of the remaining battery
charge.
7. Allow unit to charge undisturbed for 8 hours (overnight is recommended).

8. Disconnect the AC plug from the AC source.
9. Perform LOTO.
10. Set jumper J17 on the Firefly board to the “Normal” position (pins 1 and 2).
11. Remove LOTO.
12. Ensure the circuit breaker is on.
14. Connect to an AC source.

15. Allow unit to charge undisturbed for approximately 5 hours.

It is important for the system to charge at least 1 hour after the battery meter shows 100%
charge. The synchronization of the battery meter to the actual battery state of charge occurs
in the last phase of the charging cycle.
1. Perform the following functional checks:
- Charging - see Charging on page 41
- Bus voltage level - The system batteries shall produce an open circuit voltage of 156VDC
+/-5V when fully charged and less than 1 year old. Measure battery voltage on the Cricket
Battery Board, at test points TP7 and TP6. See Figure 9-40.
Item Description
1 Cricket battery board
2 Chassis ground test point - TP6
3 Battery voltage test point - TP7
Figure 9-40 Battery voltage measurement

2. Install the front covers.

9.5.3 Front bumper assembly or bumper switch

Required persons: 1
Timing (min): 30

• None

Item: Front bumper assembly
Quantity: 1
or
Item: Front bumper switch
Quantity: 1 or 2
9.5.3.2.4 Safety
• None

• Remove the side covers and front covers. See 9.1.5 Front cover removal.

9.5.3.3 Procedure
9.5.3.3.1 Front bumper assembly
Figure 9-41 Front bumper assembly
1. See Figure 9-42. Using long-nose pliers, remove the extension springs (Item 1) from the cap
screws on both sides.

4 2
6
Item Description
1 Extension spring
2 Front bumper slot closure
3 Switch
4 Switch arm mounting nut
5 Switch arm
6 Front bumper
7 Adjustment screw
Figure 9-42 Front bumper assembly - top view
2. Remove the front bumper slot closure (Item 2). There are 2 mounting nuts that must be
removed from underneath the chassis.
3. Remove the wires from the switches (Item 3 - both sides).
4. Remove the mounting nuts (Item 4 - both sides) from the switch arms (Item 5 - both sides).
5. Lift the switch arms off of the mounting studs and guide the ends of the switch arms through
the slots in the chassis.
6. Slide the front bumper and attached parts (Item 6) out of the front of the unit.
7. On the new front bumper assembly, remove the mounting nuts (Item 4 - both sides) from the
switch arms (Item 5 - both sides). Lift the switch arms off of the mounting studs.
8. Slide the new front bumper and attached parts (Item 6) in from the front of the unit.

9. Guide the ends of the switch arms (Item 5 - both sides) through the slots in the chassis, then
place the switch arms onto the mounting studs and install the mounting nuts (Item 4 - both
sides).
10. Connect the wires to the switches (Item 3 - both sides). The wires are connected to the
common (COM) and normally open (NO) terminals on the switches.
11. Install the front bumper slot closure (Item 2). There are 2 mounting nuts that must be installed
from underneath the chassis.
12. Using long-nose pliers, install the extension springs (Item 1 - both sides).
13. Adjust the adjustment screw (Item 7) to just remove any side-to-side play of the front bumper
assembly.
14. Install the front covers and side covers.
9.5.3.3.2 Front bumper switch

1. See Figure 9-42. Remove the wires from the switch to be replaced (Item 3 - left and/or right).
2. Remove the mounting nuts (2) from the switch.
3. Replace the old switch with the new switch, install and tighten the mounting nuts.Torque to
0.56 N-m (0.41 lb-ft)
4. Connect the wires to the switch. The wires are connected to the common (COM) and normally
open (NO) terminals on the switches.
6. Install the front covers and side covers.
Perform the following functional checks:
• Drive (all tests) - see Drive on page 42.
9.5.4 Front caster

Required persons: 1 or 2
Timing (min): 30

• 3 - 2 x 4 inch wood blocks (or equivalent)
• 1 - 3 ft. to 4 ft. (1.0 to 1.2 m) wood lever (or equivalent)
(Lever to be construction grade or better with no splits, bowing, and free from knots)
• None

Item: Front caster

Quantity: 1
9.5.4.2.4 Safety
• PPE - Gloves
• PPE - Kneeling pad
TIPPING HAZARD
TIPPING THE POTENTIAL FOR SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH EXISTS. ENSURE WORK AREA IS FREE
AND CLEAR OF ANY PERSONS OR OBJECTS WITHIN A 3 METER RANGE OF THE SYSTEM.

• Remove the side cover for the caster that requires replacement. See 9.1.3 Side cover removal.
• Remove the front cover for the caster that requires replacement. See 9.1.5 Front cover
removal.
• Tube arm must be in the latched position.
TIPPING HAZARD
TIPPING FAILURE TO LATCH THE TUBE ARM WILL RESULT IN A CHANGE OF THE CENTER OF
GRAVITY OF THE SYSTEM. THIS CAN RESULT IN UNCONTROLLED LIFT AND TIPPING OF
THE SYSTEM.

9.5.4.3 Procedure
1. A fulcrum and lever will be used to create a controlled lift of the system. See Figure 9-43 for
the dimensional representation.
Figure 9-43 Lever and fulcrum locations

Note: For system stability, the position of the support block is important. The support point must
be close to the caster to be replaced. See Figure 9-44.
Support
Block
Position
Front Caster
Replacement
Figure 9-44 Front caster lift and support
The following steps are a generic representation of how to lift the system. Ensure the fulcrum, lever
and support blocks are positioned correctly for the caster being replaced.
2. Prepare the two 2 x 4 inch blocks. Secure them together using tape or screws. (Screws have
been used in these examples.)

3. Position single 2 x 4 inch block approximately 4 inches from the vertical face of the battery box.
Place lever approximately 2 inches under battery box, perpendicular to the vertical face of the
battery box. Ensure the lever is fully supported on the fulcrum. See Figure 9-45.
4. While applying downward pressure onto the end of the lever (see Figure 9-46 - left), position
the two 2 x 4 support blocks under the other corner of the battery box (see Figure 9-46 - right).
Note: This example uses a one person standing position. This is simpler if two people are available.
5. Place aside the lever and fulcrum as needed for the remaining steps.

6. See Figure 9-47. At the top of the caster (Item 1), remove the 4 mounting nuts from the studs.
Item 1
Figure 9-47 Caster location
7. Slightly tip the caster, and remove it from the unit.

8. Install the new caster onto the studs.
9. Install and tighten the mounting nuts.
None
9.5.5 Spring applied brake (column rotational brake)

Required persons: 1
Timing (min): 45

• Cable ties

Item: Spring applied brake

Quantity: 1
9.5.5.2.4 Safety
• None

• Remove the left side cover and left front cover. See 9.1.5 Front cover removal.

9.5.5.3 Procedure
1. See Figure 9-48. Use a 3mm allen wrench to remove the four mounting screws (Item 2) from
the bottom of the column rotation lock assembly (Item 1).
2 2
2 2
Item Description
1 Column rotation lock assembly
3 Nut
Figure 9-48 Column rotation lock assembly (bottom view)
2. Remove the nut (Item 3) from the lock assembly. The assembly should easily come off of the
tapered shaft, but could require gentle prying with a screwdriver to release it.
3. Unplug the lock assembly cable connector and cut any cable ties as required to remove the
cable. The connector is located on top of the base assembly, behind the vertical column.
Rotate the column to a position that allows maximum access to the connector.
4. Remove the old lock assembly from the unit.
5. Route the cable from the new lock assembly up through the access hole in the base and plug
it into the connector. Install new cable ties to replace those removed in Step 3 above. Verify
that the cable routing prevents the column from rubbing against the cable during rotation.
6. Place the lock assembly on the shaft and install the nut (finger-tighten only).
7. Position the lock assembly so that the cable is oriented towards the rear of the unit.
8. Install and tighten the four mounting screws (Item 2) 1/4 turn past snug. No need to over-
tighten.
9. Tighten the nut (Item 3). Torque to 25N-m (18.5lb-ft).
11. Install the front cover and side cover.

• Tube column and arm (locks & latches) - see Tube Column and Arm on page 42.
9.5.6 Column support assembly

Required persons: 2
Timing (min): 210

• Cable ties
• HV Tube Grease (GE part# 46-125224P3, Silicon Grease) or equivalent

Item: Column support assembly
Quantity: 1
9.5.6.2.4 Safety
• The column vertical lock must be engaged before any weight (i.e. horizontal arm, X-ray tube,
collimator) is removed from the vertical carriage.

• Remove the side covers and front covers. See 9.1.5 Front cover removal on page 240.
• Remove the zip ties and unzip/remove the cable cover.
• Remove the column skirt covers. See 9.1.6 Column skirt cover removal on page 244.
• Lock the vertical carriage. See 9.8.1 Engaging vertical lock on page 420.
• Remove the collimator. See 9.8.9.1 Collimator replacement on page 461.
• Remove the X-ray tube. See 9.8.8 Canon X-ray tube on page 457.
• Remove the horizontal arm. See 9.8.3 Horizontal arm assembly on page 432.
• Remove the Column. See 9.8.2 Column on page 423.

9.5.6.3 Procedure
1. Identify the parts used in this procedure. See Figure 9-49 and Figure 9-50.
1 2
5
4
6
Item Description
1 Rotational Detent Arm (spring loaded)
2 Eccentric Stud Nut
3 Column Support Assembly
4 Column Mount Trap Spacer (bracket)
5 Allen wrench used to hold Rotational Detent Arm out
6 Spring Applied Brake electric cable
Figure 9-49 Parts Description (underside)

1
5
3
4
Item Description
1 Column Inner Sleeve
2 Column Mounting Bolt hole
3 Eccentric Stud
4 Rotational Detent Arm (spring loaded)
5 Base of Thorax
Figure 9-50 Parts Description (topside)
2. Disconnect the Spring Applied Brake electrical connection and feed cable to bottom side of
base assembly. See Figure 9-49.
3. See Figure 9-49 and Figure 9-51. Locate the Column Mount Trap Spacer Bracket on the
underside of the system. Remove the two lower nuts, and two cap head screws. Then remove
the Column Mount Trap Spacer Bracket.

Figure 9-51 Column Mount Trap Spacer Bracket
HEAVY WEIGHT: THE COLUMN SUPPORT ASSEMBLY WEIGHS APPROXIMATELY 25LBS

(11.3KG) AND COULD CAUSE INJURY IT IF FALLS ON YOUR BODY. USE APPROPRIATE
TOOLS TO LOWER THE ASSEMBLY IF NEEDED.
4. See Figure 9-52. From the underside of the system remove the four nuts holding the Column
Support Assembly. Do not remove the Eccentric Stud Nut used on the Rotational Detent Arm.
Note you will need to support the weight of the Column Support Assembly while removing
these nuts to prevent the assembly from falling. You may also consider leaving some of the
nuts partially threaded to hold the Column Support Assembly up while performing the next
step.

1 2
Item Description
1 Remove these nuts
2 DO NOT REMOVE THIS NUT
Figure 9-52 Four nuts holding the Column Support Assembly
5. Lower the Column Support Assembly from the thorax. Since the assembly aligns with the four
studs, it has to be lowered evenly. You may need to pry the assembly down with a large
screwdriver if it does not come down easily.
6. See Figure 9-53 and Figure 9-54. Apply thread locker to the four studs. Lift new Column
Support Assembly into position. Torque the four nuts holding the casting to the base to 25.0
N-m (18.44 ft-lb).

1 1
Item Description
1 Apply thread locker to studs
Figure 9-53 Apply thread locker to studs before installing new Column Support Assembly

1
1
Item Description
1 Torque nuts to 25.0 N-m (18.44 ft-lb)
Figure 9-54 Lifting the Column Support Assembly into place
7. See Figure 9-55. Apply thread locker and attach the four fasteners holding the Column Mount
Spacer (Bracket) to the system. It's recommended that all four fasteners be hand tightened
first, and then they can all be torqued to 20.0 N-m (14.75 ft-lb).

1 1
Item Description
1 Torque fasteners to 20.0 N-m (14.75 ft-lb)
Figure 9-55 Fasteners holding the Column Mount Trap Spacer (Bracket)
8. See Figure 9-56 and Figure 9-57. Use a large screwdriver at the base of the Thorax to move
the spring-loaded column rotational detent arm (Figure 9-55) toward the front of the unit. From
underneath the base, insert a 4mm (5/32") Allen wrench into the hole in the cover (Figure 9-
56) to hold the rotational detent arm away from the column.

Item Description
1 Pry out detent arm
Figure 9-56 Prying the Rotational Detent Arm out with a flathead screwdriver

Item Description
1 Insert Allen wrench here
Figure 9-57 Inserting the Allen wrench to hold the Rotational Detent Arm out
9. See Figure 9-58. Ensure the main column mounting bolt hole is facing the general direction of
the front bumper, this will make the installation of the column mounting bolt easier. If needed,
rotate the Column Inner Sleeve by hand to face the bolt hole towards the front of the system.
a. To rotate by hand, you must remove the brake assembly. Note, this may not be necessary
as the replacement part should already be pre-positioned.
b. See 9.5.5 Spring applied brake (column rotational brake) on page 290.
c. Re-install the brake assembly before attempting to install the column.

45 degrees 45 degrees
Item Description
1 Position bolt hole towards the front
Bolt hole position range +/- 45 degrees from center as shown
Figure 9-58 Ensuring the Column Bolt Hole is facing the front of the system
10. Using two people lift the column into position on the chassis and install the column mounting
bolt. Torque to 90 N-m (66.4 ft-lb), no thread locker is used.
11. Pry out the Rotational Detent Arm with a Flathead screwdriver and remove the Allen wrench
that was used to hold the rotational detent arm out.
12. Install the cable bracket onto the column.
13. Install the horizontal arm and the X-ray tube. See 9.8.3 Horizontal arm assembly on page 432.
See Figure 9-21, Figure 9-22 and Figure 9-23 for cable routing at the rear of the X-ray tube.
14. Install the collimator. See 9.8.9 Collimator on page 461.
15. Install cable brackets and cable ties.
Examine the steel cables at the top of the column to ensure proper tension has been maintained
prior to unlocking the vertical carriage. If the safety lock has been engaged, disengaging the vertical
carriage lock can result in uncontrolled cable tension and/or equipment damage, resulting in column
replacement. For details on releasing the safety lock, see Column Replacement, 9.8.2.3 Procedure
on page 423.
16. Unlock the vertical carriage. See 9.8.1 Engaging vertical lock on page 420.
17. Check and adjust the mechanical alignment of the column rotational detent position. See
6.1.3 Column rotational detent procedure on page 133.
18. Install the column top cover. See 9.1.4 Top cover removal on page 238.
19. Install the column skirt covers. See 9.1.6 Column skirt cover removal on page 244.
21. Install the front covers. See 9.1.5 Front cover removal on page 240.
22. Install the side covers. See 9.1.3 Side cover removal on page 238.
1. Perform the following mechanical alignments:
- Check and adjust the mechanical alignment of the column rotational detent position. See
- Check and adjust the mechanical alignment of the park latch assembly and arm yoke for
the arm retracted position for smooth and repeatable operation. See 6.1.2 Tube latch to
arm pin adjustment procedure on page 130.
- Check and adjust the Column Balance. See 6.1.1 Column balance procedure on
page 127.
- Light field to X-ray field alignment - see 7.1.3.2 Testing light field to X-ray field alignment
on page 139
- Tube column and arm - see Tube Column and Arm on page 42.
- X-ray - see X-ray on page 43.
4. This step applies to Optima XR220amx and Optima XR200amx with digital upgrade systems
only:
- Perform QAP. See the Optima XR220amx Operator Manual, Quality Assurance and
Maintenance chapter.
9.5.7 Motor brake and motor reducer assembly

Required persons: 1
Timing (min): 30

• None

Item: Motor reducer assembly and/or motor brake
Quantity: 1

9.5.7.2.4 Safety
• None

• Remove the side covers and the rear bin. See 9.6.2 Rear bin removal.
• Remove the drive wheels. See 9.5.1 Drive wheel.

9.5.7.3 Procedure

1. See Figure 9-59. Disconnect the three cables running from the motor/brake assembly to the
Caterpillar board (Item 1).
Item Description
1 Caterpillar base transition board
2 Steel counterweight
Figure 9-59 Caterpillar board

2. See Figure 9-60. Remove the eight motor mounting screws (Item 3) and the motor/brake
assembly (Items 4 & 6).
3 2
6
1
Item Description
1 Drive wheel mounting screws (8 used)
2 Drive wheel
3 Motor mounting screws (8 used)
4 Motor
5 Brake mounting screws (4 used)
6 Brake
Figure 9-60 Drive assembly (right side shown)
3. Before removing the brake, note the position of the cable exiting the brake so that the brake
can be mounted to the new motor in the same orientation.
4. Remove the brake mounting screws (Item 5) and the brake (Item 6) from the motor (Item 4).
5. Install the brake onto the motor (the brake should be positioned so that the cable comes out
towards the top). Torque to 3 N-m (2.2 lb-ft).
6. Install the motor/brake assembly into the chassis. Install the eight mounting screws and tighten
them in an alternating pattern. Torque to 5 N-m (3.7 lb-ft).
7. Plug the three cables into the Caterpillar board.
The left motor/brake assembly cables plug into connectors J3, J4, and J7.
The right motor/brake assembly cables plug into connectors J5, J6, and J9.
8. Install the drive wheel onto the hub, install the eight mounting screws and tighten them in an
alternating pattern. Torque to 3 N-m (2.2 lb-ft).
10. Install the rear bin.
None

9.5.8 Caterpillar base transition board

Required persons: 1
Timing (min): 105

• None

Item: Caterpillar base transition circuit board
Quantity: 1
9.5.8.2.4 Safety
• None


9.5.8.3 Procedure

1. Locate the circuit board. See Figure 9-61.
Item Description
1 Caterpillar base transition board
2 Steel counterweight
Figure 9-61 Board identification - lower rear
2. Disconnect all cables (11 connections) from the circuit board.

3. Remove the old circuit board (5 screws).
4. Install the new circuit board (Torque to 1 N-m (0.74 lb-ft)).
5. Connect all cables to the circuit board.
• Drive - see Drive on page 42.

Section 9.6 Bins and Drive Handle

9.6.1 Front bin removal
Note: Front bin is no long FRU part and below front bin removal procedure is only used to remove front
bin during cover management.
1. Remove the side covers. See Section 9.1.3 Side cover removal.
2. Remove the 3 cap screws on each side of the top cover, but do not disconnect any cables.
Leave the top cover in place. See Section 9.1.4 Top cover removal.
3. Remove the 3 cap screws (Item 1) on each side of the front bin (Item 2). See Figure 9-62.
Item Description
1 Mounting screws
2 Front bin
Figure 9-62 Front bin
Page 310 Section 9.6 Bins and Drive Handle

4. See Figure 9-63. Remove the 2 mounting screws (Item 1) from the top cable exit cover (Item
2), then remove the cover.
State: RELEASE - Document is released and under formal Change Control. Changes are subject to the ECR/ECO Process.
See the GEHC Myworkshop System to determine the status of this document.
Approved Document - 5555017DDW_r4.pdf Page 2 of 2
1 2
Item Description
2 Top cable exit cover
Figure 9-63 Cable exit covers
5. Slightly lift the rear of the top cover to clear the lip on the front bin.
6. Remove the front bin.
9.6.2 Rear bin removal

1. Remove the side covers. See Section 9.1.3 Side cover removal on page 238.
2. See Figure 9-64. For Optima XR220amx or Optima XR200amx with digital upgrade,
disconnect the 2 cables (Items 1 and 2) at the right-side bottom of the rear bin (Item 3).

3
1
Item Description
1 Cable Assy - Detector Park Switch to Bulkhead
2 Cable Assy - Detector Charge to Bulkhead
3 Rear bin
Figure 9-64 Optima XR220amx or Optima XR200amx with digital upgrade rear bin cables
3. See Figure 9-65. Remove the 2 side mounting screws (Item 1) on each side of the rear bin.
Item Description
1 Rear bin side mounting screws
Figure 9-65 Rear bin side mounting screws

4. See Figure 9-66. Disconnect the exposure switch cable (Item 1).
Item Description
1 Exposure switch connector
2 Rear bin top mounting screws (3 used)
Figure 9-66 Rear bin top mounting screws
HEAVY WEIGHT
The rear bin is heavy. Support the bin when removing the screws and lifting the bin off of the
chassis.
5. Remove the three mounting screws (Item 2) at the top of the rear bin.
6. Remove the rear bin.

9.6.3 Front bin and Inner front bin

Required persons: 1
Timing (min): 30

• None

Item: Inner front bin
Quantity: 1
Note: Front Bin as FRU part is no longer supported.
9.6.3.2.4 Safety
• None

• Remove the front bin. See 9.1.6 Column skirt cover removal.

9.6.3.3 Procedure
1. See Figure 9-67. Remove the four mounting screws (Item 1) to separate the front bin (Item 2)
from the inner front bin (Item 3).
Item Description
1 Mounting screws
2 Front bin
3 Inner front bin
4 Wipes hold down support
5 Filler blank
Figure 9-67 Front bin assembly
2. Replace the old inner front bin with the new part and re-assemble the components. To prevent
stripping out the wipes hold down support (Item 4) and filter blank (Item 5) holes, do not over
tighten the screws.
3. Install the front bin assembly.
None

9.6.4 Detector Bin Side Rails FRU Replacement

Timing: 1 hour

• Star screw driver
• Allen key
• Torque Wrench. Range 0-8 Nm
None.

• Plastic Rails - 5787944
9.6.4.2.4 Safety
None.
9.6.4.3 Procedure
1. Remove the outer cover (PN 5393545) by unscrewing 8-nos of M4x8 (PN: 1004-M47C008-22)
screw. See Figure 9-68.
Figure 9-68 Outer cover

2. Cover view after 8-nos screw removal. See Figure 9-69.
Figure 9-69 Cover removal
3. Remove 3-nos screws (1004-M4C020-22) and Access Cover (5393547) from the bottom of
the bin assembly (5555004-3). See Figure 9-70.
Figure 9-70 3-nos screws removal
4. Remove 12-nos of Button Head Screw M4x8 (PN: 5462412). See Figure 9-71.

Figure 9-71 12-nos button hear screws removal
5. After removing 12-nos screws, place it on a flat surface. See Figure 9-72.
Figure 9-72 12-nos screws removal
6. Remove the 8-nos of Phillips flat countersunk head screws (PN 5449321). This detaches the
side plastic rails. See Figure 9-73.

Figure 9-73 8-nos Philip flat countersunk header screws
7. DO NOT remove the bottom rail (PN 5393543-2) after removing the two side rails. See
Figure 9-74.
Figure 9-74 Bottom rails

9.6.4.4 Side Rail FRU assembling procedure

1. Unpack the FRU kit from the box. See Figure 9-75.
Figure 9-75 FRU kit
2. FRU kit consists of the following:

a. Bin Side Rails (5393542-3) = 2 nos
b. Phillips pan head screws (5462412) – 8 nos
c. Phillips flat countersunk head screws (5449321) – 8 nos
Figure 9-76 FRU kit parts

3. Place the Bin Side Rail (5393542-3) in the bottom rail such that the locater on the Side Rail is
placed at the Bottom Rail (5393543-2). See Figure 9-77.
Figure 9-77 Side rails
4. Align the side rails such that the dividing plate holes and rail mounting holes are concentric
before fastening the screw. See Figure 9-78.
Figure 9-78 Side rails and dividing plate

5. Fixing Rails using CSK screws:

a. Use 4 nos of fat head CSK screws (PN 5449321) to fasten Side Rail with Dividing Plate
on each side. These screws are self-threading screws, i.e., it creates threads in the Side
Rails.
• Fasten the screws in the sequence shown in Figure 9-79. This ensures side rails do not get
misaligned.
Figure 9-79 Screw sequence
b. Fasten 4 screws (PN 5449321) on the left side as per the below order shown in Figure 9-
80.
• Fasten the screws in the sequence shown in Figure 9-80. This ensures Side Rails do not get
misaligned.
Figure 9-80 Screw sequence
c. After assembly, it should be as shown Figure 9-81.

Figure 9-81 Assembly
6. Place the Bin Cushion (5398416-2) in the bin. See Figure 9-82.
Figure 9-82 Bin cushion (5398416-2)
7. Place the Bin Mat (5398418-2) on top of the Bin Cushion (5398416-2) in the bin. See Figure 9-
83.
Figure 9-83 Bin cushion (5398416-2)
8. Place the Dividing plate assembly in the bin and route the cables in the respective openings.
See Figure 9-84.

Figure 9-84 Dividing plate
9. Routing the cable. See Figure 9-85.
Figure 9-85 Routing cable
10. Locate the dividing plate assembly manually to match the bin holes such that they become
concentric to Side Rails. See Figure 9-86.
Figure 9-86 Bin holes
11. Make sure holes in the Digital Bin Weldment (5491365) and dividing plate assembly holes are
concentric. See Figure 9-87.

Figure 9-87 Digital Bin
12. Use 4 nos of Pan Head screws (PN 5462412) to fasten Side Rail with Digital Bin Weldment
(5491365) on each side. These screws are self-threading screws, i.e., it creates threads in the
Side Rails.
• Fasten the screws in the sequence as shown in Figure 9-88. This ensures Side Rails do not
get misaligned.
Figure 9-88 Fasten screws
13. Use 4 nos of Pan Head screws (PN 5462412) to fasten Bin Lower Rail (5393543-2) with Digital
Bin Weldment (5491365). These screws are self-threading screws, i.e., it creates threads in
the Side Rails.
Note: Reuse the screws that were remove earlier.
Fasten the screws in the sequence as shown in Figure 9-89. This ensures the Bin Lower Rail
(5393543-2) does not get misaligned.

Figure 9-89 Fasten screws
14. Route cables of Charging Connector Assembly (PN 5454666) and Cable Assembly-Detector
Park Switch P/N 5557056 around boss, verify that cables are not crushed or pinched. See
Figure 9-90.
15. Install Access Cover P/N 5393547 using screws 1004-M4C020-22, torque to 1.0 Nm. See
Figure 9-90.
Figure 9-90 Route cables and Install Access Cover
16. Install Main Cover P/N 5393545 using socket head countersunk head screws M4 x 8mm (8x)
PN 1004-M47C008-22. See Figure 9-91.
Figure 9-91 Install main cover
9.6.4.5 Bin Installation, Functional Test, and Finalization

Note: Wear appropriate PPE when performing this procedure.
1. Install the Rear Bin to the System Chassis. The Bin will need to be lowered slightly to
avoid damage to the brake override switch, and then raised to align with the Thorax
mounting studs. Slide the Bin onto the Thorax mounting studs.

HEAVY WEIGHT
Rear Bin weighs approx. 20 Kgs (44 lbs). Support the bin when lifting up.
2. Route the following Cables from digital bin through the slot in the Thorax. See Figure 9-
92.
- P/N 5557066 Cable Assy Detector Power Supply to Detector charge
- P/N 5557055 Cable Assy Caterpillar to Detector Park Switch
Figure 9-92 Cables
3. Terminate P/N 5557066 and P/N 5557055 Cable Assy. See Figure 9-92.
- Connect P/N 5557066 Cable Assy - Detector Power Supply to Detector Charge to the Bin.
- Connect P/N 5557055 Cable Assy – Caterpillar to Detector Park Switch to the Bin.
Figure 9-93
4. Fasten the Bin Assembly to the Thorax through 2x M6 Side mounting screws on each side
of the rear bin with a torque of 7.9Nm. See Figure 9-94.
Figure 9-94 Rear Bin Side Mounting Screws
5. Fasten the Bin Assembly to the Thorax through 3x M6 Cap screws in front and connect
the exposure switch cable (Item#1). See Figure 9-95.

Figure 9-95 Exposure Switch Cable
6. Functional Testing
Perform the below checks:
a. Insert a Flash pad detector into the detector bin.
b. Verify the detector fits into the designated slot within the bin.
c. Verify the detector is charging by the flashing LEDs on the Detector battery.
7. Install Right Hand & Left Hand Side Cover by 5x M5 Cap Head screws & Plain Washer
on each side. See Figure 9-96.
Figure 9-96
9.6.5 Detector bin park switch

Applies to Optima XR220amx and Optima XR200amx with digital upgrade systems only.

Required persons: 1
Timing (min): 30


• None

Item: Detector bin park switch
Quantity: 1
9.6.5.2.4 Safety
• None

9.6.5.3 Procedure
1. See Figure 9-97. Remove the 3 mounting screws (Item1) and access cover (Item 2) from the
bottom of the rear bin (Item 3).
Figure 9-97 Rear Bin (bottom view)
Item Description
1 Mounting nuts (3)
2 Access cover
3 Rear bin
2. See Figure 9-98. Remove the two wires from the park switch (Item 1).
Item Description
1 Detector park switch
2 Detector charge connector assembly
3 Shock absorber (2 used)

3. Use a screwdriver to depress the mounting tabs (Item 2) on the side of the switch (Item 1) while
gently pushing on the switch body. Alternate from one side of the switch to the other until the
switch can be removed from inside the rear bin.
Item Description
2 Mounting tabs
4. Install the new switch by placing it in the recess and pushing downward until it snaps into place.
5. Connect the two wires to the COM (common) and NC (normally closed) terminals of the switch.
6. Install the access cover.
8. Install the sides covers
• Drive (speed limited in tethered mode) - see Table on page 42.
9.6.6 Detector charge cable assembly


Required persons: 1
Timing (min): 30

• None

Item: Detector charge cable assembly
Quantity: 1

9.6.6.2.4 Safety
• None

9.6.6.3 Procedure
Item Description
1 Mounting nuts (3)
2 Access cover
3 Rear bin
2. See Figure 9-101. Loosen the four mounting screws (Item 1). Do not attempt to remove the
screws as they are captive-style.
Figure 9-101 Detector charge connector assembly
Item Description
2 Bracket tab
3. The connector assembly is centered with two alignment pins. To remove the connector
assembly, grab the bracket tab (Item 2) and pull straight back. It may be necessary to slightly
rock the assembly until it releases from the alignment pins.
4. Install the new connector assembly onto the alignment pins and tighten the mounting screws.
7. Install the sides covers

1. Restore system to normal operation.
2. Insert an un-tethered detector into the bin (with detector battery installed).
3. Verify that when the detector is in the storage bin, the battery LED in the detector handle is lit
and blinking.
9.6.7 Detector bin shock absorber


Required persons: 1
Timing (min): 30

• None

Item: Detector bin shock absorber(s)
Quantity: 1 or 2
9.6.7.2.4 Safety
• None

9.6.7.3 Procedure

Item Description
1 Mounting nuts (3)
2 Access cover
3 Rear bin
2. See Figure 9-128. Loosen the locknut(s).

Note: A 17mm 1/2" drive deep-well socket works best.
3. Use an Allen wrench to remove the shock absorber(s) (counter-clockwise rotation).
Item Description
1 Shock absorber (2 used)
4. Adjust the locknut to the same approximate depth as the original shock absorber.
5. Install the new shock absorber(s).
6. Snug the 17mm locknut 1/4 turn past finger-tight.
Note: A 17mm 1/2" drive deep-well socket works best.
7. From inside the detector bin, fully compress the shock absorber. Adjust the height of the shock
absorber until the top surface of the shock absorber is flush with (or slightly below) the bottom
of the detector bin.
10. Install the sides covers.
• None

9.6.8 Rear bin kickplate

Required persons: 1
Timing (min): 20

• None

Item: Kickplate
Quantity: 1
9.6.8.2.4 Safety
• None


9.6.8.3 Procedure
1. Access the mounting nuts through the openings behind the drive wheels.
2. Remove the mounting nuts (3) from the rear of the kickplate, then remove the kickplate. See
Figure 9-104.
Item Description
1 Mounting nuts (3)
Figure 9-104 Kickplate
3. Install the new kickplate and mounting nuts.

None

9.6.9 Rear bin mounting bracket - Optima XR200amx only

Required persons: 1
Timing (min): 30

• None

Item: Rear bin mounting bracket
Quantity: 1
9.6.9.2.4 Safety
• None


9.6.9.3 Procedure
1. See Figure 9-105. Remove the kickplate mounting nuts (Item 2) and kickplate (Item 3).
2. Remove the mounting bracket nuts (Item 4) and mounting bracket (Item 5) from the rear bin
(Item 1).
Item Description
1 Rear bin
2 Rear bin kickplate mounting nuts (3 used)
3 Rear bin kickplate
4 Rear bin mounting bracket mounting nuts (6 used)
5 Rear bin mounting bracket)
Figure 9-105 Rear bin assembly
3. Attach the new mounting bracket to the rear bin. Install and tighten the mounting nuts.
4. Attach the kickplate to the mounting bracket. Install and tighten the mounting nuts.
5. Attach the rear bin assembly to the chassis. Install and tighten the mounting screws.
7. Install the sides covers.
None

9.6.10 Drive handle assembly

Required persons: 1
Timing (min): 45

• Cable ties

Item: Drive handle assembly
Quantity: 1
9.6.10.2.4 Safety
• None

• Remove the top cover. See 9.1.4 Top cover removal.

9.6.10.3 Procedure

1. See Figure 9-106. Disconnect the drive handle cables from the Locust board, J4 - Drive Brake
(Item 2) and J7 - Drive Handle (Item 1).
Item Description
1 J7 - Drive Handle connector
2 J4 - Drive Brake connector
3 Cable ties
Figure 9-106 Drive handle cables
2. Cut the cable ties (Item 3) holding the cables to the chassis.

3. See Figure 9-107. Remove the 12 mounting screws (Item 1) from the drive handle (Item 2).
2
1
Item Description
2 Drive handle
Figure 9-107 Drive handle assembly
4. Remove the old drive handle assembly. Guide the cable connectors through the access
opening in the chassis.
5. Install the new drive handle assembly. Guide the cable connectors through the access opening
in the chassis.
6. Connect the cables to the Locust board, J4, and J7.
7. Install new cable ties to hold the cables in place.
1. Perform the following calibrations:
- Drive handle - see 5.6.1 Drive handle calibration on page 116.
- Drive - see Drive on page 42.

9.6.11 Flexible hand switch holder replacement

Required persons: 1
Timing (min): 30

• Align Keys
• Torque wrench Range 1 to 10 N-m (10 to 88.5 lb-in)
• None

Item: Flexible hand switch holder FRU Kit-5392190-2 consists of the following parts:
a. 5492854: Flexible Hand Switch Holder (qty. 1 nos.)
b. 1000-M4C010-02: Screw (qty2 nos.)
Quantity: 1
9.6.11.2.4 Safety
• None

• None
9.6.11.3 Procedure
1. Using the 4mm align key, remove the screws of the old hand switch holder from the drive
handle, see Figure 9-108.
Figure 9-108 Flexible hand switch holder
2. Place the new flexible hand switch holder on the drive handle.
Do not place the new flexible hand switch holder on the drive handle with the wrong orientation, as
seen in Figure 9-109.

Figure 9-109 Drive handle
3. Insert the two M4 screws (provided in the FRU Kit) into the screw holes of the new flexible hand
switch holder. Torque tighten the screws to 4.0 ± 0.06 Nm (35.4 ± 0.5 Ib.in).
Figure 9-110 Drive handle
4. Place the hand switch in the flexible hand switch holder.
Figure 9-111 Hand switch
Inspect the cord for nicks, cuts or severe pinching of the cord sheath and exposed wires at the RJ
11 connector due to sheath damage. If any of these conditions are observed, replace the cord.

Section 9.7 Thorax assembly

9.7.1 Spyder system controller

Required persons: 1
Timing (min): 30

• None

Item: Spyder system controller board
Quantity: 1
Item: Firmware USB Dongle for Optima XR220amx and XR200amx
(If 7350002 replaces 5350002-4, Firmware USB Dongle is required; Otherwise Firmware USB
Dongle is not required)
Quantity: 1
Note: The Spyder controller board is different in Brivo and Optima system configurations. You must use
the correct Spyder board part number for all replacements. Failure to use the correct board will
result in erratic system behavior and/or system non-functionality, including non-recoverable Spyder
board damage.
9.7.1.2.4 Safety
• None


9.7.1.3 Procedure

Item Description
1 Spyder system controller board
2 Locust drive board
Figure 9-112 Board identification - right side
2. Disconnect all cables (9 - 13 connections, depending on configuration) from the circuit board.
4. Install the new circuit board.
Note: If you either replaces an old circuit board 7350002 with a new circuit board 7350002 or replaces an
old circuit board 5350002-4 with a new circuit board 5350002-4, please got to step 5, and then
perform Finalization 1 to finish this part replacement. If you replaces an old circuit board 5350002-
4 with a new circuit board 7350002. please go to step 8, and then perform Finalization 2 to finish
this part replacement
Page 344 Section 9.7 Thorax assembly

7. Install the side covers. And then go to finalization 1 directly.
8. Connect all cables to the Spyder system controller circuit board 7350002.
9. Remove LOTO from the system.
10. Turn on the system for Firmware download.
Note: Before you perform Firmware download, pay attention to the compatibility between spyder system
controller board and Firmware USB dongle.Then choose a right Firmware USB dongle for your
Firmware download.
5451000-14 is only compatible with spyder system controller 7350002.
5451000-15 is only compatible with spyder system controller 5350002-4.
5451000-18 is compatible with spyder system controller 7350002 and 5350002-4.
11. Perform Firmware download.

12. Shut down the system.
13. Perform LOTO on the system. See 1.2.2 Performing LOTO on page 28.
15. Install the side covers. And then go to finalization 2 directly.
• X-ray - see X-ray on page 43.
Reboot the system.
• Restore generator TNT data. See Section 3.4 Restoring generator firmware only on page 53.
• Perform Touch Screen calibration. See 5.6.2 Touch screen calibration on page 116.
• Perform Drive Handle calibration. See 5.6.1 Drive handle calibration on page 116.
• Perform Drive functional check. See Drive on page 42.
• Perform column and arm (locks and latches) functional check. See Tube Column and Arm on
page 42.
9.7.2 Locust drive board

Required persons: 1
Timing (min): 30

• None

Item: Locust drive circuit board
Quantity: 1
9.7.2.2.4 Safety
• None

• Remove the right side cover. See 9.1.3 Side cover removal.
9.7.2.3 Procedure


7. Install the right side cover.
- Drive handle - see Drive on page 42.
- Drive - see Drive on page 42.
- Tube column & arm (locks & latches) - see Tube Column and Arm on page 42.
9.7.3 Locust drive board fuses

Required persons: 1
Timing (min): 10


• None

Item: Locust drive board fuses
Quantity: As required
9.7.3.2.4 Safety
• None

• Remove the right side cover. See 9.1.3 Side cover removal.

9.7.3.3 Procedure


2. Locate the bad fuse. See Figure 9-113.
Item Description
F12 Right motor fuse: 8A, time delay, 300vdc, 600vac
F13 Left motor fuse: 8A, time delay, 300vdc, 600vac
F15 Locks fuse: 8A, time delay, 300vdc, 600vac
Figure 9-113 Locust board fuses
3. Remove the old fuse.

4. Install the new fuse.
6. Install the right side cover.

• Drive (brake solenoids) - see Drive on page 42.

• Tube column & arm (locks & latches) - see Tube Column and Arm on page 42.
9.7.4 Firefly charger board

Required persons: 1
Timing (min): 30

• None

Item: Firefly charger circuit board
Quantity: 1
9.7.4.2.4 Safety
• None

• Remove the left side cover. See 9.1.3 Side cover removal.

9.7.4.3 Procedure

Item Description
1 Firefly charger board
Figure 9-114 Board identification - left side
2. Remove the Firefly board safety shield.

3. Disconnect all cables from the circuit board.
4. Remove the old circuit board.
5. Install the new circuit board. (4 standoffs, torque to 2.3 N-m (1.70 lb-ft))
7. Install the Firefly board safety shield.(4 screws, torque to 2.3 N-m (1.70 lb-ft))
9. Install the left side cover.

• Charging - see Charging on page 41.
9.7.5 Firefly board fuses

Required persons: 1
Timing (min): 10

• None

Item: Firefly board fuses
9.7.5.2.4 Safety
• None


9.7.5.3 Procedure


2. Remove the Firefly safety shield.
Item Description
F5 Power-in for Mantis (from batteries): 15A, time delay, 300vdc, 600vac
F6 Power-in for collimator lamp power supply (from batteries): 3.15A, time
delay, 5x20mm, 250V, 1.5kA interrupt, ceramic
Figure 9-115 Firefly board fuses
4. Remove the old fuse.

5. Install the new fuse.
6. Install Firefly board safety shield. (4 screws, torque to 2.3 N-m (1.70 lb-ft))

9.7.6 Cricket battery board

Required persons: 1
Timing (min): 30

• Cable ties

Item: Cricket battery circuit board
Quantity: 1
9.7.6.2.4 Safety
• None


9.7.6.3 Procedure

Item Description
1 Cricket battery board
Figure 9-116 Board identification - front
2. Disconnect all cables from the circuit board. Some of these connectors pass through the
plastic safety shield and must be removed before the safety shield can be removed. For the
smaller connectors, use a screwdriver to press on the release latch on the side of the
connector body.
3. Remove the mounting screws (two on each side) for the plastic safety shield.
Note: Remove the cable ties from the bottom of the safety shield only if necessary.
4. Remove the old circuit board (4 standoffs).
5. Install the new circuit board (4 standoffs, torque to 1 N-m (0.74lb-ft)).
6. Install the plastic safety shield and cable/cable ties.
9. Install the front cover.


9.7.7 Cricket board fuses

Required persons: 1
Timing (min): 10

• Cable ties

Item: Cricket board fuses
9.7.7.2.4 Safety
• None

9.7.7.3 Procedure


2. Disconnect the cables from the front and top of the circuit board. These connectors pass
through the plastic safety shield and must be removed before the safety shield can be
removed. For the smaller connectors, use a screwdriver to press on the release latch on the
side of the connector body.
3. Remove the mounting screws (two on each side) from the plastic safety shield.

Note: Remove the cable ties from the bottom of the safety shield only if necessary.
Item Description
F1 Charge fuse
F2 Drive fuse 1
F3 Drive fuse 2
Figure 9-117 Cricket board fuses
5. Remove the old fuse and replace it with the new fuse.
6. Install the plastic safety shield and cable/cable ties.
7. Connect the cables to the circuit board.

9.7.8 Hornet UIF board

Required persons: 1
Timing (min): 45

• Cable ties

Item: Hornet UIF circuit board
Quantity: 1
9.7.8.2.4 Safety
• None


9.7.8.3 Procedure

1. See Figure 9-118. On the rear of the top cover, locate the Hornet circuit board which is under
a metal cover (Item 4).
1 2 3 4
Item Description
1 Drive login board assembly
2 Display inverter
3 Ferrite core
4 Hornet UIF board metal cover
5 Cable clamp
Figure 9-118 Board identification - top cover
2. Disconnect two cables from the top of the Hornet board.

3. Disconnect one cable from the right side of the Hornet board.
4. On the left side of the Hornet board, unplug the other end of the cable from the display inverter
board (Item 2).

5. Remove cables ties from the ferrite core (Item 3) and remove the core from the cable.
6. Remove the 12 mounting nuts and the metal cover (Item 4).
7. Disconnect the remaining cable from the bottom of the Hornet board.
8. Remove the old Hornet board (4 screws).
10. Connect the cable to the bottom of the Hornet board.
11. Transfer the cable from the left side of the old Hornet board to the new board.
12. Route the left-side cable through the metal cover, then install the cover and mounting nuts.
13. Connect all remaining cables to the circuit board.
14. Connect the left-side cable to the display inverter board.
15. Re-install the ferrite core onto the cable and secure with cable ties.
17. Install the top cover and side covers.
- Touchscreen - see Section 5.2 Touchscreen calibration on page 111
- Generator Operator Indicators - see 7.1.6 Testing generator operator indicators on
page 152.
9.7.9 Drive login active board collector

Required persons: 1
Timing (min): 30

• None

Item: Drive login active board collector
Quantity: 1
9.7.9.2.4 Safety
• None


9.7.9.3 Procedure

1. Locate the drive login board assembly. See Figure 9-119.

2. Remove the drive login board assembly (6 screws) from the top cover.
3. Remove the drive login board from the assembly (9 screws). See Figure 9-119.
Item Description
1 Drive login board assembly
Figure 9-119 Drive login board assembly
4. Disconnect the cable from the circuit board.

5. Connect the cable to the new circuit board.
6. Install the new circuit board on the assembly.
7. Install the assembly on the top cover.
• Drive (drive login) - see Drive on page 42.


9.7.10 Overlay board assembly

Required persons: 1
Timing (min): 20

• None

Item: Overlay board assembly
Quantity: 1
9.7.10.2.4 Safety
• None

9.7.10.3 Procedure

This procedure has you remove the top cover from the unit.
1. See Figure 9-120. Disconnect the power switch connector (Item 1).
2. Remove the 3 cable clamps (Item 2) from the power switch wires.
3. Disconnect the cables from the Display overlay board (Item 4).
4. Remove the mountings screws (Item 3).

3
4
2
2
2
Item Description
1 Power switch connector
2 Cable clamp (3 used)
4 Overlay board assembly
Figure 9-120 Display overlay board
5. Remove the old display overlay board and replace with the new part.
6. Install the Display Overlay Board mounting screws.
7. Install the cable clamps (3).
8. Connect the cables to the new board.
9. Connect the power switch connector.
Figure 9-121
c. See Operator Manual for details of networking configuration and testing.

9.7.11 System PC (5331287) Replacement Procedure

Required persons: 1
Timing: 1 hour

• ESD kit
• External optical drive
• Torque Wrench (capable to measure up to 7.9 N-m)
• None

Items:
System PC - PN 5331287
Quantity: 1
9.7.11.2.4 Safety
• None

9.7.11.3 Procedure
1. Perform LOTO on the system.
2. Locate the detector power supply assembly. See Figure 9-122.
3. Remove the two nuts at both ends of the mounting bracket.
4. Locate the System PC. See Figure 9-122.

Item Description
1 System PC
2 Detector power supply assembly (Optima XR220amx
or Optima XR200amx with digital upgrade only)
3 LVLE2 (Low Voltage Low Energy) power supply
Figure 9-122 Assembly identification - under top cover
5. Disconnect all cables (up to 10 connections, depending on configuration) from the PC.
6. Remove the remaining two mounting nuts from the sides of the PC.
7. Lift the detector power supply assembly, then remove the old PC.
8. Place the new PC in position over the mounting studs.
9. Place the detector power supply assembly back in position and install all four mounting nuts
(Torque to 7.9 N-m (5.83 lb-ft)).
Connect the UWB cable to J8 and barcode reader port to J11. If the system does not have the
barcode reader then do not connect any cable to J11 port and fix all the cables using cable tie, see
Figure 9-123.

Figure 9-123 New System PC
10. Connect all cables to the PC.

2. Perform a load from cold. See Section 3.3 Performing a FW Load From Cold (LFC) on
page 53.
3. Configure the system.
4. Restore backup files.
- Drive - see Table 2-3 Functional Checks on page 41.
- X-ray - see Table 2-3 Functional Checks on page 41.
- Top Cover and Touch Screen - see Table 2-3 Functional Checks on page 41.
- Networking - See Operator Manual for details of networking configuration and testing.
9.7.12 Hard drive removal procedure

Required persons: 1
Timing (min): 45


• ESD Kit
• Torx bits
• None

• None
9.7.12.2.4 Safety
• None

Remove system PC using appropriate Replacement procedure, see 9.7.11 System PC (5331287)
Replacement Procedure.
9.7.12.3 Procedure
1. Place system PC on a flat surface and remove 12 qty of 10 Torx screws which are mounted 6
on top surface and 3 on each side.
Figure 9-124 System PC
2. Remove the top cover of the system PC.

Figure 9-125 Hard drive
3. Flip the system PC over to access underside and remove 4 Philips screws securing hard drive
to chassis.
Place your hand on the hard drive to keep it from falling.
Figure 9-126 Reverse side of system PC
4. Flip PC over to access interior and remove the hard drive. Lift the hard drive about ¼” and slide
the drive toward the outside of the PC. Disconnect the 2 cables (data & power) connected to
the hard drive.

Figure 9-127 Cables
9.7.13 Wireless USB host radio board


Required persons: 1
Timing (min): 15

• Security TORX bit
• None

Item: Wireless USB host radio board
Quantity: 1
9.7.13.2.4 Safety
• None

• Remove the X-ray tube top cover. See 9.1.7 Tube head cover removal.

9.7.13.3 Procedure
1. See Figure 9-128. At the rear of the lower cover (Item 2), remove the two mounting screws
(Item 1).
1
3
Item Description
1 Mounting screws
2 Lower tube cover
3 Wireless USB host radio board
4 X-ray tube
Figure 9-128 Wireless USB host radio board
2. Remove the Wireless USB Host Radio Board assembly from the lower cover.
3. Unplug the USB cable from the circuit board (Item 3).
4. Remove the 4 nuts and replace the old circuit board with the new circuit board. Install and
tighten the nuts.
5. Plug the USB cable into the circuit board.
6. Install the assembly into the lower cover.
7. Install the tube upper cover
None.
9.7.14 Whip antenna



Required persons: 1
Timing (min): 15

• None.

Item: Whip antenna
Quantity: 1
9.7.14.2.4 Safety
• None.

9.7.14.3 Procedure
1. See Figure 9-129. Unscrew the whip antenna from the chassis-mounted connector.
Item Description
1 Whip antenna
Figure 9-129 Whip antenna
2. Install the new whip antenna.


None
9.7.15 Beetle Djinn set of cables

The ’Beetle Djinn set of cables’ is a kit that consists of all the cables that inter-connect the Djinn
generator hardware assemblies.
The Djinn generator hardware assemblies are defined as:
• Main Auxiliary Module (15kW)
• Optional Auxiliary Module (30kW) - this is a purchased option
• HV Tank
• Power Module (mounted to the HV Tank)
Other control cables that interface the Djinn generator hardware to the rest of the system are not
included in this cable kit.

Required persons: 1
Timing (min): 6 hrs

• Cable ties

Item: Beetle Djinn set of cables
Quantity: 1
9.7.15.2.4 Safety
• None

• Remove the side covers, front covers and rear bin. See 9.1.5 Front cover removal and
9.6.2 Rear bin removal.

9.7.15.3 Procedure

current.
1. Some cables are accessed/replaced from outside the chassis; some from inside the chassis.
Refer to Table 9-1 for a summary of the cables and the associated generator hardware they
are connected to.
Table 9-1 Beetle Djinn set of cables
Item Description
The cables listed below are accessed from outside the Thorax assembly.The side covers and
front covers must be removed to provide access.
- Shielded cable assy, Main Aux Module (15kW) to Power Module
- Cable, Power Module Filament Board to Main Aux Module (15kW)
The cables listed below are accessed from inside the Thorax assembly.The side covers and rear
bin assembly must be removed to provide access. If present, the Optional Power Module (30kW)
must be unbolted and moved aside to access the connections on the rear of the HV Tank.
- Cable, Power Module Filament Board to HV Tank
- Flat ribbon cable, Power Module Control Board to HV Tank
- Cable, Power Module to HV Tank (very short)
- Cable, Power Module to HV Tank (short)
- Ground cable, Main Aux Module (15kW) to Opt Aux Module (30kW) - UNUSED
- Ground cable, Main Aux Module (15kW) to Power Module - UNUSED
- Ground cable, Power Module to HV Tank - UNUSED
2. Replace each cable individually, one at a time.

3. For each cable:
a. If present, remove cable clamps and/or cut cable ties that are constraining the cable.
b. Disconnect each end of the cable.
c. Remove the cable and set aside (do not mix old cables with new cables).
d. Install the new cable.
4. When all the cables have been replaced, re-install any cable clamps and replace any cable
ties that were previously removed.
- Filament - see 5.3.1 Setting filament drive level on page 112.


- kV accuracy - see 7.1.4.2 Testing kVp accuracy on page 144.
- mAs Accuracy - see 7.1.4.3 Testing mAs accuracy on page 146.
- Reproducability - see 7.1.4.4 Testing reproducibility and linearity of exposure on
page 149.
- Linearity - see 7.1.4.4 Testing reproducibility and linearity of exposure on page 149.
9.7.16 Djinn 15kW Auxiliary module

Required persons: 1
Timing (min): 6 hrs

• None

Item: Djinn auxiliary module 15kW
Quantity: 1
9.7.16.2.4 Safety
• None

• Remove the side covers and rear bin. See 9.6.2 Rear bin removal.
• Remove the front covers. See 9.1.5 Front cover removal.

9.7.16.3 Procedure

current.
1. Locate the aux module 15kW. See Figure 9-130.
1
2
Item Description
1 Aux module 15kW
2 Power module
3 HV Tank
4 Aux module 30kW
Figure 9-130 Djinn generator module locations
2. Locate the aux module 30kW (if present). See Figure 9-130.
The aux module 30kW must be removed before the aux module 15kW can be removed.
3. Disconnect the cable (red/black wires) from the rear of the aux module 15kW.
4. Remove the aux module 30kW (4 screws - see Figure 9-131) and set aside.

5. Disconnect all cables (5 or 6 connections, depending on configuration) from the rear of the
module.
6. Remove the old module (4 screws - 2 on the front, 2 on the back). See Figure 9-131. Due to
space limitations, the module must be removed through the rear of the unit.
3 2 1
Item Description
1 Aux module 30kW mounting screws (3 on front side of panel)
3 Aux module 15kW mounting screws (2 on rear side of panel)
Figure 9-131 Aux module 15kW mounting screws
7. Install the new module.

8. Connect all cables to the module.
9. Install the aux module 30kW in the chassis.
10. Connect the cable (red/black wires) to the rear of the aux module 15kW.
page 149.

9.7.17 Djinn power module

Required persons: 1
Timing: 6 hrs

• Silicone oil (GE P/N LNR8733)

Item: Djinn power module
Quantity: 1
9.7.17.2.4 Safety
• None


9.7.17.3 Procedure

current.
1. Locate the power module / HV tank assembly. See Figure 9-130.

Note that the power module and HV tank are on a mounting bracket that must be removed as
an assembly.
Due to space limitations, the assembly must be removed through the rear of the unit.
2. Disconnect all cables from the front and rear of the power module / HV tank assembly.
(To remove the HV cables, the set screws (Figure 9-18) in the tightening rings must be
loosened.)
3. Remove the power module / HV tank assembly (4 screws). See Figure 9-132.
Item Description
1 Mounting screws for power module / HV tank assembly
Figure 9-132 Power module / HV tank mounting screws
4. Remove the power module from the assembly (16 screws).

5. Disconnect the cables between the power module and HV tank (4 cables).
6. Mount the new power module in the assembly.
7. Reconnect the cables between the power module and HV tank.

8. Install the assembly in the chassis.
Note: HV cables must be lubricated with silicone oil (GE P/N LNR8733) before insertion into the HV tank
cable wells. See Figure 9-133.
9. Connect all cables to the assembly.

(After installing the HV cables, tighten the set screws in the HV cable tightening rings.)
- Reproducibility - see 7.1.4.4 Testing reproducibility and linearity of exposure on
page 149.
9.7.18 Djinn HV tank

Required persons: 1
Timing: 6 hrs

• Silicone oil (GE P/N LNR8733)


Item: Djinn HV Tank
Quantity: 1
9.7.18.2.4 Safety
• None

9.7.18.3 Procedure

current.
1. Locate the power module / HV tank assembly. See Figure 9-130.

Note that the power module and HV tank are on a mounting bracket that must be removed as
an assembly.
2. Disconnect all cables from the front and rear of the power module / HV tank assembly.
(To remove the HV cables, the set screws (Figure 9-18) in the tightening rings must be
loosened.)

3. Remove the power module / HV tank assembly (4 screws). See Figure 9-134. Due to space
limitations, the module must be removed from the rear of the unit.
Item Description
1 Mounting screws for power module / HV tank assembly
Figure 9-134 Power module / HV tank mounting screws
4. Remove the HV tank module from the assembly (8 screws).

5. Disconnect the cables between the power module and HV tank (4 cables).
6. Mount the new HV tank module in the assembly.
7. Reconnect the cables between the power module and HV tank.
8. Install the assembly in the chassis.
Note: HV cables must be lubricated with silicone oil (GE P/N LNR8733) before insertion into the HV tank
cable wells. See Figure 9-135.
9. Connect all cables to the assembly.

(After installing the HV cables, tighten the set screws in the HV cable tightening rings.)

page 149.
9.7.19 Djinn 30kW auxiliary module

Required persons: 1
Timing (min): 30

• None

Item: Djinn auxiliary module
Quantity: 1
9.7.19.2.4 Safety
• None


9.7.19.3 Procedure

current.
1. Locate the module. See Figure 9-130.

2. Disconnect the cable (red/black wires) from the rear of the aux module 15kW.
3. Remove the old module (3 screws). See Figure 9-136.
Item Description
Figure 9-136 Aux module 30kW mounting screws
4. Install the new module.

5. Connect the cable (red/black wires) to the rear of the aux module 15kW.

page 149.
9.7.20 Mantis power supply

Required persons: 1
Timing (min): 30

• None

Item: Mantis power supply
Quantity: 1
9.7.20.2.4 Safety
• None


9.7.20.3 Procedure

current.
1. Locate the Mantis power supply. See Figure 9-137.
Item Description
1 Mantis power supply
Figure 9-137 Mantis power supply
2. Disconnect all cables (3 connections) from the power supply.

3. Remove the old power supply (4 nuts).
4. Install the new power supply (4 nuts, torque to 4.6 N-m (3.39 lb-ft)).
5. Ensure that the spacer near to J3 is in good condition without burrs and fractures.

Figure 9-138 Spacer near J3
6. Inspect and ensure J1, J2, and J3 connectors are in good condition.
7. Ensure the J3 connector has 2 lock washers in standoff position.
Figure 9-139 Lock washer
8. Cut and remove the tie-wrap from the spacer, ensuring that no physical damage is caused to
the spacer.

Figure 9-140 Tie wrap from spacer
9. Place the spacer such that it is over J3 connector.
Figure 9-141 Spacer on J3 connector
10. Connect the cable 5557020 (Cable Assy- Mantis to Firefly) from the J3 connector to Firefly
board.
- Put the cable 5557020 in the connector J3.
- Ensure the correct cable side is put in connector J3 by validating the label on the cable
5557020.

Figure 9-142 Cable 5557020
Figure 9-143 Validation label
11. Ensure that label is installed properly.

Figure 9-144 Spacer installed on J3
12. Connect all cables to the power supply.


9.7.21 EMI filter

Required persons: 1
Timing (min): 30

• None

Item: EMI filter
Quantity: 1
9.7.21.2.4 Safety
• None


9.7.21.3 Procedure

current.
1. Locate the EMI filter. See Figure 9-145.
Item Description
1 EMI filter
Figure 9-145 EMI filter
2. Record the color and location of the wires (5) connected to the filter.
3. Disconnect the wires from the filter.
4. Remove the old filter (2 nuts/washers).
5. Install the new filter (2 nuts, torque to 2.3 N-m (1.70 lb-ft).

6. Connect all wires to the filter. See Figure 9-146.
2
1
Item Description
1 Ground wire (green/yellow)
2 Line wire (brown)
3 Neutral wire (blue)
Figure 9-146 EMI filter wiring
• Grounding - see 7.2.1 Perform Ground Resistance Testing on page 153.
• Leakage - see 7.2.2 Performing Leakage Current Testing on page 164.

9.7.22 LVLE2

Required persons: 1
Timing (min): 30

• None

Item: LVLE2
Quantity: 1
9.7.22.2.4 Safety
• None


9.7.22.3 Procedure

current.
1. Locate the LVLE2 power supply. See Figure 9-147. See Figure 9-148.
Item Description

Item Description
1 System PC
2. Disconnect all cables (up to 8 connections, depending on configuration) from the LVLE2.
3. Remove the old LVLE2 (4 nuts).
4. Install the new LVLE2 (4 nuts, torque to 4.6 N-m (3.39 lb-ft)).
5. Connect all cables to the LVLE2.
• Light field buttons - see Collimator on page 43.

9.7.23 Power cord reel

Required persons: 1
Timing (min): 60

• None

Item: Power cord reel
Quantity: 1
9.7.23.2.4 Safety
• None


9.7.23.3 Procedure

current.
1. Perform LOTO on the system. See 1.2.2 Performing LOTO on page 28.
2. Locate the power cord reel, ground stud, and AC fuse assembly. See Figure 9-149.
4 1
Item Description
1 Power cord reel
2 Chassis ground stud
3 AC fuse assembly
4 Plastic cable guide
Figure 9-149 Power cord reel location
3. Dismount the AC fuse assembly (2 nuts) from the chassis.

4. Disconnect the cord reel wires from the AC fuse assembly (note the existing connections of
the wires).
5. Disconnect the cord reel ground wire from the ground stud (1 nut).
6. Dismount the plastic cable guide (2 screws).
7. Remove the cord reel (2 nuts).

8. Install the new cord reel.

9. Install the plastic cable guide.
10. Connect the ground wire to the ground stud.
11. Connect the cord reel wires to the AC fuse assembly.
12. If this is a 230VAC system, the cord replacement reel is shipped without a power plug. Perform
the following steps to install a power plug:
a. Remove the existing power plug from the old cord reel. If the power plug is damaged or
missing, obtain an appropriate hospital-grade plug as dictated by local regulations.
b. Connect the power plug to the cord reel wires as shown in Table 9-2 Power plug
connections.
Table 9-2 Power plug connections
Wire color Power plug connection

Brown (hot) Connect to the brass terminal
Blue (neutral) Connect to the silver terminal
Green / yellow (ground) Connect to the green terminal
9.7.24 AC power plug

Required persons: 1
Timing (min): 30

• None

Item: AC power plug
Quantity: 1
9.7.24.2.4 Safety
• None


9.7.24.3 Procedure

current.
1. Remove the existing power plug (Figure 9-150) from the power cord.
Figure 9-150 Power plug
2. Install the new power plug as shown in Table 9-3 Power plug connections.
Table 9-3 Power plug connections
Wire color Power plug connection

Brown (line) Connect to the brass terminal
Blue (neutral) Connect to the silver terminal
Green / yellow (ground) Connect to the green terminal

3. Use an ohm-meter to verify the continuity of the power connections as follows:

a. See Figure 9-151. Each power wire will need to be pulled about 1/8" off of the terminal to
allow measurement.
2
1
Item Description
1 EMI filter - ground wire
2 EMI filter - line wire
3 EMI filter - neutral wire
4 Fuses F1 & F2
Figure 9-151 EMI filter
b. Check continuity between the power plug ground pin and the ground terminal (Item 1 -
green/yellow wire) on the EMI filter.
Note: If there is no continuity on the line (brown) wire or the neutral (blue) wire, check fuses F1 and F2
(Item 4).
c. Check continuity between the power plug line pin and the line terminal (Item 2 - brown
wire) on the EMI filter.
d. Check continuity between the power plug neutral pin and the neutral terminal (Item 3 -
blue wire) on the EMI filter.
4. Fully seat the 3 wires on the EMI filter.

9.7.25 AC fuse holder

Required persons: 1
Timing (min): 40

• None

Item: AC fuse holder
9.7.25.2.4 Safety
• None


9.7.25.3 Procedure

current.
1. See Figure 9-152. Locate the fuse holder assembly (Item 1).
Item Description
1 Fuse holder assembly
2 Mounting screws
Figure 9-152 AC fuse holder assembly
2. Remove the 2 screws (Item 2) and remove the fuse holder assembly from the chassis.

3. See Figure 9-153. Remove the 2 wires from the fuse holder (Item 2) that is being replaced.
3
2 4
Item Description
1 Fuse holder assembly
2 Fuse holders
3 Nut and washer
4 Wires from cord reel MUST connect to these terminals
Figure 9-153 AC fuse holders
4. Remove the nut and washer (Item 3) from the rear of the fuse holder.
5. Remove the old fuse holder and replace with the new fuse holder.
6. Install the washer and nut.

Wires from the cord reel MUST be connected to the center (rear) terminals on the fuse holders.
7. Connect the 2 wires to the fuse holder. The wire coming from the cord reel MUST be connected
to the center (rear) terminal (Item 4) on the fuse holder.
8. Install the fuse holder assembly on the chassis.
9.7.26 AC fuses

Required persons: 1
Timing (min): 10


• None

Item: AC fuse
Quantity: 1
9.7.26.2.4 Safety
• None

9.7.26.3 Procedure

current.

1. Locate the AC fuses. See Figure 9-154
Item Description
F1 AC power fuse
F2 AC power fuse
Figure 9-154 AC fuse locations
2. To remove the fuse cap from the fuse holder, push in the cap and rotate 1/4 turn
counterclockwise.
3. Remove the old fuse from the cap.
4. Install the new fuse in the cap.
5. Install the fuse cap in the fuse holder.
- Charging - see Charging on page 41.

9.7.27 Tube park latch assembly, switch or solenoid

Required persons: 1
Timing (min): 30

• 3/32" or 1/16" drift pin punch
• Hammer or drift pin clamping device (3" C-clamp)
• None

Item: Tube park latch assembly
Quantity: 1
Item: Tube park latch switch
Quantity: 1
Item: Tube park latch solenoid
Quantity: 1
9.7.27.2.4 Safety
• None


9.7.27.3 Procedure

current.
9.7.27.3.1 Tube park latch assembly

1. See Figure 9-155. Disconnect the wiring harness connector (Item 1).
Item Description
1 Wiring harness connector
2 Mounting screws (4)
3 Tube park latch assembly
Figure 9-155 Tube park latch assembly
2. Remove the 4 mounting bolts (Item 2) from the tube park latch assembly (Item 3).
3. Replace the old assembly with the new assembly.
4. Install and tighten the mounting bolts.
5. Connect the cable harness.

9.7.27.3.2 Tube park latch switch

1. See Figure 9-156. Remove the 2 mounting screws (Item 1) from the switch (Item 2).
1
3
Item Description
1 Mounting screws
2 Switch
3 Spade connectors (3) for switch
Figure 9-156 Tube park latch switch
2. Record the color and location of the wires connected to the switch.
3. Remove the spade connectors (Item 3) from the switch and remove the switch from the
assembly.
4. Connect the spade connectors to the new switch.
5. Install the switch into the assembly and tighten the mounting screws.

9.7.27.3.3 Tube park latch solenoid

1. Remove the park latch assembly (see 9.7.27.3.1 Tube park latch assembly on page 407).
Note: It is recommended that you take the assembly to a sturdy work bench as the procedure
can cause damage to customer surfaces.
2. See Figure 9-157. Remove the 2 mounting screws (Item 1) from the switch (Item 2).
5 2
3
6 1
7
Item Description
1 Switch mounting screws (2)
2 Switch
3 Pin
4 Latch
5 Nut and washer
6 Solenoid and wiring harness
7 Spade connectors (3) for switch
8 Wiring harness connector
Figure 9-157 Tube park latch assembly
3. Remove the spade connectors (Item 6) from the switch.

4. Drive the upper pin (Item 3) out of the park latch assembly until the latch (Item 4) can be
removed. About 6.5 mm (0.25 in.) of the pin will remain in the latch assembly body (see
Figure 9-158, Item 1).

Item Description
1 Latch pin (about 6.5mm [0.25 in] remains inside latch assembly body)
2 Latch assembly body
Figure 9-158 Remove latch pin and latch
5. Remove the latch (Figure 9-157, Item 4).

6. Remove the nut and washer (Figure 9-157, Item 5) from the solenoid (Figure 9-157, Item 6).
7. Record the color and location of the wires connected to the switch (Figure 9-157, Item 7).
8. Disconnect the wiring harness connector (Figure 9-157, Item 8).
9. Remove the solenoid assembly.
10. Connect the new solenoid to the wiring harness connector.
11. Install the solenoid in the assembly, then install the washer and nut.
12. Place the latch in the assembly. Use a small screwdriver to depress the latch spring during
installation. See Figure 9-159. When the latch spring is properly positioned, the free end of the
spring will be vertical (see Figure 9-160).

Item Description
1 Latch spring
2 Screwdriver
Figure 9-159 Depress spring during installation
Figure 9-160 Correct latch spring orientation
13. Hold the latch in position and re-install the pin.

14. Verify that the latch operates under tension.
15. Connect the spade connectors to the switch.

16. Install the switch into the assembly and tighten the mounting screws. Take care to apply even
force, alternating between screws, so as not to crack/damage the switch.
17. Install the park latch assembly onto the system.
1. Perform the following mechanical alignment:
- Drive (speed limited when tube not latched) - see Drive on page 42.
- Drive (reverse-only when bumper switch is pressed) - see Drive on page 42.
9.7.28 Detector power supply assembly


Required persons: 1
Timing (min): 20

• None

Item: Detector power supply assembly
Quantity: 1
9.7.28.2.4 Safety
• None

• Remove the side covers and top cover. See 9.1.4 Top cover removal.

9.7.28.3 Procedure
1. Perform LOTO on the system.
2. See Figure 9-161. Locate the power supply assembly (Item 1).
3 3
Item Description
1 Detector power supply assembly
2 System PC
3 Cable connectors
Figure 9-161 Detector power supply
3. Disconnect the cables (Item 3) from the assembly.

4. Remove the mounting nuts at both ends of the assembly, then remove the old assembly.
5. Install the new power supply assembly and mounting nuts (Torque to 7.9 N-m (5.83 lb-ft)).
6. Re-connect the cables.
1. Restore the system to normal operation.
2. Connect a tethered detector to the system and perform an exposure.
3. Verify that an image is created.
4. Insert an un-tethered detector into the bin (with detector battery installed).

9.7.29 Collimator lamp power supply

Required persons: 1
Timing (min): 20

• None

Item: Collimator lamp power supply
Quantity: 1
9.7.29.2.4 Safety
• None

9.7.29.3 Procedure


Item Description
1 Collimator lamp power supply
2 Collimator lamp supply pot R3
Figure 9-162 Board identification - under top cover

7. Install the side cover.
1. Perform the following adjustment:
- Adjust the collimator lamp supply potentiometer R3 so that the voltage at the collimator
lamp is 20.0 - 22.0 VDC.
2. Perform the following HHS tests:
- Light field intensity - see 7.1.3.1 Testing light intensity on page 138.
9.7.30 Main circuit breaker and cable assembly

Required persons: 1
Timing (min): 30


• None

Item: Main circuit breaker and cable assembly
Quantity: 1
9.7.30.2.4 Safety
• None


9.7.30.3 Procedure

current.
1. Locate the battery power connector J5 on the Cricket battery board at the rear of the unit. See
Figure 9-163.
Item Description
1 Battery power connector J5
Figure 9-163 Battery power connector J5
2. Loosen the two mounting screws and remove the plug from J5 (Breaker I/F) connector.

3. Locate the main circuit breaker and the breaker I/F cable plug (J10) on the Firefly charger
board. See Figure 9-164.
Item Description
1 Main circuit breaker
J10 Breaker I/F connector on FireFly charger board
Figure 9-164 Main circuit breaker trip - J10
4. Disconnect the cable at J10 on the Firefly charger board.

5. Remove the main circuit breaker (4 screws) and cable assembly. See Figure 9-165.
Item Description
1 Main circuit breaker
Figure 9-165 Main circuit breaker
6. Install the new circuit breaker.

7. Connect the small cable to J10 on the Firefly charger board.
8. Route the power cable (2 heavy red wires) through the opening in the frame and over to
connector J5 on the Cricket battery board.
9. Plug the connector into J5 and tighten the mounting screws.
11. Install front covers.
2. Verify that the system powers up.

Section 9.8 Column, horizontal arm, X-ray tube, collimator
9.8.1 Engaging vertical lock

Required persons: 1
Timing (min): 5

• None

Item: None
Quantity: None
9.8.1.2.4 Safety

Page 420 Section 9.8 Column, horizontal arm, X-ray tube, collimator
9.8.1.3 Procedure
1. See Figure 9-166. Remove the mounting screws (Item 3) and top cover (Item 2) at the top of
the vertical column (Item 3).
Item Description
2 Column top cover
3 Column
Figure 9-166 Column top cover
2. Position the horizontal arm to a convenient working position.

3. Lock the vertical carriage:
a. The vertical lock can engage in multiple positions (approximately 18 cm (7 in.) apart)
throughout the vertical range of travel.
b. See Figure 9-167. At the top of the column, rotate the brass knob (Item 1) 90 degrees until
it lines up with, and slightly drops into, the locking notch (Item 2).
c. Slowly move the horizontal arm up/down until the spring-loaded locking pin clicks into the
locking hole (Item 3) in the side of the scroll (Item 4).
d. Verify that the locking knob is fully seated in the locking notch.
e. Verify that movement of the vertical carriage has now been locked.

Item Description
1 Locking knob (shown in the unlocked position)
2 Locking notch
3 Locking holes (2) in side of scroll
4 Cable scroll
Figure 9-167 Column locking mechanism
4. To release the vertical lock, pull back on the locking knob until it clears the locking notch. It
may be necessary to provide slight up/down pressure on the horizontal arm to release the lock.
5. Rotate the locking knob 90 degrees and release. In the unlocked position, the knob should
appear as shown in Figure 9-168. Verify that the vertical carriage can freely move up/down.
Figure 9-168 Column vertical lock in normal (unlocked) position
6. Install the column top cover.

None
9.8.2 Column

Required persons: 2
Timing (min): 180

• 3mm T-handle hex wrench - hex wrenches with a ball end will not work for some steps in this
procedure
• 6 dozen cable ties

Item: Column
Quantity: 1
9.8.2.2.4 Safety

• Remove the tablet holder assembly, if required. See 9.8.19 Tablet holder assembly
• Remove the column skirt covers. See 9.1.6 Column skirt cover removal.
9.8.2.3 Procedure
Note: The carriage safety lock system is designed to limit downward motion of the horizontal arm / tube
assembly should an event occur where there is an imbalance in the counterweight system. In this
situation the carriage safety lock will engage to prevent the horizontal arm / tube assembly from
falling downward. However the horizontal arm / tube assembly can be ratcheted upwards when the
carriage safety lock is engaged.
Always be certain of the cause of the carriage safety lock engagement before disengaging the
carriage safety lock. If the carriage safety lock has engaged due to a problem in the counterweight
system it is critical to resolve that problem before disengaging the carriage safety lock.

When performing the column replacement procedure it is possible that the carriage safety lock may
become engaged if the carriage assembly is lifted upwards while the column vertical lock is
engaged. This is the only situation where the procedure below should be applied.
If the carriage safety lock becomes engaged while performing this procedure, use the following
steps to disengage it:
a. Ensure that the horizontal arm, tube, and collimator are installed and the vertical lock is
engaged. See 9.8.1 Engaging vertical lock.
b. Remove the 4 screws and carriage cover plate. See Figure 9-169.
Figure 9-169 Carriage cover plate
c. With one person lifting up slightly on the horizontal arm, have the other person pry the
carriage safety lock upwards with a large flat blade screwdriver. See Figure 9-170.
Figure 9-170 Release safety lock
d. Once the carriage safety lock is disengaged, slowly lower the horizontal arm until the steel
cable is supporting the weight.
e. Install the carriage cover plate and 4 screws.
f. Disengage the vertical lock.
1. Lock the vertical carriage. See 9.8.1 Engaging vertical lock.

2. Remove the 4 fasteners and the carriage cover plate from the carriage. See Figure 9-171.
Save these parts to use on the new carriage.
Figure 9-171 Carriage cover plate
3. Using caution, as these parts are under tension from the springs, remove both spring cap
screws. The hardware on these cap screws is very easy to fall off the cap screw and drop down
into the column. It is best to use a T-handle hex wrench for this task; hex wrenches with a ball
end will not work well. Note the order in which the hardware is placed on the cap screws. See
Figure 9-172.

Figure 9-172
4. Remove the cap screws, collars, and washers from the old carriage. Save these parts to use
on the new carriage.
5. Mark the location of existing cables ties and then remove cable ties as necessary to free the
column of any cable restraints or obstructions.
Note: ’Temporary’ cable ties can be used to mark the location of the old ties; they also help to hold the
relative position of the cables to each other when the old ties are removed. These ties are temporary
and will be removed during reassembly.
6. Remove the collimator. See 9.8.9.1 Collimator replacement.
7. Remove the X-ray tube. See 9.8.8 Canon X-ray tube.

8. Remove the horizontal arm. See 9.8.3 Horizontal arm assembly.
9. See Figure 9-173. Remove the cable bracket (Item 1) from the side of the column.
Item Description
1 Column cable bracket
2 Column
Figure 9-173 Column cable bracket
10. Remove the front bin. See 9.1.6 Column skirt cover removal.
11. Remove the bottom portion of the cable clamp. See Figure 9-174.
Figure 9-174 Cable clamp (bottom portion)

12. Remove the cable labelled "TO COL BULKHEAD" from the main bulkhead (J2 and ground).
See Figure 9-175.
GND
J2
Figure 9-175 Remove J2 and ground
13. See Figure 9-176. Use a large screwdriver at the base of the vertical column to move the
spring-loaded column rotational detent arm (Item 1) toward the front of the unit. From
underneath the base, insert a 5/32" (4 mm) allen wrench into the hole in the cover (Item 2) to
hold the rotational detent arm away from the column.
1 2
Item Description
1 Spring-loaded column rotational detent arm
2 Hole to lock column rotational detent arm
Figure 9-176 Release column rotational detent
14. See Figure 9-177. Rotate the column to obtain access to the column bolt (Item1), then remove
the bolt.
Item Description
1 Column mounting bolt
2 Column
Figure 9-177 Column mounting bolt
15. Using two people, lift the column off of the chassis and set aside.
16. Using two people, lift the new column into position on the chassis and install the column
mounting bolt. Torque to 90 N-m (66.4 lb-ft) - no thread locker is used.
17. Remove the allen wrench that was used to hold the rotational detent arm.
18. Install the cable bracket onto the column.
19. Install the horizontal arm.
20. Install the X-ray tube. See Figure 9-21, Figure 9-22, and Figure 9-23 for cable routing at the
rear of the X-ray tube.
21. Install the collimator.
22. Install the new cable labelled "TO COL BULKHEAD" to the main bulkhead (J2 and ground).
23. Install the bottom portion of the cable clamp.
24. Install cable brackets and cable ties.
25. On the new carriage, install the hardware that was removed from the old carriage in step 4. A
standard 3mm T-handle hex wrench is required; hex wrenches with a ball end will not work

well. Using the T-handle hex wrench, carefully pull the assembled hardware upwards and
towards the threaded hole. Get the cap screw edge into the threaded hole then pry the cap
screw up and screw it in. Torque to 2.3 N-m (20.4 in-lbs). See Figure 9-178, Figure 9-179 &
Figure 9-180.
Figure 9-178
Figure 9-179
Torque to 2.3 N-m
Figure 9-180
26. Install the carriage cover plate and screws.
on page 423.
27. Unlock the vertical carriage and install the column top cover.
28. Install the front bin.
29. Install the column skirt covers.
33. Re-install the cable cover and zip ties. See Section 9.3 Cable cover installation on page 271.
page 127.
- Tube column and arm - see Tube Column and Arm on page 42

on page 139.
4. For Optima XR220amx and Optima XR200amx with Digital Upgrade:
- Perform QAP - refer to the Installation Manual, Chapter 6 - Detector checks and QAP.
9.8.3 Horizontal arm assembly

Required persons: 1
Timing (min): 120

• HV Tube Grease (GE part#46-125224P3, Silicon Grease) or equivalent
• Cable ties

Item: Horizontal arm assembly
Quantity: 1
9.8.3.2.4 Safety

9.8.3.3 Procedure
1. Remove the zip ties and unzip/remove the cable cover.
3. Remove the tube covers. See 9.1.7 Tube head cover removal.
4. Lightly mark the positions of all cable clamps and cable ties on the side of the existing cables,
then cut and remove the cable ties.
5. See Figure 9-181. Remove the cable clamp (Item 1) from the side of the horizontal arm (Item
2).
Item Description
1 Horizontal arm cable bracket
2 Horizontal arm
Figure 9-181 Horizontal arm cable bracket

6. See Figure 9-182. Remove the three tube yoke mounting screws (Item 1) from the horizontal
arm (Item 2).
1 2
Item Description
1 Tube yoke mounting screws (3 used)
2 Horizontal arm
3 X-ray tube/yoke assembly
Figure 9-182 X-ray tube mount
7. Tip the front of the X-ray tube assembly upward and slide the assembly out of the horizontal
arm. Set the assembly on the work surface.
8. See Figure 9-183. Remove the two mounting screws (Item 1) and the mounting block (Item 2)
from the horizontal arm (Item 3).
4 1
2
Item Description
1 Mounting screws
2 Mounting block
3 Horizontal arm
4 Vertical carriage
Figure 9-183 Horizontal arm
9. Tip the front of the horizontal arm upward and lift the arm off of the vertical carriage (Item 4).
Set the old horizontal arm aside on the work surface.
10. Install the new horizontal arm, mounting block and mounting screws. Torque to 7.9 N-m (5.8
lb-ft) - no thread locker is used.
11. Install the X-ray tube and yoke assembly. Apply thread locker (Loctite 271 or equivalent) and
torque the 3 fasteners as follows;
- Single top fastener = 26.8 N-m (19.9 lb-ft)
- Two bottom fasteners = 13.3 N-m (9.8 lb-ft)
12. Install the cable bracket to the side of the horizontal arm. Route the cables and apply cable ties
as shown in Figure 9-21, Figure 9-22 and Figure 9-23.
13. Install new cable ties on the remainder of the cable drape.
14. Install the tube covers.
15. Install the collimator.

on page 423.
16. Unlock the vertical carriage.

page 127.
on page 139.
9.8.4 Horizontal arm brake cable assembly with track

Required persons: 1
Timing (min): 30

• Cable ties

Item: Horizontal arm brake cable assembly with track
Quantity: 1
9.8.4.2.4 Safety

• Remove the side covers, front covers and front bin. See 9.1.6 Column skirt cover removal on
page 244.

9.8.4.3 Procedure
1. See Figure 9-184. Disconnect the horizontal arm brake cable from the Thorax bulkhead (J1).
J1
Figure 9-184 Horizontal arm brake cable - Thorax bulkhead J1
Item Description
4. Follow the horizontal arm brake cable back through the cable drape. At each existing cable tie,
mark the location of the cable tie on an adjacent cable, then cut and remove the cable tie.
5. Position the horizontal arm to a convenient work position, then lock the vertical carriage. See
9.8.1 Engaging vertical lock.
6. See Figure 9-187. Remove the bushing (Item 2) from the horizontal arm.
7. Remove the two bracket mounting screws (Item 3) from the bottom of the horizontal arm.
8. Adjust the horizontal arm extension so that the cable mounting screws (Item 5) line up with the
access opening (Item 4). Remove the two screws.

3 1
Item Description
1 Horizontal arm brake cable
2 Bushing
3 Bracket mounting screws
4 Access opening
5 Cable mounting screws
Figure 9-187 Horizontal arm brake cable
9. See Figure 9-188. Inside the horizontal arm, disconnect the cable from the plug (Item 1).
Item Description
1 Horizontal arm brake cable plug
Figure 9-188 Horizontal arm brake cable plug
10. Remove the old horizontal arm cable.

11. Route the new cable through the opening in the side of the horizontal arm.
12. Line up the mounting bracket and install the two screws (see Figure 9-187 Item 3, torque to
1.6 N-m (1.18 lb-ft)).
13. Inside the horizontal arm, connect the cable to the plug (see Figure 9-188 Item 1).
14. Adjust the horizontal arm extension so that the cable mounting screw bracket (see Figure 9-
187 Item 5) lines up with the access opening (see Figure 9-187 Item 4). Install the two screws
(Torque to 1.6 N-m (1.18 lb-ft)).
15. Install the bushing (see Figure 9-187 Item 2) in the side of the horizontal arm.
16. Route the horizontal arm brake cable back through the cable drape to the Thorax bulkhead,
attaching cable ties at the marks placed in Step 4 above.
clamp.

C
1 2
4 3
Item Description
1 DAP cable (optional for Brivo XR285amxOptima XR200amx systems)
21. Plug the horizontal arm brake cable into J1 on the Thorax bulkhead.
on page 423.

• Tube column and arm - see Tube Column and Arm on page 42.
9.8.5 Tube mount - detent side (cathode side)

Required persons: 1
Timing (min): 120

• Cable ties

Item: Tube mount - detent side (cathode side)
Quantity: 1
Note 1: A newer version of this part has been introduced. It is not backward-compatible with the
original version. If replacing the original version, you must replace BOTH sides with the newer
version. The newer version is physically longer. Mixing old and new versions results in tube
attachment mis-alignment. See Figure 9-190 for identification of mounts.

Item Description
1 A thickness notch in this location identifies a newer version tube mount
Figure 9-190 Tube mount identification
Note 2: The yolk mounting fasteners for the new version are longer than the original version. These
CRUSH fasteners are provided with the new version replacement part and MUST be used.
HAZARD
9.8.5.2.4 Safety

• Remove the collimator. See 9.8.9 Collimator.
• Remove the tube covers. See 9.1.7 Tube head cover removal.
9.8.5.3 Procedure
1. Position the unit next to a work surface that can safely support the X-ray tube/yoke assembly.
4. Remove the HV cables from the X-ray tube wells. Protect the HV cable ends to prevent
damage.
5. Disconnect the rotor cable from the generator J6 connector, and free the rotor cable from the
cable drape marking the location of the cable ties.
arm (Item 2).
1 2
Item Description
2 Horizontal arm

8. See Figure 9-192. Remove the four end cap mounting screws (Item 1) from the cathode end
cap (Item 2).
1
6
4
See Note 1
3
Note 1: Do NOT loosen or disturb the screws in this location. These are non-
servicable items and require specialized fixtures for proper assembly. This applies
to both the cathode and anode sides.
Item Description
1 End cap mounting screws (4 used on each end cap)
2 Cathode end cap and tube mount
3 Anode end cap and tube mount
4 X-ray tube
5 Yoke
6 Tube mount screws (4 used on each side)
New version length = 20 mm (0.78 in.) - used in Step 12
9. Remove the four tube mount screws (Item 6) from the yoke (Item 5).
10. Remove the cathode end cap / tube mount assembly from the X-ray tube (Item 4).
11. Install the new end cap / tube mount assembly onto the X-ray tube.
12. Install and tighten the four tube mount screws (apply thread locker and torque to 13.2 N-m (9.7
lb-ft)) and the four end cap screws (apply thread locker and torque to 2.5 N-m (1.8 lb-ft)).
13. Tip the front of the X-ray tube assembly upward and slide the assembly into the horizontal arm.
- Two bottom fasteners = 13.3 N-m (9.8 lb-ft )
15. Route and connect the rotor cable to the generator.
17. Install the collimator. Route and connect the collimator cable to the Thorax bulkhead J4 and
J5 connectors and chassis ground.
18. Insert the HV cables into the X-ray tube HV wells and tighten the mounting rings. Make sure
that the cable markings (Tube Anode or Tube Cathode) match up with the X-ray tube marking
(Anode or Cathode). See Figure 9-21, Figure 9-22, and Figure 9-23 for cable routing at the
rear of the X-ray tube, if necessary.
19. Replace the cable ties and secure the cable drape.
on page 423.

on page 139.
9.8.6 Tube mount - friction side (anode side)

Required persons: 1
Timing (min): 120


• Cable ties

Item: Tube mount - friction side (anode side)
Quantity: 1
Note 1: A newer version of this part has been introduced. It is not backward-compatible with the
original version. If replacing the original version, you must replacement BOTH sides with the newer
version. The newer version is physically longer. Mixing old and new versions results in tube
attachment mis-alignment. See Figure 9-193 for identification of mounts.
Item Description
1 A thickness notch in this location identifies a newer version tube mount
Figure 9-193 Tube mount identification
Note 2: The yolk mounting fasteners for the new version are longer than the original version. These
CRUSH fasteners are provided with the new version replacement part and MUST be used.
HAZARD
9.8.6.2.4 Safety


9.8.6.3 Procedure
4. Remove the HV cables from the X-ray tube wells. Protect the HV cables to prevent damage.
arm (Item 2).
1 2
Item Description
2 Horizontal arm
8. See Figure 9-195. Remove the four end cap mounting screws (Item 1) from the anode end cap
(Item 3).
1
6
4
See Note 1
3
Note 1: Do NOT loosen or disturb the screws in this location. These are non-
servicable items and require specialized fixtures for proper assembly. This applies
to both the cathode and anode sides.
Item Description
4 X-ray tube
5 Yoke
New version length = 20 mm (0.78 in.) - used in Step 12
9. Remove the four tube mount screws (Item 6) from the yoke (Item 5).
10. Remove the anode end cap / tube mount assembly from the X-ray tube (Item 4).
11. Install the new end cap / tube mount assembly onto the X-ray tube.
12. Install and tighten the four tube mount screws (apply thread locker and torque to 13.2 N-m (9.7
lb-ft)) and the four end cap screws (apply thread locker and torque to 2.5 N-m (1.8 lb-ft)).

(Anode or Cathode). See Figure 9-21, Figure 9-22 and Figure 9-23 for cable routing at the rear
of the X-ray tube, if necessary.
on page 423.

on page 139.
9.8.7 Tube yoke assembly

Required persons: 1
Timing (min): 120

• Cable ties

Item: Tube yoke assembly
Quantity: 1
9.8.7.2.4 Safety


9.8.7.3 Procedure
arm (Item 2).
1 2
Item Description
2 Horizontal arm
8. See Figure 9-197. Remove the eight tube mount screws (Item 6) from the yoke (Item 5).
1
6
Item Description
4 X-ray tube
5 Yoke

9. See Figure 9-198. Remove the mounting screws (Item 1) and cable bracket (Item 2) from the
old yoke (Item 3) and install them on the new yoke. Torque to 0.8 N-m (0.6 lb-ft) - no thread
locker is used.
Item Description
1 Mounting screws
2 Cable bracket
3 Yoke
Figure 9-198 Yoke
10. Install the new yoke. Install and tighten the eight tube mount screws. Torque to 13.2 N-m (9.7
lb-ft) - no thread locker is used.
(Anode or Cathode). See Figure 9-21, Figure 9-22 and Figure 9-23 for cable routing at the rear
of the X-ray tube, if necessary.
on page 423.

on page 139.
9.8.8 Canon X-ray tube

Required persons: 1
Timing: 6 hrs


Item: Canon X-ray tube
Quantity: 1
9.8.8.2.4 Safety


9.8.8.3 Procedure
arm (Item 2).
1 2
Item Description
2 Horizontal arm
8. See Figure 9-200. Remove the four end cap mounting screws (Item 1) from the cathode end
cap (Item 2).
1
6
Item Description
4 X-ray tube
5 Yoke
9. Remove the four cathode-side tube mount screws (Item 6) from the yoke (Item 5).
10. Remove the cathode end cap / tube mount assembly from the X-ray tube (Item 4).
11. Remove the four end cap mounting screws (Item 1) from the anode end cap (Item 3).
12. Remove the anode end cap / tube mount / yoke assembly from the X-ray tube (Item 4).
13. Use a HV spanner wrench (see Figure 9-201) to loosen and remove the HV cable tightening
rings, then remove the cables from the HV wells.
Figure 9-201 HV cable spanner wrench
14. Disconnect the stator wires from the old X-ray tube.

15. Connect the stator wires to the new X-ray tube.
Note: HV cables must be lubricated with silicone grease (GE P/N 46-125224P3 or equivalent) before
insertion into the X-ray tube HV wells. The grease is shipped with the X-ray tube.
16. Insert the HV cables into the new X-ray tube HV wells and tighten the mounting rings. Make
sure that the cable markings (Tube Anode or Tube Cathode) match up with the X-ray tube
marking (Anode or Cathode). See Figure 9-21, Figure 9-22 and Figure 9-23 for cable routing
at the rear of the X-ray tube, if necessary.
17. Install the anode end cap / tube mount assembly on the X-ray tube. Install and tighten the four
end cap mounting screws (apply thread locker and torque to 2.5 N-m (1.8 lb-ft)) and the four
tube mount screws (torque to 13.2 N-m (9.7 lb-ft) - no thread locker is used).
18. Install the cathode end cap / tube mount assembly on the X-ray tube. Install and tighten the
four end cap mounting screws (apply thread locker and torque to 2.5 N-m (1.8 lb-ft) and the
four tube mount screws (torque to 13.2 N-m (9.7 lb-ft) - no thread locker is used).
- Two bottom fasteners = 13.3 N-m (9.8 lb-ft)
on page 423.

on page 139.
- Half-value layer - see Table 7-17 Beam quality data (half value layer) on page 152.

page 149.
9.8.9 Collimator
9.8.9.1 Collimator replacement
9.8.9.1.1 Personnel requirements

Required persons: 1
Timing (min): 60
9.8.9.1.2 Preliminary requirements

• One Hexagon Wrench for M3 screws
• Cable ties

Item: Collimator
Quantity: 1
9.8.9.1.6 Safety
• Lead Locations. See Figure 9-202.

1
2
3
Item Description
1 Lead cone
2 Filter
3 Rear cover - lead plate pasted inside
Figure 9-202 Lead locations

• Remove the side covers, front covers and front bin. See 9.1.6 Column skirt cover removal on
page 244.
9.8.9.1.8 Procedure
See Figure 9-203. Collimator dismounting consists of disconnecting the collimator cable, opening
the back covers of the suspending lock sets, unlocking the suspending lock sets, pulling out the
rotation lock finger and lifting the collimator off of the interface ring.
2
5
Item Description
1 Handle
2 SID tape
3 Rotation lock handle
4 Suspending lock set (3 used)
5 Knob
6 Lamp switch
Figure 9-203 Installation and removal

2. See Figure 9-204. Disconnect the collimator cable from the Thorax bulkhead (J4, J5 and
ground).
J4
J5
Gnd
Figure 9-204 Collimator cable - Thorax bulkhead J4, J5, Gnd
Item Description
5. Follow the collimator cable back through the cable drape. At each existing cable tie, mark the
location of the cable tie on an adjacent cable, then cut and remove the cable tie.
6. Rotate the X-ray tube/collimator assembly 180 degrees (the bottom of the collimator faces
upward).

7. See Figure 9-207. Use a hex wrench to remove the screws and the back cover (Item 1) of the
suspending lock set. Repeat this step on all three back covers.
3 2 1
Item Description
1 Suspending lock set cover
2 Suspending lock finger
3 X-ray tube
4 Collimator
Figure 9-207 Suspending lock
8. See Figure 9-208. Pull out the three suspending lock fingers (Item 1). Use a small allen wrench
(Item 2) to hook the center of the lock finger screw and pull it straight outward until it locks into
the extended position.
Item Description
1 Suspending lock finger
2 Allen wench
Figure 9-208 Suspending lock
9. Rotate the handle of the rotation lock set counterclockwise until the lock finger cannot be
rotated any more.
LEAD HAZARD
• Do not touch lead cone or filter by hand without gloves.
• Do not let the lead cone touch anything during the collimator installation and removal process.
10. Carefully lift the old collimator off of the X-ray tube and set it aside.
11. On the new collimator:
a. Close the collimator blades.
b. Rotate the handle of the rotation lock set counterclockwise until the lock finger cannot be
rotated any more.
c. Open the suspending lock set covers and pull out the three lock fingers until they lock in
the extended position
d. Lift the collimator by holding the handle, then rotate the collimator 180 degrees so that the
lead cone is facing downward and its axis is perpendicular to tube flange’s mounting
surface.
12. Put the collimator on the tube. Make sure the lead cone does not touch the tube flange during
this step.
13. Press the three buttons on the top of the three suspending lock sets to let the lock fingers pop
out.
DROP HAZARD
MAKE SURE THERE IS NO RED COLOR VISIBLE AT THE BACK OF EACH SUSPENDING
LOCK SET AFTER PRESSING THE SUSPENDING LOCK BUTTONS.
14. Install the three suspending lock set covers and six screws (the collimator can be rotated so
that the suspending lock set is oriented towards the rear of the X-ray tube; this will make it
easier to install the screws and covers).
15. Turn the handle of the rotation lock set until the black line on the handle shaft aligns to the back
surface of the rotation lock set.
16. Check the installation thoroughly for correct and safe mounting.
on page 423.
17. Rotate the X-ray tube/collimator assembly back to the normal position.
18. Mark the collimator cable 400 mm (~16 in.) from the body of the collimator. Position the cable
so the mark lines up with the cable support bracket and install a cable tie.
19. Route the collimator back through the cable drape to the Thorax bulkhead, attaching cable ties
at the marks placed in Step 5 above.

20. Plug the collimator cable into J4 and J5 on the Thorax bulkhead and attach the ground wire to
the chassis.
clamp.
C
1 2
4 3
Item Description
30. Package the old collimator for return.
- Lamp (if HHS tests fail) - see 9.8.15 Collimator lamp on page 479.
- Field size indicator accuracy - see 7.1.3.3 Testing field size indicator accuracy (Optima
XR200amx) on page 142 or 7.1.3.4 Testing field size indicator accuracy (Optima
XR220amx or Optima XR200amx with digital upgrade) on page 143.
on page 139.
- Half-value layer - see 7.1.5.1 Measuring half value layer (HVL) on page 151.
9.8.10 Dose Area Product (DAP) meter

Required persons: 1
Timing (min): 10

• None

Item: DAP meter
Quantity: 1
9.8.10.2.4 Safety
• None


9.8.10.3 Procedure
1. See Figure 9-210. Disconnect the DAP cable connector (Item 1).
3
1
Item Description
1 DAP cable connector
2 Latch
3 DAP meter
Figure 9-210 DAP
2. Release the latch (Item 2) and slide the DAP (Item 3) out of the collimator rails.
3. Install the new DAP into the collimator rails and push backwards until the latch engages.
4. Connect the DAP cable.
Note:
Ensure the DAP cable is properly secured so that it does not obstruct the Tube Lock mechanism.
NOTICE: The system must be reset using the power button each time the DAP meter is
disconnected and then reconnected with system power on. The DAP meter does not support “Hot
Swapping”. Failure to reset the system in this occurrence can result in an inaccurate dose value
reported by the DAP meter.
1. Perform DAP calibration - see 5.6.3 DAP calibration on page 116.
- X-ray - Dose report - see X-ray on page 43.
- Light field intensity - 7.1.3.1 Testing light intensity on page 138.
9.8.11 DAP meters side rail bracket replacement

Required persons: 1
Timing (min): 20

• None

Item: FRU 5724438 Optima DAP meters new side rail with 90 deg bend
Quantity: 1
9.8.11.2.4 Safety
• None

Remove DAP meter from system see 9.8.10 Dose Area Product (DAP) meter on page 469.
9.8.11.3 Procedure
1. Remove the 3 screws that are on the Left Hand Side (LHS) of the DAP rail strip (1), see
Figure 9-211.
Figure 9-211 3 screws

2. Reuse those 3 screws to affix the FRU 5724438 Optima DAP meter's new side rail with 90
degree bend (alternatively extra screws are also provided in the FRU kit).
Figure 9-212 FRU 5724438
Note:
Ensure the DAP cable is properly secured so that it does not obstruct the Tube Lock mechanism.
• Install DAP meter. See 9.8.10 Dose Area Product (DAP) meter on page 469.
The DAP meter will now be able to be inserted in only one direction.
9.8.12 SID tape measure

Required persons: 1
Timing (min): 10


Item: SID tape measure
Quantity: 1
9.8.12.2.4 Safety
• None

• None

9.8.12.3 Procedure
1. Remove the two screws and remove the tape cover. See Figure 9-213.
1
3
Item Description
1 Tape
2 Tape cover
3 Tape cover screws
Figure 9-213 SID tape measure replacement
2. Take the tape out of the tape cover.

3. Put a new tape into the tape cover.
4. Mount the tape cover and tighten the two screws with thread locker.
None
9.8.13 Collimator adjustment knob

Required persons: 1
Timing (min): 10


Item: Collimator adjustment knob
Quantity: 1 (kit contains parts for one knob assembly)
9.8.13.2.4 Safety
• None

9.8.13.3 Procedure
1. Loosen the setscrew and remove the knob from the shaft. See Figure 9-214.
Item Description
1 Knob
2 Set screw
Figure 9-214 Knob replacement

2. Put the new knob onto the knob shaft.

3. Ensure that the knob is up against the indicator tightly, and tighten the setscrew with thread
locker (i.e. Loctite 242 [blue]).
• Field size indicator accuracy - see 7.1.3.3 Testing field size indicator accuracy (Optima
XR200amx) on page 142 or 7.1.3.4 Testing field size indicator accuracy (Optima XR220amx
or Optima XR200amx with digital upgrade) on page 143.
• Light field to X-ray field alignment - see 7.1.3.2 Testing light field to X-ray field alignment on
page 139.
9.8.14 Collimator pointer

Required persons: 1
Timing (min): 20

• 2 triangular stickers
• 1 piece of paper

Item: Collimator pointer
Quantity: 1 (kit contains parts for one knob assembly)
9.8.14.2.4 Safety
• None

9.8.14.3 Procedure
1. Turn the knob counterclockwise until it cannot be rotated any more.
2. Attach a triangle sticker on the front cover and make one of its vertexes align with the indicator
line. See Figure 9-215.
Item Description
1 Attach temporary position markers here
Figure 9-215 Paste symbols to replace the indicator plate kit
3. Remove the knob (refer to 9.8.13.3 Procedure on page 475).

4. Loosen two setscrews to remove the indicator plate kit from the knob shaft. See Figure 9-216.

Item Description
1 Indicator plate kit
2 Set screws
3 Knob washer
Figure 9-216 Indicator plate kit replacement
5. Insert a paper between the knob washer and front cover.

6. Loosen the setscrews on the new indicator plate kit and mount it onto the knob shaft.
7. Press the indicator plate kit to the knob washer, and let the indicator point to the paste symbol’s
vertex.
8. Tighten the setscrews.
Note: Ensure both setscrews have been tightened before proceeding to the next step.
9. Mount the knob. See 9.8.13 Collimator adjustment knob.

10. Rotate the knob to ensure it can rotate smoothly.
11. Verify the field size indicator accuracy. See 7.1.3.3 Testing field size indicator accuracy
(Optima XR200amx) on page 142 or 7.1.3.4 Testing field size indicator accuracy (Optima
12. Remove the paper between the knob washer and the front cover.
13. Remove the triangle pasted on the front cover.
• Field size indicator accuracy - see 7.1.3.3 Testing field size indicator accuracy (Optima
XR200amx) on page 142 or 7.1.3.4 Testing field size indicator accuracy (Optima XR220amx
or Optima XR200amx with digital upgrade) on page 143.
page 139.
9.8.15 Collimator lamp

Required persons: 1
Timing (min): 30


Item: Collimator lamp
Quantity: 1
9.8.15.2.4 Safety
• None


9.8.15.3 Procedure
1. Rotate the tube and make the tube flange’s axis perpendicular to the ground with the bottom
of the collimator facing upward.
LEAD HAZARD
Do not touch the interior of the rear collimator cover without gloves.
2. Remove the four screws on the rear collimator cover, then remove the cover. See Figure 9-
217.
Item Description
1 Screws
Figure 9-217 Rear cover removal
3. Unplug the defective collimator lamp.

4. Make sure the screws which hold the lamp mask are tight.
POTENTIAL DAMAGE TO LAMP

When holding the new lamp, operator must wear clean cotton gloves.
5. Insert a new lamp in the lamp socket.

6. Make sure the filament of the new lamp is in the middle of the window on the lamp mask at
lateral orientation.
7. Mount the rear cover of the collimator and tighten the screws.
8. Turn the rotation lock handle until the black line on the handle shaft aligns to the back surface
of the rotation lock set.
9. Rotate the collimator to the desired position.

10. Verify if there is misalignment (refer to 7.1.3.2 Testing light field to X-ray field alignment on
page 139).
If there is misalignment in the N-S (lateral) orientation, then:
* Ensure the lamp position is according to the requirement of step 6 above.
* If the lamp position is correct, adjust the lamp support by loosening the screws. See
Figure 9-218.
Item Description
1 Adjustment screws
Figure 9-218 Lamp support adjustment
If there is misalignment in E-W (longitudinal) orientation, then:

* Ensure the lamp position is according to the requirement of step 4 above.

* If the screws are not loosened, adjust the lamp mask by loosening the screws, then
adjust orientation. See Figure 9-219.
1 2
Item Description
1 Adjust orientation
2 Screws for lamp mask
Figure 9-219 Lamp mask adjustment
11. Darken the exam room and check if the light field intensity fulfills the specification (refer to
7.1.3.1 Testing light intensity on page 138).
12. If the light field intensity does not fulfill the specification, remove the rear cover, and:
13. Check that the voltage at the collimator lamp is between 20 and 22 VDC.
14. Ensure the lamp position is according to the requirement of step 6.
15. If the lamp position is right, adjust the lamp mask to make it shade the filament smaller than
original position.
16. Repeat steps 10 through 15 above until misalignment and light intensity can both meet the
criteria of acceptance.
17. Apply thread locker (i.e. Loctite 242 [blue]) to the rear cover screws. Install the rear cover and
tighten the screws.
- Adjust the collimator lamp supply potentiometer R3 so that the voltage at the collimator
lamp is 20.0 - 22.0 VDC.
- Field size indicator accuracy - 7.1.3.3 Testing field size indicator accuracy (Optima
XR200amx) on page 142 or 7.1.3.4 Testing field size indicator accuracy (Optima
on page 139.
9.8.16 Collimator rotation lock finger

Required persons: 1
Timing (min): 20

• Cable ties

Item: Collimator rotation lock finger
Quantity: 1
9.8.16.2.4 Safety
• None

• Remove the collimator from the X-ray tube. See 9.8.9.1 Collimator replacement.

9.8.16.3 Procedure
1. See Figure 9-220. Remove the four mounting screws (Item 4) and the rotation lock cover (Item
3).
Item Description
1 Collimator
2 Rotation lock knob
3 Rotation lock cover
4 Rotation lock cover screws
Figure 9-220 Rotation lock
2. See Figure 9-221. Remove the rotation lock assembly (Item 2) from the collimator.
3. Remove the rotation lock finger (Item 1) from the rotation lock assembly (Item 2). Slightly
rotating the lock knob will make it easier to remove the lock finger.
Item Description
1 Rotation lock finger
2 Rotation lock assembly
Figure 9-221 Rotation lock finger assembly
4. Install the new lock finger. The wider end of the lock finger should be on the bottom, as shown
in Figure 9-221.
5. Install the rotation lock assembly and mounting screws on the collimator.
6. Install the collimator on the X-ray tube. See 9.8.9.1 Collimator replacement.
- Collimator (the 3 detent and 1 collimator rotation checks) - see Tube Column and Arm on
page 42.
on page 139.
9.8.17 Collimator handle switch

Collimator handle switch FRU kit with P/N 5719977 is available as collimator low level FRU part.
Follow the below diagnostic methods to order the FRU kit P/N 5719977:
• Visually check if the left or right handle plate (2) and handle adapter (3) is broken/damaged.
• Check the functionality switches by performing “Brake Test”.

Required persons: 1
Timing (min): 60


• Adhesive
• Solder (RoHS Solder, see Figure 9-222)
Figure 9-222 RoHS Solder

• Item: FRU kit 5719977 collimator handle switch
• Quantity: 1
9.8.17.2.4 Safety
• None

• If DAP is present remove it to avoid the breakage of the DAP connector, see 9.8.10 Dose Area
Product (DAP) meter on page 469.
• Move the horizontal arm away from the system.
• Rotate the X−ray tube/collimator to position the back side of the collimator handle switch
pointing upward. See Figure 9-223.
Figure 9-223 Collimator rotation
• Shut off power by turning the main circuit breaker to the OFF position.
• Perform LOTO on the system.
9.8.17.3 Procedure
1. Remove two flat head screws (1) from the left or right handle plate (2/8).
Note:
The references of “left or right handle plate (2/8)” is referred as “handle plate (2)”.
Mark up - (2/8): 2 referred as “left handle plate” and 8 is referred as “right handle plate”.
The procedure to replace FRU kit 5719977 is same for left hand side and right hand side of
collimator switch.
Figure 9-224 Collimator handle switch
2. Remove the handle plate (2), handle adapter (3), and spring plate (4).

Figure 9-225 Assembly/Disassembly of Collimator Handle Switch
3. Remove the SPDT switch (6) from the front cover. Ensure that the switch adapter (7) does not
get loosen and get removed with the switch.
4. If the switch adapter (7) is damaged or broken, remove the switch adapter (7) from the handle
assembly and replace using supplied adapter in kit.
5. Document the correct wiring (9) locations prior to removal from the SPDT switch (6). This will
ensure the correct attachment of the wiring to the replacement switch (6) from the kit.
6. Unsolder the wiring (9) from the SPDT switch (6).
7. Solder the wiring (9), ensuring the wires are soldered to the correct locations from step 5, to
the SPDT switch (6).
Figure 9-226 SPDT Switch Solder Direction
Note:
Once soldering is completed, confirm if connections are correct by performing the following:
• Check correct placement of soldered wires (9) by using a DVM to check continuity of the SPDT
switch (6). The measurement should be OPEN normally, and SHORTED when the SPDT
switch (6) is pressed.
8. Replace the switch adapter (7) in the same location as before removal of the SPDT switch (6).
9. Install the replacement SPDT switch (6).

10. Replace the spring plate (4), handle adapter (3), and handle plate (2).
11. Tighten the two flat head screws (1) on the handle plate (2).
• Remove LOTO and Power on the system.
• Rotate the tube/collimator to its normal operating position.
• Install DAP (If DAP was removed) see 9.8.10 Dose Area Product (DAP) meter on page 469.
Test the switch to be sure that it activates/deactivates, and does not stick in the ON position.
9.8.18 Collimator front cover replacement

Follow this procedure to replace broken/faulty collimator front cover, order FRU P/N 5761534
applicable for Optima XR200amx/XR220amx/XR200amx digital upgrade/Brivo XR285amx
systems.

Required persons: 1
Timing (min): 60

• 2 triangular stickers
• 1 piece of paper

• Item: FRU 5761534 Collimator Front Cover FRU
• Quantity: 1
9.8.18.2.4 Safety
• None

• Shut off power by turning the main circuit breaker to the OFF position.
• If DAP is present, remove it to avoid the breakage of the DAP or its connector (to remove, see
9.8.10 Dose Area Product (DAP) meter on page 469.

9.8.18.3 Procedure
9.8.18.3.1 Disassembly of collimator front cover

1. Remove Collimator Covers.
a. Remove collimator back cover by removing 4 screws using 2mm Allen-wrench. See
Figure 9-227 and Figure 9-228.
Figure 9-227 Collimator back cover
Item Description
1 Collimator back cover
Figure 9-228 Collimator back cover - 4 screws
Figure 9-229 Collimator back cover removed
b. Remove holding cover by removing 2 screws from backside of collimator and by removing
4 screws located on top of the collimator cover using 2 mm Allen-wrench. See Figure 9-
230.
Figure 9-230 Holding cover
Note: Use rotation lock knob to rotate the collimator to access the top cover screws. See Figure 9-231.
Figure 9-231 Rotation lock knob
2. Separate the holding cover by slowly pulling it away from the collimator. See Figure 9-232.
Figure 9-232 Collimator holding cover
3. Disconnect the switch breakage connector, located inside the collimator near the bottom of the
collimator front cover. See Figure 9-233.

Figure 9-233 Switch breakage connector
9.8.18.3.2 Disassembly of front cover knobs
Note: Perform only during disassembling the “Collimator Front Cover FRU”, DO NOT perform while
assembling the “Collimator Front Cover FRU”.
1. Turn the knob counterclockwise until it cannot be rotated any more and attach a triangle sticker
on the front cover and make one of its vertexes align with the indicator line, see Figure 9-234.
See 9.8.14 Collimator pointer on page 476.
Figure 9-234 Collimator front cover knobs
Item Description
1 Attach temporary position makers here
2. Loosen the setscrew and remove the knob from the shaft, see Figure 9-235. See
9.8.13 Collimator adjustment knob on page 475.
Figure 9-235 Setscrew
Item Description
1 Knob
2 Setscrew
3. Loosen two setscrews to remove the indicator plate kit from the knob shaft, see Figure 9-236.
See 9.8.14 Collimator pointer on page 476.
Figure 9-236 Indicator plate
Item Description
1 Indicator plate
2 Set screws
3 Knob washer
Figure 9-237 Knobs removed
9.8.18.3.3 Assembly of front cover knobs
Note: Perform only while assembling the “Collimator Front Cover FRU”, DO NOT perform while
disassembling the “Collimator Front Cover FRU”.
1. Insert a paper between the knob washer and front cover.

2. Mount the indicator plate onto the knob shaft. Press the indicator plate kit to the knob washer,
and let the indicator point to the paste symbol’s vertex.
3. Tighten the setscrews properly.
Note: Ensure both setscrews have been tightened before proceeding to the next step.
4. Put the new knob onto the knob shaft.

5. Ensure that the knob is up against the indicator tightly, and tighten the setscrew with thread
locker (i.e. Loctite 242 [blue]).
6. Rotate the knob to ensure it can rotate smoothly.
7. Remove the paper between the knob washer and the front cover.
8. Remove the triangle pasted on the front cover.
9.8.18.3.4 Removal of collimator front cover

1. Remove 3 + 3 screws from both sides of collimator as shown below, these screws hold the
collimator front cover.
Figure 9-238 Collimator front cover
2. Carefully remove the front cover from the collimator assembly. See Figure 9-240.
9.8.18.3.5 Assembly of Collimator Front Cover

To assemble the Collimator Front Cover on to the collimator, please perform the disassembly
procedure in reverse order.
9.8.18.3.6 Finalization
1. Install DAP (If DAP was removed) see 9.8.10 Dose Area Product (DAP) meter on page 469.
2. Remove LOTO and power on the system.
3. Rotate the collimator to its normal operating position if rotated while accessing the Collimator
Cover Screws.
4. Test the field lamp switch and handle side switch to be sure that it activates/deactivates, and
does not stick in the ON position.
5. Perform finalization for Collimator adjustment knob and collimator pointer.
• Field size indicator accuracy -
see 7.1.3.3 Testing field size indicator accuracy (Optima XR200amx) on page 142
or
7.1.3.4 Testing field size indicator accuracy (Optima XR220amx or Optima XR200amx with
digital upgrade) on page 143.
page 139.
9.8.19 Tablet holder assembly

Required persons: 1
Timing (min): 5

• Loctite 243 or equivalent.

Item: Tablet holder assembly
Quantity: 1
9.8.19.2.4 Safety
• None

• Shut down the system and unplug the power cord from the wall outlet.
9.8.19.3 Procedure
1. Unlock the tablet holder clamp and remove the tablet, if required.
2. Remove the tablet holder assembly together with the lead apron hanger from the column.
3. Install new tablet holder assembly together with original lead apron hanger on the column. See
the System Manual, Configuration Chapter, Installing hardware options/Installing the tablet
holder assembly Section, Step 4.
4. Perform tablet holder assembly functional check. See the System Manual, Configuration
Chapter, Installing hardware options/Installing the tablet holder assembly Section, Step 5 to 9.
5. Return the key to the site administrator, if required.
9.8.20 Flashpad Detector – Power Button Replacement
9.8.20.1.1 Personal Requirements

• Required persons: 01
• Time: 30 mins (15 mins for procedure + 15 mins for Finalization check)

• 46-268445G1 or 5135228 - Torque Wrench Tool Kit or equivalent (capable of 1 Nm)
• Electro static discharge (ESD) kit (2220482 or equivalent)
• 46-170683P1 - Loctite 222 or equivalent
• Disposable Gloves
• 46-170137P1, RTV-162 Non-corrosive adhesive, one part silicon rubber, white color 2.8 OZ.
tube lant. cures at room temperature.
Note: 46-170137P1 is a FRU part, if required order it.

• 5761642 – LLFRU Power Button – Qty 01.
9.8.20.1.5 Safety
• None

• Follow proper Electrostatic Discharge protection procedures.
9.8.20.2 Procedure
9.8.20.2.1 Flashpad detector - Remove Power Button

1. Place the detector on an ESD mat with the back (fastener side) facing up. Wear an ESD strap
to protect the electronics, and wear disposable gloves to prevent contamination.
2. Remove the 10 screws on the lower handle cover using a 2.5mm hex security bit as shown
below. Hold the handle halves together to avoid any screw from pulling them apart.
3.
Figure 9-241 External handle screws
Figure 9-242 2.5mm hex security bit
4. Handle lower cover as shown in (Figure 9-243) away from the detector from both ends.
Carefully lift the lower handle cover away.
5.

Figure 9-243 Handle lower cover
6. Remove the power button and disconnect the 2 pin connector from the circuit board and
remove the power button from the handle top covers cable slot. See Figure 9-244.
Figure 9-244 Power button
Figure 9-245 Power button, cable, and 2 pin connector
Figure 9-246
7. Install the replacement LLFRU Power Button 5761642 by sliding into the handle top covers
cable slot. Connect the two-wire connector to the circuit board receptacle. See Figure 9-247.
Figure 9-247 Power button
8. Apply RTV 162 (46-170137P1) to top of harness of connector, which runs between power
button to SRB. Refer to below picture. Keep part as it is for 15 minutes to move ahead for the
next step.
9.
Figure 9-248 Application of RTV 162 to top of harness of connector
10. Ensure the wiring is in place. See Figure 9-249.
Figure 9-249 Wiring
11. Carefully reinstall the lower handle cover assembly onto the detector and press it together. The
two halves should fit together without force except along the top edge where the handle cover
must be pressed into the aluminum bar beneath. Ensure that there are no gaps around the
perimeter and that the latch, host ID tag, and power button are in accurate position.
12. Set the torque drive (included in kit model 46-268445G1 or 5135228 or equivalent) to 1.0 Nm.
Apply Loctite 222 or equivalent to each of the 10 screws on the handle lower cover and torque
using the 2.5mm hex security bit in the order. See Figure 9-250.
Figure 9-250 10 screws
Perform the following functional checks to ensure that the detector has not been damaged during
the procedure:
• Insert the battery in URP/Flashpad detector and power on the detector.
• Run wireless communication test. (UIF->Diagnostic->Wireless Detector->Wireless Comm.).
• Signal strength and bandwidth should be greater than 30.
• Run the QAP in wireless mode.
• Ensure that an acquisition can be completed successfully in wireless, docked, and tethered
modes of operation.
9.8.21 UWB Channel Change Procedure

Required persons: 1
Timing (min): 60

• None
• None

• None
•
9.8.21.2.4 Safety
• None

• None
POTENTIAL FOR ELECTRICAL SHOCK.

CONTACT WITH A NON INSULATED POWER SOURCE IS POSSIBLE.
TAG AND LOCKOUT POWER BEFORE PERFORMING SERVICE.
Potential for ESD Damage, if components are improperly handled.

Before You Begin:
1. Read and follow procedures carefully.
2. Preform the LOTO procedure for the electrical power, see Section 1.2 Lock Out/Tag Out
(LOTO) procedure for electrical power.
9.8.21.3 Procedure
Please follow the below steps:
1. Press CTRL+SHIFT+F5 to open a command window.
2. Select the Terminal icon

3. Please identify the optimal channel no as per • To Identify optimal channel no for wireless
signal strength and link quality: on page 504 if not known.
4. Execute the below commands and refer screen capture.
i. Type: xxxxx [space]– [space] xruser [enter]
Password:
Note: Please consult your administrator for Password information
ii. Type: cd[space]/magichome/xruser/bin/[enter]
iii. Type: cp[space] channels.cfg[space] channels.cfg.bak[enter]
iv. Type: chmod[space]755[space] channels.cfg [enter]
v. Type: gedit[space] channels.cfg [enter]

5. Select Find.
6. In the Search For text box: Type: As per the channel list for the applicable country.
Example: For country US and Wireless Regulatory code FCC, Type: FCC, Select Find.
7. The channel list is shown as marked as shown below.
8. Position cursor and change the first number in the “channelList” to be the desired channel
number. Make sure to change only the digits and preserve comma that after the channel
number.
Example: When changing default channel number from 13 to 14, the lines before and after the change
will look as below:
Before:
[FCC]

channelList=13,15,11,9,29,31,27,25,14,12,10,30,28,26
After:
[FCC]
channelList=14,15,11,9,29,31,27,25,13,12,10,30,28,26
9. Click Save for saving the changes.
10. Select File Quit.
11. Back on Terminal window, Type: chmod[space]555[space] channels.cfg [enter]
2. After PC is booted up, open Terminal window using Step 1 & 2 above.
3. Execute below command and refer screen capture as required.
Type: cat[space]`find[space]/sys/devices/[space]-name[space]beacon[space]|[space]grep
uwb` [enter]
Note: In the above step, the command < find[space]/sys/devices/[space]-name[space]beacon[space]|

[space]grep uwb > is enclosed within the back-quote or Grave accent (`) symbol.
4. The channel number displayed in the output of Step 3 above should be the same as the first
channel number in the country channel list line changed in the Instructions above. Ex: For
country US and Wireless Regulatory code FCC.
Note:
• This result is expected when there’s no other GE system using UWB technologies in the
vicinity to the system under modification.
• If the finalization steps failed, please double check the steps and retry once. If still has issue,
please report the issue to engineer team.
• To Identify optimal channel no for wireless signal strength and link quality:
1. Execute the below commands and refer the screen capture below as required.
i. Type: xxxxx[space]– [enter]
Password:
Note: Please consult your administrator for Password information
ii. Check the channel list for the applicable country channel list:
Type: cat[space]/magichome/xruser/bin/channels.cfg [enter]
Example: [BG1Only]
channelList=13,15,11,9,14,12,10
[FCC]
channelList=13,15,11,9,29,31,27,25,14,12,10,30,28,26
[EU]
channelList=29,31,27,25,30,28,26
[JapanKorea]
channelList=31
[Thailand]
channelList=13
[Brazil]
channelList=30
[Disable]
channelList=-1
iii. Check signal strength and link quality for a channel number
Example: For US country and Wireless Regulatory code FCC, for channel 14 is intended to check signal
strength and link quality.
[FCC]
channelList=13,15,11,9,29,31,27,25,14,12,10,30,28,26
Type: echo[space] 14[space] > `find[space]/sys/devices/[space]-name
[space]beacon[space] | [space]grep uwb` [enter]
Note: ` in the above command is back-quote or Grave accent (`) symbol.
To check if the channel no is set or not.
Type: cat[space]`find[space]/sys/devices/[space]-name[space]beacon[space]| [space]grep
uwb` [enter]
Complete your signal strength and link quality testing in Diagnostics->Wireless Detector-
>Wireless Comm to identify the location for maximum return.
2. Continue testing the channels until all available channels have been tested to identify
optimal channel for signal strength and link quality.
IMPORTANT
In the event of reloading software on PC, this entire Instruction starting from Step 1 needs to be
performed again as the script /magichome/xruser/bin/channels.cfg is not saved in System
Backup.
Section 9.9 Disk Management Tool
At a minimum a disclaimer should be put in about the need to ensure all Patient Health
Information (PHI) is inaccessible before removing it from the Customer’s site.

The Disk Management Tool is also called as the Logicube Falcon and SCSI Module, it is a
microcomputer based service tool for use by all modalities. The Disk Management Tool provides
two basic capabilities:
1. Provides a tool for securely wiping information from hard drives and mobile media (Flash
Memory Cards, USB Flash Drives). For wiping procedures, see Disk Management Tool
Service Manual 5500610-1EN. The Disk Management Tool is compliant to the GEHC Global
Secure Wipe Standard (DOC1495474).
2. Provides a tool for cloning the hard drives.
Use of the tool to clone hard drives is not supported by RRF modality for use on Finished
Medical Devices.

• 5534806 Disk Management Tool
• Cables
• Adapter
9.9.1.2 Consumables
• 5535274-1EN Drive Securing Label Sheet
9.9.1.3 Replacement parts

• None
9.9.1.4 Safety
• Weight of individual equipment is 22 Lbs / 9.98 Kgs.
9.9.1.5 Required conditions

• Remove hard drive using.
Page 506 Section 9.9 Disk Management Tool

9.9.2 Procedure
Figure 9-251 Disk wipe tool
1. Connect the device and select the required function.

2. Select the source unit and set the parameters for the action.
3. Select the destination and execute the task.
4. You then can add additional tasks for the remaining devices connected (i.e., clone 2 sets of
drives at once, wipe 4 drives at once, clone one set of drives, and wipe 2 others at the same
time).
5. Use the label sheet (5535274-1EN) and stick as applicable.
Note: If the disk wipe process fails, stick the “Inaccessible drive” label on the drive”.
Note: For more information, see 5500610-1EN Disk Management Tool Service Manual.

Page 508 Section 9.9 Disk Management Tool

Appendix A Printer Configuration

Information
Section A.1 Agfa Drystar 3000 printer parameters
Table A-1 Agfa Drystar 3000 printer configuration information
Tab Attribute Value Comments

DICOM Printer Label DRYSTAR3000 Or customers preference
Application Entry Title Enter value given by site AE titles may be site-
network administrator specific, check with site
Network Address Enter value given by site
network administrator
Port Number 104 Port number may be site-
specific, check with site
Pixel Depth 12
Printer Pixel Size (micron) 79.4
Configuration Information PERCEPTION_LUT=LIN
Printer
EAR (no spaces)
Density Min. = 20, Max. = 300
Magnification Type CUBIC
Smooth Factor 140
Trim NO Not supported
Polarity NORMAL
Border Density BLACK
Empty Image Density BLACK
Printer Memory Size 40Mbyte
Select the desired layouts 1:1, 1:2, 2:1, 2:2
allowed for this printer
Layouts
Slide formats Not applicable Not supported; do not
select
Page 509

8 x 10in Pixel width = 2388 Agfa layout - portrait 9006
Pixel height = 2972
10 x 12in Pixel width =
Pixel height =
Pixel height =
Pixel height = 4256
Film Sizes
Pixel height =
Pixel height = 5174
24 x 24cm Pixel width =
Pixel height =
Pixel height =
Agfa Drystar 3000 general comments

Supports clear and blue film. If medium selected (clear, paper) does not match the printer, the job
will be queued until the correct film is loaded.
Agfa layouts are specific to maximum printable area layouts. Consult the Agfa technical
representative to install custom layouts.
Only 14x17 film was tested with this printer.
Trim is not supported by this printer.
Note: Avoid print job failures by having printer vendor ensure that the Confirmation Level (DICOM
Connectivity) at the printer is set to Ø (accept all). Failure to set this level on the printer will result in
failed print jobs.
Agfa print layouts

Custom layout must be configured by printer vendor for accurate image sizing. In addition to the
above layouts, the following layouts must be installed by the Agfa print representative:
Table A-2 Agfa print layouts
Film size Format P/l Agfa layout

14 x 17 1:1 P 2411
14 x 17 1:2 P 9001
14 x 17 2:1 P 9000
14 x 17 2:2 P 9002
14 x 17 1:1 L 2511
14 x 17 1:2 L 9003
Page 510

14 x 17 2:1 L 9004
14 x 17 2:2 L 9005
11 x 14 1:1 P 9014
11 x 14 1:2 P 9102
11 x 14 2:1 P 9103
11 x 14 2:2 P 9104
11 x 14 1:1 L 9018
11 x 14 1:2 L 9202
11 x 14 2:1 L 9203
11 x 14 2:2 L 9204
8 x 10 1:1 P 9006
8 x 10 1:2 P 9009
8 x 10 2:1 P 9008
8 x 10 2:2 P 9010
8 x 10 1:1 L 9007
8 x 10 1:2 L 9012
8 x 10 2:1 L 9011
8 x 10 2:2 L 9013
Page 511
Section A.2 Agfa Drystar 5500 printer parameters

DICOM Printer Label DRYSTAR5500 Or customer preference
Pixel Depth 12
Printer Configuration Information LUT=0.0
Smooth Factor 140
Trim NO
Polarity NORMAL
Layouts
select
8 x 10in Pixel width = 3852
Pixel height = 4300
Pixel height = 5280
Pixel height =
Pixel height =
Film Sizes
Pixel height =
Pixel height = 7788
Pixel height =
Pixel height =
Page 512
Agfa print layouts

Custom layout must be configured by printer vendor for accurate image sizing. In addition to the
above layouts, the following layouts must be installed by the Agfa print representative:

14 x 17 1:1 P 2411
14 x 17 1:2 P 9001
14 x 17 2:1 P 9000
14 x 17 2:2 P 9002
14 x 17 1:1 L 2511
14 x 17 1:2 L 9003
14 x 17 2:1 L 9004
14 x 17 2:2 L 9005
11 x 14 1:1 P 9014
11 x 14 1:2 P 9102
11 x 14 2:1 P 9103
11 x 14 2:2 P 9104
11 x 14 1:1 L 9018
11 x 14 1:2 L 9202
11 x 14 2:1 L 9203
11 x 14 2:2 L 9204
8 x 10 1:1 P 9006
8 x 10 1:2 P 9009
8 x 10 2:1 P 9008
8 x 10 2:2 P 9010
8 x 10 1:1 L 9007
8 x 10 1:2 L 9012
8 x 10 2:1 L 9011
8 x 10 2:2 L 9013
Page 513
Section A.3 Codonics Horizon printer parameters
Table A-5 Codonics Horizon printer configuration information

DICOM Printer Label HORIZON Or customers preference
Pixel Depth 12
Configuration Information LUT=LINEAR
Printer
Magnification Type REPLICATE
Smooth Factor 0 Not supported
Trim NO
Polarity NORMAL
Border Density BLACK Can also pass OD value of
0-310
Empty Image Density BLACK Can also pass OD value of
0-310
Select the desired layouts
Layouts allowed for this printer
Slide formats
Page 514
Table A-5 Codonics Horizon printer configuration information

Pixel height = 2790
Pixel height =
Pixel height =
Pixel height = 4072
Film Sizes
Pixel height =
Pixel height = 5025
Pixel height =
Pixel height =
Codonics Horizon general comments

Codonics Horizon printer supports clear film, blue film and paper.
Only 8 x 10 and 14 x 17 inch film formats have been validated.
Other smoothing and sharpening algorithms for magnification type are supported.
Consult Codonics technical representative to install customer preferences if desired.
Page 515
Section A.4 Fuji FM DPL printer parameters
Table A-6 Fuji FM DPL printer configuration information

DICOM Printer Label FUJIFMDPL Or customer preference
Pixel Depth 12
Printer Pixel Size (micron) 100
Printer Configuration Information CS000
Smooth Factor SHARP
Trim NO
Polarity NORMAL
Layouts
select
Pixel height = 2510
Pixel height =
Pixel height =
Pixel height = 3600
Film Sizes
Pixel height =
Pixel height = 4240
Pixel height =
Pixel height =
Page 516
Fuji FM DPL general comments

The following configurations must be configured by the Fuji printer representative to print correctly
sized images:
• LUT1 as SAR17 for calling AE_TITLE.
• Trim width at 1 pixel for calling AE_TITLE.
• Globally configure “a margin between image” for 0 pixels.
• Globally configure “Image layout” for spread.
Section A.5 Fuji DryPix 1000 printer parameters
Table A-7 Fuji DryPix 1000 printer configuration information

DICOM Printer Label DRYPIX1000 Or customer preference
Pixel Depth 12
Smooth Factor SHARP
Trim NO
Polarity NORMAL
Layouts
select
Page 517

Pixel height = 2877
Pixel height =
Pixel height =
Pixel height = 4096
Film Sizes
Pixel height =
Pixel height =
Pixel height =
Pixel height =
Fuji DryPix 1000 general comments

sized images:
• LUT1 as SAR17 for calling AE_TITLE.-Trim width at 1 pixel for calling AE_TITLE.
• A densitometer filter (FUJI part number 605S0003) must be used when performing printer
calibration.
Page 518

Pixel Depth 12
Smooth Factor SHARP
Trim NO
Polarity NORMAL
Layouts
select
Pixel height =
Pixel height =
Pixel height =
Pixel height =
Film Sizes
Pixel height =
Pixel height = 4972
Pixel height =
Pixel height =
Page 519

sized images:
calibration.
Note: Only 14x17 film should be used with this printer. Any other film size used may print films with
incorrect measurements.

Application Entry Title Enter value given by site AE Titles may be site-
Pixel Depth 12
Printer Pixel Size (micron) 50
Smooth Factor SHARP
Trim NO
Polarity NORMAL
Slide formats
Page 520

Pixel height = 4819
Pixel height =
Pixel height = 7043
Pixel height =
Film Sizes
Pixel height =
Pixel height =
Pixel height =
Pixel height =

sized images:
calibration.
Note: Only 14x17 film should be used with this printer. Any other film size used may print films with
incorrect measurements.
Page 521
Section A.8 Kodak 8200 printer parameters
Table A-10 Kodak 8200 printer configuration information

DICOM Printer Label KODAK8200 Or customer preference
Application Entry Title Enter value given by site AE Titles may be site-
Pixel Depth 12
Printer Configuration Information LUT=Wkstn2a.w87,2 (no

spaces)
Smooth Factor 15
Trim NO
Polarity NORMAL
Select the desired layouts 1:1, 1:2, 2:1, 2:2 1:2 only valid for portrait
Layouts allowed for this printer 2:1 only valid for landscape
Slide formats
Pixel height =
Pixel height =
Pixel height =
Pixel height =
Film Sizes
Pixel height =
Pixel height = 4277
Pixel height =
Pixel height =
Page 522

Pixel Depth 12
Printer
Configuration Information LUT=Wkstn2a.w87,2 (no
spaces)
Smooth Factor 15
Trim NO
Polarity NORMAL
Slide formats Not applicable Not supported; do not select
Page 523

Pixel height =
Pixel height =
Pixel height =
Pixel height =
Film Sizes
Pixel height =
Pixel height = 4277
Pixel height =
Pixel height =
Page 524

Pixel Depth 12
Printer Configuration Information LUT=Wkstn2a.w87,2 (no

spaces)
Smooth Factor 15
Trim NO
Polarity NORMAL
Slide formats Not applicable Not supported; do not select
Pixel height =
Pixel height =
Pixel height =
Pixel height =
Film Sizes
Pixel height =
Pixel height = 5221
Pixel height =
Pixel height =
Page 525
Kodak 8700 general comments

The following configurations must be configured by the Kodak printer representative:
• Calling AE_TITLE must be declared in 9410 host table or print will be rejected.
• Pixel correction turned off.
• TFT emulation enabled. Landscape printing will be functional only if a Kodak 8800 is installed.
Note: Customer will get incorrect image sizing if unsupported formats (portrait 2:1 or landscape 1:2) are
used.

Application Entry Title Enter value given by site AE titles may be site-specific,
network administrator check with site
Pixel Depth 12
Printer Pixel Size 38
(micron)
Printer Configuration LUT=Ver693c0.w87,6
Information
Smooth Factor 40
Trim NO
Polarity NORMAL
Printer Memory Size 40Mbytes
Select desired layouts 1:1, 1:2, 2:1, 2:2 Check at least one (1:1); more
Layouts allowed for this printer as desired
Slide formats
Page 526

Pixel height = 6286
Pixel height = 7342
Pixel height =
Pixel height = 8896
Film Sizes
Pixel height =8662
Pixel height = 10612
Pixel height =
Pixel height =
Section A.12 Konica Dry Pro 793 printer parameters

DICOM Printer Label Customer preference
Pixel Depth 12
Printer Configuration Information Dicom
Smooth Factor 1
Trim NO Not supported
Polarity NORMAL
Printer Memory Size 512
Page 527

Select the desired layouts 1:1, 2:1, 1:2, 4:1, 6:1
Slide formats
Pixel height =
Pixel height = 6826
Pixel height =
Pixel height =
Film Sizes
Pixel height =
Pixel height = 9725
Pixel height =
Pixel height =
Page 528
Glossary
ADC or A/D Analog to digital converter.
AE Title Application entity title. Name used to identify the DICOM nodes communicating to each other. AE
titles need to be locally unique, and are usually managed by a system administrator. They are case-
sensitive and 16 bytes long, and are configured before initializing a DICOM connection.
BIST Built in self test.
CAN Controller area network. A serial communication method.
CANOPEN Software communications protocol used in the CAN. Often called CAN.
CR- Mode where, if the PACS rejects DX images, CR images are sent instead. This occurs only if the
FALLBACK PACS does not support DX modality images, or if the PACS is configured to reject DX modality
images.
DAP METER Dose area product meter.
DICOM Digital Imaging and Communication in Medicine. A standard for distributing and viewing medical
images regardless of the source.
ELECTRO- A transfer of electrostatic charge between objects at different potentials caused by direct contact or
STATIC induced by an electrostatic field.
DISCHARGE
(ESD)
ESD Electrostatic discharge
FPGA Field programmable gate array. Programmed by the CPU core after a reset and handles all the
exposure control logic including the system interface real-time lines.
FRU Field replaceable unit. Spare part. This is a defined and GE-sanctioned assembly or component
specifically designated as replaceable outside GE’s controlled manufacturing or repair facilities.
GEHC General Electric Healthcare.
HHS United States Department of Health and Human Services. “HHS” is often used to refer to the
specific testing procedures defined in 21CFR regulations.
HV High voltage.
LAT Lateral.
LFC Load from cold. Complete software load.
LONG Longitudinal.
LOTO Lock out/tag out. Process defined by GEHC to ensure the safety of employees, specifically the
process of energy control for service activities of GE products.
LSL Lower specification limit.
Page 529
LUT Look-up table.
MAINS Hospital-supplied AC power.
OLC On-Line Center. GE Healthcare department that provides support to field service personnel.
OS Operating system.
POS Positioner.
PWA Printed wire board. Synonymous with printed circuit board (PCB).
RAD Radiography.
SID Source to image distance. Distance from the X-ray tube focal spot to the image plane ( or film
cassette).
SPGP System power ground point.
SUIF Service user interface.
TORQUE 1 N-m = 0.738 ft-lbs = 8.85 in-lbs.
UIF User interface.
USL Upper specification limit.
Page 530
© 2011-2020, General Electric Company.
GE Medical Systems, a General Electric Company, going to market as GE Healthcare.
3000 N. Grandview Boulevard
Waukesha, Wisconsin 53188
USA
www.gehealthcare.com
532

SM XR220

Transféré par

Informations du document

Copyright

Formats disponibles

Partager ce document

Partager ou intégrer le document

Options de partage

Avez-vous trouvé ce document utile ?

Ce contenu est-il inapproprié ?

Droits d'auteur :

Formats disponibles

SM XR220

Transféré par

Droits d'auteur :

Formats disponibles

Front cover

ADVANCED SERVICE DOCUMENTATION.

Direction 5336124-1EN, Rev 21

WARNING This service manual is available in English only.

VÝSTRAHA Tento provozní návod existuje pouze v anglickém jazyce.

WAARSCHUWING Deze onderhoudshandleiding is enkel in het Engels verkrijgbaar.

AVVERTENZA Il presente manuale di manutenzione è disponibile soltanto in lingua inglese.

ATENŢIE Acest manual de service este disponibil doar în limba engleză.

CERTIFIED ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR STATEMENT

LITHIUM BATTERY CAUTIONARY STATEMENT

DANGER - Risk of Explosion

ATTENTION - Danger d’Explosion

TECHNICAL MANUAL UPDATES

OMISSIONS AND ERRORS

Revision Date Reason for change

Revision Date Reason for change

Revision Date Reason for change

Revision Date Reason for change

Revision Date Reason for change

Preface Publication Conventions

Safety & Hazard Information

Text Format of Signal Words

• Destruction of a disk drive

Symbols and Pictorials Used

keep_up magnetic biohazard compressgas ppe-hearing

fragile impact corrosive heavyobject ppe-2people

static_elec heat general laser ppe-respitory

keep_dry pinch radiation poisongas ppe-loto

general explosive electrical flammable ppe-eye

torque crush/mechanical tipping Read Manual ppe-gloves

ce instuction poisonmatl entanglement instuction

EXAMPLES OF PREFIXES USED FOR GENERAL INFORMATION:

Computer Screen Output/Input Text Character Styles

Buttons, Switches and Keyboard Inputs (Hard & Soft Keys)

Chapter 2 Planned Maintenance.................................................................... 35

Chapter 3 System data and software ............................................................ 49

Chapter 5 Calibration .................................................................................... 111

Section 5.2 Touchscreen calibration .......................................................... 111

Chapter 6 Mechanical adjustment procedures .......................................... 127

Chapter 7 Regulatory testing....................................................................... 137

Section 7.4 Medical Device List ................................................................... 179

Chapter 8 Troubleshooting........................................................................... 181

Chapter 9 Replacement procedures ............................................................ 237

Section 9.6 Bins and Drive Handle ............................................................ 310

9.8.7 Tube yoke assembly.................................................................................................. 452

Appendix A Printer Configuration Information .............................................. 509

Glossary ................................................................................................................ 529

Chapter 1 Safety / Before You Begin

Section 1.1 Energy sources

Energy source Yes/No Location of energy Magnitude of energy

Type of equipment and/or method selected to dissipate or isolate stored energy:

Type of equipment and/or method used to ensure disconnections:

Chapter 1 Safety / Before You Begin Page 25

Section 1.2 Lock Out/Tag Out (LOTO) procedure for electrical

1.2.1 Preparing for LOTO

Figure 1-1 LOTO kit contents

Figure 1-2 Electrical energy lockout locations

Chapter 1 Safety / Before You Begin Page 27

1.2.2 Performing LOTO

Figure 1-3 Circuit breaker (E2) in OFF position

5. Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet.

Figure 1-4 AC power plug with locking device applied

7. Wait three minutes for discharge of stored energy.

Figure 1-5 Battery connectors J3/J4/J13/J14 and locking device